You are on page 1of 306

owner's Manual

Audi A3 I 53
Audi A3 I S3

Audi A3 Sportback I A3 Sportback g-tron I S3 Sportback

Audi A3 Saloon I S3 Saloon

Foreword

Thank you for choosing an Audi.

Your new Audi is a combination of superb craftsmanship and state-of-the-art


technology. We recommend that you read this Owner's Manual carefully so that
you qu ickly become familiar with your vehicle and can take full advantage of all
its functions in everyday use.

In addition to information on how to use the controls and equipment, this Man-
ual also contains important information on looking after your vehicle. This is rel-
evant for your safety and will help preserve your car's value. The Manual also of-
fers useful driving tips and advice, together with some suggestions on how to
drive your car with minimum impact on the environment.

In addition to this Owner's Manual, the Service Wallet also includes the Quick
Reference Guide, the Operating Manual for your infotainment system and the
Service Schedule.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring with your Audi .

AUDI AG

.&. WARNING
Please read the important safety information about the front passenger's air-
bag ~ page 172.

!11111111 llllllll lllHllll


l425618V020
2 Table of Contents

Notes on this Owner's Manual 5 Heati ng and cooling ......... . 77


Heating system I air conditioner .... . 77
Controls ...................... . 6 Auxiliary heating/ventilation ....... . 82
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . 6
Overview . . . ............ . ... . ... . 6 Driving . ... . . . . . . .. . ...... . .... . 86
Steering ....................... . 86
Ins truments and warning / Ignition lock . . . . . ............... . 86
i ndicator lamps ........ . . .... . 9 Vehicles with ignition lock ....... . . . 86
Instruments .............. . . . . . . . 9 Vehicles with convenience key ...... . 88
Warning and indicator lamps . . . . .. . 14 Driver messages . . . .............. . 91
Kick-down feature ............... . 92
Driver information system . . . 27 El ectro-mechan ical parking brake . . . . 92
Overview . . . . ................... . 27 Hold assist . . . . . . . .... . . .. .... . . . 95
Controls on windscreen wiper lever 28 Hill hold assist ...... ..... ... . ... . 95
Controls on multi-function steering Speed warning function ........... . 96
wheel . . . . . . ................... . 29 Cruise control system .......... . . . 97
Boost display . ........... . . . . . . . . 31 Start/stop system ............... . 98
Efficiency programme ......... . . . . 31
Camera-based traffic sign recognition 33 g-tron . ............. ...... ..... . 102
Rest recommendation ....... . . . . . . 35 Natural gas engine ............... . 102
Lap timer and engine oil temperature Filling the gas tank .. . ........... . 104
display . . . . . .............. . . . . . . 36
Controls on windscreen wiper lever 37 Automatic gearbox .......... . 106
Controls on multi-function steering S tronic gearbox . . . ............ . . . 106
wheel . ... . . . . ............ . . . . . . 39
Audi adaptive cruise control .. 116
Doors and windows ... . . . . . . . . 41 Introduction . . . . . . ............ . . . 116
Central locking system ........... . 41 General notes . . . . . ............ . . . 116
Boot lid . . . . . . . .......... . . . . . . . . 49 Adaptive cruise control 117
Child-proof catches ....... . . . . . . . . so
Electric windows ....... . . . . . . . . . . 51 Audi pre sense .... ........... . 125
Panorama sun roof .. ..... . . . . . . . . . 52 Introduction . . . ..... . ........... . 125
General notes . . . . . . . . ........... . 125
Lights and vision ....... . . . . . . . 54 Audi pre sense basic . . . .......... . . 125
Exterior lights .. .. ....... ....... 54 Audi pre sense front . . . .......... . . 125
Interior lights .......... . . . . . . . . . . 60 Driver messages . . . . . . .......... . . 127
Clear vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Windscreen wipers ........ . ... . . . . 62 Audi active lane assi st . . . . . . . . 128
Lane departure warn ing feature 128
Seats and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
General notes ...... ....... ..... . . 66 Audi side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Front seats . ............. . . . . . . . . 66 Lane change assist feature . . . . . . . . . 132
Head restraints ........ . . . . . . . . . . 68
Ashtray . . . . .. . .... . ..... .. . . . . . . 69
Cigarette lighter ... ...... . ... . . . . . 69
Electrical socket ......... . . ...... . 70
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Ta ble of Co nt:e nts 3

Audi drive sel ect: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Your vehicle and the


Adjusting the veh icle set-up . . . . . . . . 136 environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Parking aids . . . . . .. .. ..... .... . 139 Driving through water on roads . . . . . 190
General notes . . . . . . .. .. ..... .... . 139 Emission control systems . . . . . . . . .. 190
Rear parking aid . . . . .. .. ..... .... . 140 Taking the vehicle out of service . . . .. 191
Parking system plus . .. .. ..... .... . 140 How to improve economy and
Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 minimise pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 191
Park assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Environmental compatibility . . . . . . .. 192
Adjusting graphic display and warning
beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fault warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Driving the vehicle with a trailer or
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 caravan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . 198
S afe t y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Safety f irst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Genera l m a inte n a nce . . . . . . . . . 204
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Care of vehicle and cleaning . . 204
Correct sitting positions . . . . . . . . . . . 154 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Wash ing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fitting child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Notes on cleaning and care . . . . . . . . . 205
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Stowing luggage safely . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Checking and topping up
Pedestrian protection system . . . . . . . 163 fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fuel...... . . . . . . . .. ... ... . . . .... 209
Seat b e lts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 165 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Why is it so important to use seat Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 12
belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 165 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Forces acting in a collision . . . . . . . .. . 166 Cooling system. . . . . ... . . . ... . . .. . 216
How to wear seat belts properly . . .. . 167 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 169 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Airbag system . . ........ . . . . . . . 171
Description of airbag system........ 171 Wheels and tyre s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Kneeairbag ............ . . . . . . . . . 175 Run-flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Tyre pressure loss indicator......... 231
Head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Deactivating the front passenger's Accessories and modifications
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Accessories, replacement parts and
Driv ing t i p s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 233
Intel ligen t tech nol ogy . . . . . . . . 182 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 233
Electronic stabilisation control (ESC) . 182 Radio transmitters and business
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 233
Electro-mechanical power steering . . 185 Component protection . . . . . . . . . ... 234
Four-wheel drive (quattro) . . . . . . . . . . 186
Power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Information saved in the control units 188
4 Table of Contents

Self-help .. . ... ............. .. .. 235


Self-help . . . . . . ............. .. .. 235
General notes . . . .. .. . .. ... .. .. .. 235
Equipment . . . . . ............. .. .. 235
Tyre repair kit . . . .. .. .. . .... . .. .. 237
Changing a wheel ............. .. .. 238
Spare wheel . . . . .. . ... .. ... . .. .. 242
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tow-starting I towing away . . . . . . . . . 246

Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250


Fuses.. . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing bulbs in headlight unit . . . . 256
Changing bulb for front fog light . . . . 262
A3/A3 Sportback: Changing bulbs for
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
A3 Saloon : Changing bulbs for rear
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 272


Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 272
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . .. .. 272
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 273
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 273
Explanation of tecthnical data . . . .. .. 273
Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 275
Diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 284

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Notes on this Owner's Manual 5

This Owner's Manual contains import ant in-


formation, tips, suggestions and warnings.
CD CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention
Please ensure that this Owner's Manual is al- to a possible risk of damage to your vehi-
ways kept in the vehicle. It should always be cle.
available to anyone else driving the vehicle,
i.e. anyone renting, borrowing or buying the @ For the sake of the environment
vehicle from you.
Texts with this symbol refer to points rele-
This manual describes the equipment availa vant to the protection of the environment.
ble for the vehicle at the time of going to
print. Some of the equipment described here (D Note
will not be available until a later date, or may Text s with this symbol contain additiona l
only be available in certain markets. information of a more general nature.
Some sections of th is Owner's Manual do not
apply to a ll vehicles. If this is the case, a text
at the start of t he section indicates which
vehicles it applies to, e .g. "Applies to veh icles:
with auxiliary heater" . This optional or vehi-
cle-specific equipment is also marked with an
asterisk"" .

Illustrations are intended as a general guide,


and may vary from the equipment fitted in
your vehicle.
At the beginning of this Owner's Manual, you
will find a table of contents showing all the
items described in this manual in the order in
which they appear. An alphabetical index is
included at the end of the Owner's Manual.
All references to positions such as "left".
"right", "front" or "rear" are given as seen fac-
ing in the direction of travel.

" Optional or vehicle-specific equipment


IJ)I> The section is continued on t he fo llowing
page.
.&. Refers to a "WARNING" within the same
section. If the WARNING symbol is followed
by a page number the warning text referred to
is included in a different section.

A WARNING
Texts with this symbol contain safety infor-
mation. They warn you of serious dangers,
possibly involving accident or injury.
6 Controls and displays

Controls and displays


Overview

Fig. l Front cabin: Left side

Fig. 2 Front cabin: Right sid e


Controls a nd displays 7

@ Electric windows Sl - Safety switch ............ . Sl


@ Door handle @ Depending on equipment fitted:
Audi side assist . ... . .... . . . . 132 Sound system or MMI display
@ Central locking switch ....... . 47 (navigation system, radio, TV/
video)
Electric adjuster for exterior
mirrors 61 @ Glove box with CD changer ... . 71
Light switch ....... . ....... . 54 @) Front passenger's airbag .... . 172
(j) Air outlets 77 8 Loudspeaker (treble)
@ Depending on equipment fitted,
Control lever for:
buttons for:
- Turn signals and main beam
headlights ...... . .. . . . . . . SS - Drive select .............. . 136
- Audi active lane assist ..... . 128 - Start/stop system ....... . . 98
- Main beam assist ......... . S6 - Park assist .... . ......... . 146
Steering wheel w i th horn and - Parking system plus (with op-
tional reversing camera) ... . 140
- Driver's airbag ....... . . . . . 172
- Hazard warning lights ..... . S9
- Controls for on-board comput-
- Electronic stabilisation control
er . . ... ..... . .. ... . . . . .. 29
(ESC) ................... . 182
- Controls for sound system,
- MMI display
telephone, navigation system
and speech dialogue system
- Airbag off display . . . . ..... . 180
- Paddle levers for tiptronic @ Console for the following (asap-
gearshift (automatic gearbox) 111 plicable):

@ Reset button for trip recorder 10 - Heating/ventilation system or


manual air conditioner ..... . 77
@ Instrument cluster .. . . . . . . . . 9
- Automatic air conditioner .. . 79
@ Control lever for:
@ Depending on equipment fitted :
- Windscreen wipers and wash-
- Cigarette lighter . . .... . . .. . 69
er . . . . . . . . . . . ... .... . . . . . 62
- Electrical socket . ......... . 70
- On-board computer . . . . ... . 27
@ Steering column with:
@ Depending on gearbox fitted,
gear lever or selector lever for:
- Manual operation function for
- Manual gearbox
ignition (on vehicles with con-
venience key) ............ . 91 - S tronic 106
- Ignition lock (on vehicles with @ Cup holder ................ . 70
mechanical ignition lock) ... . 86 @ ON/OFF button for sound sys-
@ Adjustable steering column . . . 86 tem/MM I

@ Depending on equipment fitted: @ MM! control console


- Lever for cruise control 97 @ Hold assist .... . . . . . . . ..... . 9S
- Adaptive cruise control .... . 116 @ Parking brake ............. . 92
@ Headlight range control ..... . S4 @ ISTART ENGINE STOP I button 88
@ Knee airbag .. .. . . ... . .. . . . . 17S @ Centre console with optional
@ Instrument lighti ng ........ . 60 equipment:

@) Bonnet lock release ....... .. . 213 - Ashtray . . . . .... . . . ... . .. . 69


- Carrier for car key and mobile
@ Child safety switch, depending
phone .................. .
on equipment fitted:
- Electric child safety switch .. so
8 Controls and displays

(D Note
- Some of the items of equipment Listed in
this section are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
- Please refer to the separate operating
manual for instructions on using the
sound system or Multi Media Interface
(MM!), where you will also find informa-
tion on Audi connect.
- The arrangement of switches and con-
trols on right-hand drive models* may be
slightly different from the layout shown
on ~ page 6. However, the symbols used
to identify the controls are the same.
Instruments and warning/indicator lamps 9

Instruments and warning/indicator lamps


Instrument:s
Instrument cluster overview
The instrument cluster is the driver's information centre.

Fig. 3 Overview of instrument cluster

The instrument cluster is d ifferent on models the vehicle's lights are switched on. The in-
with natural gas engine* Q page 103. stnument lighting is dimmed automatical-
ly as the daylight starts to fade. This func-
CD Rev counter with warning lamps
tion is intended to remind the driver to
@ Coolant temperature gauge* or switch on the dipped-beam headlights in
boost pressure display* ...... 11, 31
good t ime when light conditions become
Indicator lamps (turn signals) poor.
Display
- Warning/indicator lamps and 14 Setting the time/date
- Driver information system* . . 27
- Date and time ......... . . . 9
- Mileage recorder .... . . . . . . 10
- Service interval display .... . 13
Speedometer with warning
lamps
Fuel gauge . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 11
0 Display for: Central warning/in
dicator lamp or system displays 14
@ Reset button for trip record- Fig. 4 Instrument cluster : Time and date display (ex
ample)
er Ia.a I . ... .............. . . 10
The date, time and display format can be
(D Note
changed using the sound system or MMI* con-
The needles on the dials in the instrument trol console. Please refer to the MMI Operat-
cluster are illuminated when the ignition is ing Manual for further details. II>-
switched on. The main instrument lighting
(for the dials and needles) comes on when
10 In struments and warning/indicator lamps

Depending on the equipment fitted, you can


select a quartz clock or a GPS-controlled
@ For the sake of the environment

clock* l!j on the MMI*. Please refer to the Changing up a gear early will help you to
sound system or MMI Operating Manual for save fuel and minimise engine noise.
more details.
Mileage recorder
1 Note
- The date and time will be displayed for
about 30 seconds after you switch off
the ignition or open the driver's door.
- You can also call up the display when the
ignition is switched off by pressing the
lo.ol button Q page 9, Fig. 3.

Rev counter
Fig. s Instrument cluster: Mileage recorder and reset
The rev counter indicates the number of en- button
gine revolutions per minute.
The m ileage is stated in kilometres ("km") or
It's a good idea to keep an eye on the rev miles ("mi"). You can switch the display from
counter and gear-change indicator because kilometres ("km") to miles ("mi") and vice ver-
you can minimise engine wear by driving at sa on the sound system/MM!* . Please refer to
moderate engine speeds. the sound system or MMI* Operating Manual
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates for more details.
the maximum engine speed which may be Odometer/ trip recorder
used briefly in all gears when the engine is
warm and after it has been run in properly. @ - The odometer records the vehicle's total
However, it is advisable to change up a gear mileage.
(on vehicles with manual gearbox) or move -The trip recorder shows the distance that
the selector lever to "D" (on vehicles with au- has been travelled since it was last reset. It is
tomatic gearbox) or lift your foot off the ac- used to measure individual journeys. The last
celerator before the needle reaches the red digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of
zone. 100 metres or tenths of a mile.
In general it is best to avoid high engine The trip recorder can be reset to zero by press-
speeds and to follow the recommendations ing the button Io.oI Q page 9, Fig. 3.
g iven by the gear-change indicator. For fur-
ther information please refer to ~ page 12, Fault display
Gear-change indicator or Q page 31, Ad- If there is a fault in the instruments, the let-
vanced gear-change indicator. ters DEF appear in the trip recorder display.
Have the fault rectified as soon as possible.
CD CAUTION
The rev counter needle (!) Q page 9, Fig. 3 l Note
must only ever briefly go into the red zone - The recorded mileage will be displayed
on the scale; otherwise there is a risk of for about 30 seconds after you swit ch off
engine damage. the ignition or open the driver's door.
- You can also call up the display when the
ignition is switched off by pressing the
lo.o I button Q page 9, Fig. 3.
Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 11

Outside temperature display Coolant temperature gauge

The outside temperature is shown on the in- On vehicles which do not have a coolant tem-
strument cluster display. At temperatures be- perature gauge, a warning lamp .
low approx. +5C a snowflake symbol appears ~ page 20 will be the sole indication If the
next to the temperature display. coolant temperature is too high. Please refer
to Q (i).
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at
very low speeds, the temperature displayed The coola nt temperatu re gauge @ Q page 9,
may be slightly higher than the actual outside Fig. 3 only works when t he ignition is switch-
temperature as a result of the heat radiated ed on. In order to avoid possible damage to
from the e ngine. the engine, please read the fo llowing notes
for t he d ifferent temperature ranges .
.&_ WARNING
- 1 Engine cold
Do not rely on the outside temperature
display as an ice warning. Bear in mind If the LEDs are still in the lower range of the
that there may be patches of ice on the display, th is indicates that the engine has not
roads even at outside temperatures yet reached operating temperature. Avo id
around +5 c - risk of accident! high eng ine speeds, full acceleration and
heavy engine loads.
(D Note Normal temperatu re
The measurement units for temperature
In normal operation the LEDs will settle
or speed, etc. can be changed via the
somewhere in the centre of the display once
sound system or MMI*.
the engine has reached operating tem pera-
ture .. The LEDs may also rise further up the
Fuel gauge (petrol/diesel) display when the engine is working hard at
high outside temperatures. This is no cause
The gauge page 9, Fig . 3 only works
for concern, provided the warning lamp .
when the ignition is switched on . When the
does not light up in the instrument cluster.
gauge reaches the reserve zone, the LED at
the bottom of the dial will light up in red and Hot zone
the indicator lamp ~ will appear
If the LEDs reach the top part of the display
page 24. The LED alt the bottom of the di-
and t he warning lamp . appears in the in-
al will flash in red if the fuel level is very low.
strument cluster d isplay, the coolant temper-
The instrument cluster display @ page 9, atu re is too high Q page 20.
Fig. 3 shows how far you can travel on the fuel
left in the tank. CD CAUTION
The t ank capacity of your vehicle is given in - Some vehicles have a boost pressure dis-
the Technical data sect ion 9 page 273. play in place of the temperature display.
Vehicles with a natural gas engine have a
CD CAUTION separate gas fuel gauge in place of t he
Never run the tank completely dry. If there temperature d isplay. To ensu re that your
is an irregular fuel supply, misfiring can engine enjoys a long service life, you
occu r. Unburnt fuel can then enter the ex- should avoid high engine speeds, full ac-
haust system. This can lead to overheating celeration and heavy engine loads for the
and damage to the catalytic converter. fi rst 15 minutes or so after starting a
cold eng ine. The amount of time the en-
gine takes to warm up depends on the ..,.
12 Instruments and warning /i ndicator lamps

outside temperature. On vehicles with a Service interval display page 13


boost pressure display, you can use the page 10
Mileage and trip recorder
engine oil temperature page 36 as a
Start/stop system page 98
guide if you are not sure whether the en-
gine is warm . Seat belt warning system for page26
-Additional lights and other accessories in rear seats
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling Gear-change indicator page 12
effect of the radiator. At high outside Selector lever positions for page 106
temperatures and high engine loads, automatic gearbox
there is a risk of the engine overheating. Outside temperature page 11
- The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-
Fuel gauge page 11
tribution of the cooling air when the ve-
hicle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged
this can reduce the cooling effect, which Gear-change indicator
could cause the engine to overheat. You Applies to vehicles: with gear-change Indicator

s hould obtain professional assistance. This additional indicator function can help to
save fuel.
(!) Note
Diesel engines are so efficient that they
may not reach their full operating temper-
ature in very cold weather. This is quite
normal and no cause for concern.

Display
Applies to vehicles: without driver information system

Fig. 7 Instrument cluster: Gear-change indicator (for


manual gearbox)

Fig. 6 (nstrument cluster: Display without driver Infor-


mation system

The instrument cluster display shows the fol- Fig. 8 Instrument cluster: Gear-change indicator in
lowing : tiptronic mode (for automatic gearbox)

Rad io station or CD To familiarise yourself with the gear-change


Time/date (after ignition is page9 indicator, drive in the normal way to start
switched off) with. A gear change will be recommended if
the gear you are in is not the most economical
Estimated range of fuel in
choice .
tank
Cruise control system page 97 If no gear change is recommended, you are al-
ready in the most economical gear. Ill"
Driver messages and warn- page 14
ing/indicator lamps
Instruments and warning/indicator lamps 13

Vehicles with manual gearbox Service interval display


Meaning of the symbols in the display The service interval display detects when the
QFig. 7: next service is due for your vehicle.
- ~Shifting up a gear: The suggested gear
appears to the right of the current gear
when a higher gea r is recommended.
- ~S h ifting down a gear: The suggested gear
appears to the left of the current gear when
a lower gea r is recommended.

Gears may occasionally be skipped when a


gear change is recommended (2 ... 4).

Vehicles with automatic gearbox Fig. 9 Instrument cluster: Service interval display (ex-
ample)
The display is only visible in tiptronic mode
Q page 111.

Meaning of the symbol on the display <::) Fig. 8:

- f Shift up

CD CAUTION
The gear-change indicator is intended to
help save fuel. It is not intended to recom-
mend the right gear for all driving situa-
tions. In certain situations, only the driver Fig. 1 0 MM!" system display on dashboard: Service in-
terval display (example)
can choose the correct gear (for instance
when overtaking, driving up a steep gradi- There are two service interval display levels:
ent or towing a trailer) .
- Inspection or o il change reminder: After a
i Note certain mileage, a service reminder will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster display each
The gear-change ind icator in the instru-
time the ignition is switched on/off <::) Fig. 9.
ment cluster ~ Fig. 7 goes out when you
The distance or time remaining will be
press the clutch ped al.
shown briefly.
- Inspection or oil change due: When your
veh icle is d ue for an inspection, oil cha nge
or both, the correspond ing rem inder Inspec-
tion due!, Oil change due! or Oil change
and inspection duel wi ll appear briefly after
you switch the ignition on/off.

The following description distinguishes be-


tween vehicles with sound system* or MMI*.

Checking the service intervals*


In the MMI*, you can look up the distance and
time remaining until the next oil change or
next service inspection. To do so, select ~
14 Instruments and warning / indicator lamps

IMENU I button > Sys t em s I Car systems > - The time until the next oil change is not
Servicing & checks :> Service intervals. counted down If the battery is disconnec-
ted. If your vehicle is out of service for an
You cannot check the service interval for the
extended period, please refer to the
first 500 km or so after resetting the display
Service Schedule for details of the next
or when your vehicle is new.
service date.
Resetting the display (sound system*)
Your qualified workshop resets the service in- Warning and indicator
terval display after each service. lamps
If you change the oil yourself, you can reset Description
the oil change display. In this case, the next
oil change will be due after a fixed service in-
terval of 15,000 km or one year.
To reset the display, select the fo llowing on
the sound system: IS ETUP I button >control
button ~ Oil change interval > Reset oil
change inte rv. After you reset the display, it
will show the fixed service intervals
(15,000 km or one year)ll.
Fig . 11 Instrument cluster: Display layout on vehicles
Resetting the display (MMI*) with monochrome display (example)

Your qualified workshop resets the service in-


@ Warning/indicator lamp
terval display after each service.

-I
@ Driver message
If you change the oil yourself, you can reset Status line:
the oil change display. In this case, the next
oil change will be due after a fixed service in-
0 Central warning/indicator lamp
or additional display of activated system
terval of 15,000 1 l km or one year.
such as:
To reset the display, select IMENU I button>
Systems I Car syst e m s > Servicing & checks>
Service inte rvals > Reset oil change interval.
After you reset the display, it will show the
fixed service intervals (15,000 km or one
-I.
- rlJ 8 Electronic parking brake
- . . Cruise control system*
Active lane assist*
The central wa rning / indicator lamp . or
year) 1 l.
II may light up in addition to some of the
warning and ind icator lamps @ .
CD CAUTION If the central warning/indicator lamp
- Do not reset the oil change interval dis- lights up, observe the additional information
play unless you have changed the oil. @ and in the instrument cluster display.
- Keeping to the correct service intervals is There are two versions of the instrument clus-
most important for the service life and ter: one with a monochrome display, and one
residual value of the vehicle (and espe- with a multi-coloured display. On the mono-
cially for the life of the engine). Services chrome display, the warning and indicator
must always be carried out promptly, lamps @ appear only in white c:) Fig . 11 . ..,.
even if the mileage is low.

1> May vary in different countries


Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 15

In addition to those on the display, add itional 11 @ Priority 1 (h igh priority)


warn ing and indicator lamps are located with-
in the rev counter and speedometer. These See red warning lamps
@
lamps light up or flash to indicate functions or
fa ults. Some of the warning and indicator
m0 Priority 2 (med ium priority)
lamps may be accompanied briefly by a mes- See yellow indicator lamps
sage @ and, in some cases, a warning tone.
II
@l @ Priority 3 (lower priority)
If several malfunctions occur, each of the indi- These ind icator lamps are for in-
cator/warning lamps w ill be shown in succes- -- fo rmationa l purposes
sion for a short time on the display.
Red warning lamps
The warning/indicator lamps and driver mes- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Central warning/indicator lamp


sages on the d isplay can be masked by further
(observe add itiona l information
d isplays. If the warning/indicator lamp @ is
on t he instrument cluster d is-
hidden by another display, the centra l warn-
ing/indicator lamp remains lit until the play) page 14, Fig. 11
malfunction is correct ed . or
You can have the messages displayed again on Driver message for Audi
the driver information system. Depending on pre sense
the equipment in your vehicle, you can use the c:::> page 126
following to operate the driver information
Brake system ./
syst em:
c::> page 19
- Vehicles with controls on windscreen wiper Electro-mechanical parking
lever c:::> page 28 brake
- Vehicles with controls on mu lti-function c:::>poge 19
steering wheel page 30 Cooling system
page20
Overview
or
When you switch on the ign ition, some of the
warning and indicator lamps light up briefly
to show that the associated systems are work-
ing properly. These systems are marked with a
./ in the fo llowing tables. If one of these
Eng ine oil pressure
warn ing/indicator lamps does not light up,
c:::>page21
there is a fault in the associated system.
or
On vehicles with a monochrome display, if a
w hite warning/indicat or lamp @ c:::> page 14,
Fig. 1 1 appears, the centra l warning/indicator
lamp @ I II also appears and indicates
the priority level of the warn ing. Please read
the corresponding explanation of the red and
yellow symbols.

The follow ing are examples of warning and in-


d icator lamps on the d isplay:
16 Instruments and warning/indicator lamps

Alternator Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ./


page 21 page22
or
Safety systems ./
page 21
Brake pads
"O:\.,
I
~
I
~ page23

Electro-mechanical parking
Front seat belt brake
c?page 21 page 19
Steering./ Hill hold assist*
c?page 185 page23
Steering lock or
c? page 21
Engine stopped while vehicle is
~
moving
or page 22 ~
Tyre pressure loss indicator./
U) ~ page231

Tyre pressure loss indicator


TPMS ~page231

Gearbox malfunction
c?page 113 ; Suspension control*
page26
or or

Adaptive cruise control* Engine management system


page 118 (petrol engines) ./
page23
Yellow indicator lamps
~~~~~~~~~~~~

Engine management system


Central indicator lamp (observe
additional information on the in- (diesel engines) ./
~page23
strument cluster display)
Electronic stabilisation control Emission control system./
(ESC) ./ r=>page23
c? page 22 Diesel particulate filter*
Electronic stabilisation control page23

(ESC) ./ or
page22
Electronic stabili sation control
(ESC)
page 182
Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 17

Engine speed governing W indscreen wipers


o page24 page25
or or

Engine oil level (min .) Engine start system


o page 24 page25
or or

Engine oil sensor Steering .//steering lock


page 24 page 185
or Steering lock
page 21
Remote control key
page 91
or
Engine temperature
page20
or

Remote control key


page 91
Battery in remote control key
Battery charge page43
o page 21 Bulb monitor
or page25
or

or
18 Instruments and warning/i ndicator lamps

Headlight range control* Adaptive cru ise control*


page 25 page 118
or Adaptive cru ise cont rol*
page 118
I I Adaptive cru ise control*
8 page 118
Active lane assist*
J;\ page 129
Aud i hold assist*
or page95
Start/stop system*
page 98

Vehicle in natural gas mode


page 103
or Main beam head lights
page 56
{i.D Main beam assist*
page 56 or
& Adaptive headlight range con

.
trol page 57
/l\ ~ , , ..
y) Remot e control key
page 91

0 - , ....
.. I I

Park assist*
page 146
or
Park assist*

0 page 146
Electro-mechanical parking
& brake
page 19
Km/
I .... I

..... , , ...
Adaptive crui se control*
page 118
Further indicator lamps Active lane assist*
Turn signals /l\ page 129
c:> poge 26 ' I I
~
... , , ...
.
0 ... , ....
I I

Trai ler t urn signals*


page 26 Aud i hold assist*
Cruise control system*
(@} page 95
page 97
Instruments and warning/indicator lamps 19

Electro-mechanical parking If the parking brake cannot be released you


brake should obtain professional assistance. If the
Qpoge 19 parking brake can be released but the warn-
ing lamp/message still appears, drive to a
Camera-based traffic sign recog-
nition qualified workshop without delay and have
Q poge33 the fault rectified .
- If the warning lamp and the message ap-
Rest recommendation
pear while driving, there may be a ma [func-
Q poge35
tion in the parking brake auto release or the
Child-proof catches (electric)* emergency brake functions. You may not be
Q pageSO able to apply or release the parking brake.
Auxiliary heating/ventilation* Do not park the car on a gradient. Obtain
Q page82 professional assistance.

Rear seat belt./


Q poge26
.&. WARNING
- B.efore opening the bonnet and checking
Rear seat belt./
the brake fluid level, observe the warn-
Q poge26
ing information on Q page 212, Work-
ing on components in the engine com-
<CD> Brake system partment.
- If the brake warning lamp does not go
If the warning lamp lights up, there is a fault
out, or if it lights up when driving, the
in the brake system.
brake fluid level in the reservoir is too
Stop vehicle and check brake fluid level low - this may cause an increased acci-
dent risk. Stop the vehicle and do not
Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid lev-
drive on. You should obtain professional
el. Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
assistance .
Warning! Brake servo inoperative! - If the brake warning lamp lights up to-
You need to apply much more force to operate gether with the ABS indicator lamp and
the brakes if the brake servo fails . You should the ESC indicator lamp, this can mean
obtain professional assistance. that the control function of the ESC/ABS
is not working. Input from the functions
Warning! Fault in brake system. Contact that stabilise the vehicle is no longer
workshop available. This could cause the tail of t he
If the ABS indicat or lamp [I] and ESC indica- vehicle to skid s ideways. Drive carefully
tor lamp DJlight up together with the brake to the nearest qualified workshop and
warn ing lamp . andl this driver message ap- have the fault rectified.
pears, the ABS, ESC and brake force d istribu-
tion systems have failed Q .&. CJ/'!ll1 Electro-mechan ical parking brake
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay The warning lamp . lights up when the
and have the fault corrected q .&. parking brake is applied . The warning lamp
Parking brake system fault! See owner's will light up for about 20 seconds if the park-
manual ing brake is applied with the ignition switched
off.
- If the warning lamp and the message ap-
pear after you switch on the ignition when Caution: Vehicle parked too steep
the vehicle Is stationary, please check
whether you can release the parking brake.
20 Instruments and warning/indicator lamps

If the warning lamp flashes and the message (~))Caution : Vehicle parked too steep
appears, the brake may not be strong enough
a1j Parking brake is applied
to hold the vehicle. The brakes have overhea-
ted. The vehicle can roll away, even on a gen- If this message appears, press the brake pedal
tle s lope. and then release the parking brake as neces-
sary.
Press brake pedal to release parking
brake Note
To release the parking brake, press the brake For further information on the parking
pedal and simultaneously press the switch ~ brake refer to r:::.>page 92.
(alternatively, use the auto release function
<::> page 94, Driving away from a standstill) .
-L I f Cooling system
l!I Parking brake! Switch off engine and check coolant level
There is a malfunction in the parking brake.
The coolant level is too low or the cool.ant
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay
temperature is too high.
and have the fault rectified.
Switch off the engine and do not drive on.
lit Parking brake! Check the coolant level r:::.> page 216.
There is a malfunction in the parking brake.
- If the coolant level is too low, add more
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
coola nt <=:> page 217. Do not drive on until
the fault rectified.
the warning lamp has gone out.
[I] Audi hold assist: only available when - If the coolant level is correct, the overheat-
door is closed, seat belt is fastened and en- ing may be caused by a malfunction of the
gine is running rad iator fan. Do not drive on. You should ob-
If this message appears, make s ure that the tain professional assistance.
door is closed, the seat belt is buckled and the Coolant temperature too high! Please let
engine is running. engine run with vehicle stationary
[iJ Audi hold assist: unavailable Let the engine cool down by running it at
If this message appears, the system require- idling speed for a few minutes.
ments have not been met. 0 Please warm up engine
Parking brake: not applied ! Applies to certain types of engine only and in-
If this message appears, it may be necessary dicates that the engine has not yet reached its
to apply the parking brake. proper working temperature.

[ii] Please release parking brake .&. WARNING


If t his message appears, release the parking - Never open the bonnet if you can see or
brake. hear steam or coolant escaping from the
engine compartment; the re is a risk of
[ii] Parking brake auto release: system fault
being scalded. Wait until you can no lon-
If this message appears, press the brake pedal ger see or hear escaping steam or cool-
and then release the parking brake. ant.
[ii] Parking brake system fault: anti-towing - The engine compartment of any motor
alarm blocked vehicle is a dangerous place. Before car-
rying out any work in the engine com-
[ii] Parking brake: not applied automatically partment, switch off the engine and ~
Instruments and warning / indicator lamps 21

allow it to cool down. Please observe the If t his message disappears after a while, the
important safety warnings ~ page 212, battery will have been sufficiently charged
Working on components in the engine while driving.
comportment. If the message does not disappear again,
drive to a qualified workshop without delay
CD CAUTION and have the fault rectified.
Do not drive on if the warning lamp
lights up; otherwise there is a risk of en- !#.' Safety systems
gine damage.
The indicator Lamp fll
monitors the safety
systems and the pedestrian protection sys-
'l:::r: Engine oil pressure
tem .
Switch off engine! OH pressure too low
Safety system
Switch off the engine and do not drive on.
Check the engine oil leve l ~ page 215.
If t he indicator Lamp fll
lig hts up or flashes,
there is a ma lfunction in one of the safety sys-
- If the engine oil level is too low, add more tems.
oil ~ page 214. Do not drive on until the
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay
warning lamp has gone out.
and have the fault rectified.
- If the engine oil level is OK but the warning
lamp still lights up, switch off the engine Pedestrian protection system
and do not drive on. You should obtain pro-
fessional assistance.
If the indicator Lamp El
lights up or flashes
and t he bonnet is in a raised position, the pe-
destrian protection system has been trig-
i Note
gered. Please refer to ~ page 163, Pedes-
The oil pressure warning Lamp is not an in- trian protection system.
dicator for the oil level. The oil level
should therefore be checked regularly. A WARNING
Have the safety systems examined without
D Alternator I battery delay; ot herwise they may fail to trigger in
an accident - this could result in serious or
Alternator fault: Battery is not being
possibly fatal injury.
charged

There is an a lternator fault or a fault in t he ve-


,(t. Front seat belt
hicle's e lectrica l system.
Drive to a q ualified workshop without delay. The warning Lamp . Lights up and does not
Avoid using e lectrical equipment that is not go out until the driver's and passenger's seat
belts have been fastened. When the vehicle
absolutely necessary (such as the radio) be-
has gathered speed you will also hear a warn-
cause this will drain t he battery. If the battery
ing chime.
charge is insufficient, obtain professional as-
sistance.
1 Note
li1 Low battery charge: Battery will be For further information on the seat belts
charged while driving
~ page 165.
Starting reliability may be impaired.
@- Steering lock

Do not drive vehicle: steering defective ""


22 Instruments and warning/i ndicator lamps

There is a malfunction in the electronic steer- f"!.I[/;


Electronic stabilisation control
ing lock. The ign ition can no longer be switch- (ESC) and C8 >anti-lock brake system
ed on. (ABS)

Do not have the vehicle towed away, because If the indicator lamp DJ flashes while the ve-
you won't be able to steer it. You should ob- hicle is in motion, the ESC or traction control
tain professiona l assistance. system (ASR) is intervening.
II St eering lock: m alfunction. Please con Ifthe indicator lamp DJ lights up, the ESC
tact workshop system has been switched off for system rea-
sons. In this case, the ESC can be reactivated
There is a malfunction in the electron ic steer-
by switching the ignition off and then o n
ing lock.
again. If the ind icator lamp goes out, this
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have means the system is fully functional.
the fault rectified.
Stabilisation control ( ESC): sport. Warning!
.&_ WARNING Restricted stability

Your vehicle must not be towed if there is If the indicator lamp II lights up, the ESC
a fault in the electronic steering lock - risk sport mode has been activated via the I~ OFFI
of accident! button ~ page 183. You can switch the ESC
system back on by pressing the IE OFF I button
again.
~ Engine
Stabilisation control ( ESC): off. Warning! Re-
Engine stopped: brake servo and power
stricted stability
steering not possib[e
If the indicator lamp . lights up, the ESC
There is a malfunction in t he engine or fue l system has been partially or completelly
supply system. switched off via the I;, OFF I button
Greater strength is required to steer and ~ page 183. In addition, ESC OFF wi ll ap-

brake the vehicle if the eng ine stops while the pear. You can switch the ESC system back on
vehicle is coasting. Carefully try to bring the by pressing the IE OFF I button aga in.
coasting vehicle safely to a standstill out of The system is activated when you switch on
the way of moving traffic. You should obtain the ignition. If the indicator lamp II goes
professional assistance. out, t his means the system is fully functional.

.&. WARNING 1
Stabilisation control (ESC): fault! See own-
er's manual
Greater strength is required to brake the
vehicle if the engine stops while the vehi- Stabilisation control (ESC/ ABS): fault! See
cle is moving - risk of accident! Greater owner's manual
strength will be required to steer the vehi-
ABS: fault! See owner's manual
cle unless the power steering is still pro-
viding assistance. The power steering may If the indicator lamp I] and the ABS indicator
still be available if the vehicle is still coast- lamp mJ light up and the message appears,
ing with the ignition switched on (and the t here is a ma lfunction in the anti-lock brake
battery charge is sufficient). system or electronic differential lock. Th is will
also cause an ESC malfunction. The vehicle
can still be braked in the normal way (however
the ABS control function will be out of action) . .,..
Instruments and warning/indicator lamps 23

Drive to a qualified workshop without delay If t he indicator lamp Gi lights up when start-
and have the fault rectified. ing the engine, there is a malfunction in the
automatic start function. To start the engine,
_& WARNING follow the steps described : Vehicles with me-
If the brake warning lamp . lights up to- chanical ignition lock r:: :> page 87, vehicles
gether with the ABS indicator lamp and with convenience key r:: :> page 89.
the ESC indicator lamp, this can mean that
the control function of the ESC/ABS is not W Engine management (diesel engine)
working . Input from the functions that Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine
stabilise the vehicle is no longer available.
If the indicator lamp &I lights up when the
This could cause the vehicle to skid side-
ignition is switched on, the glow plugs are
ways. Drive carefully to the nearest quali-
preheating.
fied workshop and have the fault rectified.
If the indicator lamp flashes whi le the vehicle
(j) Note is moving, there is a fault in the engine man-
For more information about the ESC and agement system.
ABS systems, refer to Q page 182. Drive slowly to a qua lified workshop without
delay a nd have the fault rectified.
<O> Brake pads If the indicator lamp II lights up when start-
lll Brake pads! ing the engine, there is a malfunction in the
automatic start function. To start the engine,
The brake pads are worn. follow the steps described : Vehicles with me-
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay chanical ignition lock r:: :> page 87, vehicles
and have the brake pads checked . with convenience key r:: :> page 89.

~ Hill hold assist 0 Emission control system

Hill hold assist : unavailable If the indicator lamp II


lights up or flashes, a
fault has occurred which can reduce the quali-
If the indicator lamp . lights up and the
ty of the exhaust gas and damage the catalyt-
message appears, the hill hold assist function ic converter.
is unavailable.
Drive slowly to a qualified workshop without
Manual control!
delay and have the fau lt rectified.
If this message appears, press the brake ped-
a l. ~ Diesel particulate filter
Applies to vehicles: with diesel eng in e and diesel particu
Use the parking brake for the hi ll start
late filter
r:: :> page 92.
Particulate filter : system fault. See own-
er's manual
EPC Engine management (petrol engine)
Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine The diesel particulate filter requires regenera-
If the indicator lamp [3i lights up, there is a tion. You can assist the self-cleaning function
of the filter by driving as follows :
fault in the engine management system.
Drive at a speed of at least 60 km/h for about
Drive slowly to a qualified workshop without
15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear, or with these-
delay and have the engine checked .
lector lever in position Son vehicles with au-
tomat ic gearbox. Keep the engine speed at Ill>
24 Instruments and warning/indicator lamps

about 2000 rpm. As a result of the increase in You can continue driving for the time being
temperature, the soot in the filter will be but you should check the engine oil level as
burned off. The indicator lamp will go out soon as possible c> page 214.
once the cleaning process has been completed
- If the engine oil level is too low, add more
successfully.
oil ~ page 216.
If the indicator lamp does not go out, drive to - If the engine oil level is normal but the indi-
a qualified workshop without delay and have cator lamp stays on, drive to a qualified
the fault rectified. workshop without delay and avoid high en-
gine speeds.
&. WARNING
It is essential that you adjust your speed ~... Engine oil sensor
to suit the weather, road, terrain and traf-
fic conditions. The recommended driving Oil level! Sensor defective
speed must never lead to the driver disre- The sensor for checking the engine oil level
garding the traffic regulations. has failed. Drive to a qualified workshop soon
and have the fault rectified.
(!) Note
For more information about the diesel par- CD CAUTION
ticulate filter, refer to c> page 190. Please observe the procedure described in
the Owner's Manual Q page 215 and
!/\ Engine speed governing page 216, Topping up the engine oil
Applies to vehicles: with engine speed governing ~.

II! Max. engine speed XXXX rpm Bl Fuel tank system (petrol/diesel)
The engine speed will automatically be gov-
erned to the speed displayed in the driver in- fiD Please refuel
formation system. This protects the engine When the indicator lamp lights up for the first
from overheating. time and the message appears, the following
The rev limiter is deactivated as soon as the amount of fuel is left in the tank:
engine temperature is no longer within the - Front-wheel drive vehicles: approx. 7 litres
critical range and you have taken your foot off - Four-wheel drive vehicles: approx. 8 . 5 litres
the accelerator.
fiD Tank system m a lfunction! Contact work-
If the rev Limiter has been activated because shop
of a fault in the engine management system,
the ind icator lamp [Si will also Light up. Make If the indicator lamp Lights up and the mes-
sure that the engine speed does not exceed sage appears:
the speed displayed in the driver information - there is a malfunction in the tank system, or
system, for example when shifting down a - on vehicles with a diesel engine, water may
gear. Drive to a qualified workshop without have collected in the fuel filter.
delay and have the fault rectified.
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay
and have the fault rectified.
'!:: Engine oil level (min .)

Please check oil level ! CD CAUTION


Applies to vehicles with diesel engine: If
poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be .,..
Instruments and warning/ indicator lamps 25

necessary to have the water separator 1> on ~ Bulb monitor


the fuel filter drained more frequently Applies to vehicles: with driver 1nformat1on system
than is specified in the Service Schedu le.
This helps to prevent potential engine If the indicator lamp II
lights up, a bulb has
faults. failed. The message indicates the location of
the bulb.
~ For the sake of the environment You should have the bulb replaced without de-
Never pour fuel down drains or into the lay.
ground.
Vehicle lights: malfunction!

i Note There is a fault with the headlights or light


switch. Drive to a qualified workshop soon
For more information about filling the
and have the fault rectified.
tank, referto c::> page210.

~Washer fluid level


A WARNING
- Bulbs are sensit ive to pressure. The g lass
C Please refill washer fluid can break when you touch the bulb, caus-
ing injury.
With the ignition switched off, top up the flu-
- Incorrect handling of the high-voltage
id for the windscreen washer and headlight
element of xenon gas-discharge bulbs
washer system* c::> page 221.
can have potentially fatal consequences.

Windscreen wipers
~(]) Dynamic headlight range control
=Windscreen wiper defective Applies to vehicles: with xenon headlight bulbs

There is a malfunction in the windscreen wip- II Headlight range contro l: system fault!
ers.
There is a malfunction in the dynamic head-
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay light range control which may cause other
and have the fault rectified. road users to be dazzled.
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay
<il - I =e Engine start system and have the fault rectified .
lm/l!J Engine start system: system fault.
Please contact works hop go Audi adaptive light
Appli es to vehicles: with Audi adap tive llg hl
Do not switch off the ignition; otherwise you
may not be able to switch it on again. rlJ Audi adaptive light: system fault!
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay There is a malfunction in the adaptive light.
and have the fault rectified. The dipped beam headlights will still be work-
ing normally.
Engine start system: malfunction. Please
contact workshop. Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
the fault rectified.
There is a malfunction in the engine start sys-
tem.

Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have


the fault rectified .

1l This function is not availa ble o n all export ve rsions.


26 Instruments and warning/i ndicator lamps

1
~o Light sensor I rain sensor Trailer turn signals
Applies to vehicles: with light sensor/ rain sensor Applies to vehicles: with towing bracket

t'il Automatic head lights: system fault! If the indicator lamp . flashes, the turn sig-
nals are on in towing mode. The trailer must
!I Automatic wipers: system fault! be properly connected ~ page 194.
The light sensor/rain sensor is out of action.
If a turn signal bulb on the trailer or vehicle
For safety reasons, the dipped beam head- fails in towing mode, the indicator lamp does
lights will then be switched on permanently not flash twice as fast to indicate the bu lb
when the light switch is set to the AUTO posi- failure.
tion. You can still switch the lights on and off
in the normal way with the light switch. You (:l! ~ Rear seat belt
can also continue to use all the other wiper Applies to vehicles: with seat belt warning system (rear)
functions that do not use the rain sensor.
The warning lamp IJ;f!1 lights up briefly
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
when the ignition is switched on.
the fault rectified.
If a rear seat belt is buckled/unbuckled, the
corresponding indicator lamp lights up briefly.
gSuspension control
Applies to vehicles: with Audi drive select f!I -If the indicator lamp lights up briefly, the
corresponding rear seat is not occupied or the
R Suspension: system fault! seat belt is not buckled. If the seat belt is un-
There is a malfunction in the suspension con- buckled while the vehicle is moving, you will
trol system. also hear a warning tone.
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have 11-If the indicator la mp lights up briefly, the
the fau lt rectified. seat belt has been fastened.

Turn signals a nd hazard warning Note


lights For further information on the seat belts
c:> page 165.
If the indicator lamp B B
or flashes, the
turn signals are on . If both indicator lamps
flash, the hazard warn ing lights are on .
If one of the indicator lamps flashes twice as
fast as usual. a turn signal bulb has failed.
Drive carefully to a qualified workshop with-
out delay and have the fault rectified . While
you are towing a tra iler, the indicator lamp
does not indicate turn signal bulb failures on
the vehicle or on the trailer.

(D Note
For more information about the turn sig-
nals and hazard warning lights, refer to
~ pageSS.
Driver information system 27

Driver information The following information can be displayed in


sequence in on-board computers 1 and 2:
system
- Date
Overview - Estimated range of fuel in tank
The driver information system automatically - Driving t ime
collects, processes and displays data. The Sys- - Average fuel consumption
tems I Car systems menu allows you to con- - Average speed
trol the settings for many items of equipment - Distance covered
on the vehicle. - Current fuel consumption
- Engi ne oil temperature display*
Display
You can see the following in the driver infor- On-board computer D (short-term
memory)
mation system:
The short-term memory processes the infor-
Radio station or CD mation on a journey from the time the igni-
Time and date display Q page9 tion is switched on until it is switched off. If
Mileage and trip recorder Q page 10 the journey is resumed within two hours after
Outside temperature Q page 11 the ignition is switched off, the new figures
are automatically included in the calculation.
Service interval display Q page 13
If the vehicle is left standing for over 2 hours,
Warning/ind icator lamps and Q page 14 the short-term memory is automatically
driver messages erased when you set off again.
Digital speedometer
On-board computer fJ (long-term
Lap timer* Q page36 memory)
Cru ise control system Qpage 97
Unli ke the short-term memory, the long-term
Speed warning Q page96 memory is not erased automatically. In t hi s
Start/stop system Q page98 way, you can determine the period for which
Gear-change indicator Q page 12 you w ish the on-board computer to supply
Advanced gear-change indi- Q page 31 driving information.
cator for manual gearbox Efficiency programme iii
Selector lever positions for Q page 106
The efficiency programme can help to save
automatic gearbox
fuel ~ page 31.
Ma in beam assist* Q page56
Seat belt warning system for ~ page 26 Operating logic
rear seats You can use the following to operate the driv-
On-board computer d isplay ~page 27 er information system, depending on the op-
tional equipment in your vehicle:
Camera-based traffic sign ~ page 33
recognition - Controls on windscreen wiper lever
~ page 28, or
On-board computer display
- Control buttons on multi-function steering
The on-board computer has different journey wheel* ~ page 29
memories:

- Short-term memory (on-board computer 1)


- Long-term memory (on-board computer 2)
- Efficiency programme
28 Driver information sy stem

Controls on windscreen Controls


Applies to vehicles: with driver information system. with-
wiper Lever out multi-function steering wheel

Introduction The driver information system con be operat-


Applies to vehicles. with driver information system, with- ed using the windscreen wiper lever.
out multi-function steering wheel

..._____ _

Fi g. 1 3 Windscreen wiper lever: Driver information


system controls

The driver information system is operated us-


As well as the figures from the on-board com-
ing the controls on the windscreen wiper lev-
puter (memories 1 and 2 and efficiency pro-
er r::> page 28, Fig. 13.
gramme), the display can a lso show informa-
The driver information system r::> Fig. 12 pro- tion from other systems.
vides the following information :
The number 0 or fJ or the filling nozzle sym-
- @ Car information bol i1 in the top corner of the on-board com-
- @ Status line (selector lever position/cur- puter display shows which of the memories is
rent gear, gear-change indicator, main beam currently active (i.e. on-board computer 1 or 2
assist", start/stop system, outside tempera- or t he efficiency programme) .
ture r::> page 11)
How to use the controls
- On-board computer
"" Switch on the ignition. The function t hat
@ Car information was last selected will be displayed.
On-board computer r::> page28 "" Press the I RESET I button @ to switch be-
Efficiency prog ramme r::> page 31 tween on-board computers 0 and fJ or the
efficiency programme i1 or any active warn-
Digital speedometer
ings or driver messages.
Lap timer* <:) page 36
"" To show more information further up or
Driver messages and warn- <:) page 14 down the display, press the top or bottom
ing/ind icator lamps part of the button @ .
Driver messages for warning/indicator lamps Calling up warning/ ind icator lamps and
are on ly displayed if at least one warning has driver messages again
occurred.
"" Press t he IRESETI button @ (several times if
necessary) until the driver message appears.

Resetting figures t o zero


"" Select a figure in the desired on-board com-
puter or the efficiency programme.
"" Press and hold the IRESETI button @ for at
least one second. All figures of the selected Iii>
Driver information system 29

on-board computer or the efficiency pro- @


gramme will be reset to zero. ~Veh i cle fu nct ions:
lsttab
On-board computer, time, date
(!) Note
Q page30
- The measurement units may be different
Efficiency programme
on vehicles for some markets. page 31
- The information in the memory is cancel-
Digital speedometer
led if the battery is disconnected.
Assist systems
Audi adaptive cruise control*
Controls on multi-
Q page 116
function steering Audi active lane assist*
wheel ~ page 128

Introduction Camera-based traffic sign recogni-


Applies to vehicles: with driver Information system and tion* q page 33
multi-function steering wheel Lap timer q page 36
Reduced display
2nd tab -tfl& Driver messages and warn-
ing/indicator lamps
,,,...c Service interval display
q page 13
3rd tab f.lll Audio/1l radio
4th tab " Telephone*
5th tab @/~ Navigation
Fig. 14 Instrument cluster: Driver information system
(example) The second tab is only visible if one or more
warning/indicator lamps or driver messages
The driver information system is operated us- are displayed or if the relevant system is
ing the controls on the multi-function steer- switched on .
ing wheel* Q page 30, Fig. 15.

The data stored in the driver information (D Note


system is presented in different display - The on-board computer is operated us
tabs @ Q Fig. 14. ing the buttons on the left side of the
mu lti-function steering wheel.
The driver information system ~ Fig. 14 pro-
- For information on how to use the other
vides the following information:
buttons and how to operate the audio,
- @ Display tab telephone* and navigation functions,
- @ Car information please refer to the separate MMI Operat
- Status line (selector lever position, gear- ing Manual.
change indicator, main beam assist*, start/
stop system, outside temperature
~ page 11)
- @ On-board computer

The following functions are available, depend-


ing on the equipment installed in your vehicle:
30 Driver information system

Controls .. To show more information further up or


Applies to vehicles: with driver Information system and down the display, scroll the thumbwheel @
mullifunction steering wheel up or down .
The driver information system can be operat- .. To confirm a selection, press the thumb-
ed via the multi-function steering wheel. wheel @ .
.. To call up a function assigned to the steer-
ing wheel button, press the button @ . For
further information please refer to
r::!:> page 30.

Calling up Vehicle functions


... Use button CD to select the fi rst disp lay tab .
.. Press the button @. The Vehicle functions
menu will be displayed c::> Fig. 16.
Fig. 15 Multi-function steering wheel: Driver informa-
... To select a menu item, scroll and press the
tion system controls thumbwheel @ .

Resetting figures to zero


.. Select On-board computer or Efficiency
P'rogramme from the Vehicle function s
menu .
... Select a figu re in the desired on-board com-
put er or t he efficiency programme .
... To reset t he fig ures in t he select ed memory
to zero, press the t humbwheel @ fo r one
Fig. 16 Driver information system: Calling up the Vehi- second .
cle functions menu
Calling up warning/indicator lamps and
As well as the figures from the on-board com- driver mess ages again
puter (memories 1 and 2 and efficiency pro- .. Keep pressing the button CD until the tab
gramme), the display can also show informa- marked d appears.
tion from other systems.
The tab marked d is only visible if a malfunc-
The number D or II or the filling nozzle sym- t io n has occurred .
bol ii1 in the top corner of the on-board com-
puter display shows which of the memories is Assigning a function to the steering wheel
button
currently active (i.e. on-board computer 1 or 2
or the efficiency programme). .. Select: I MEN UI button> cont rol butto n Sys
terns I Car systems > Vehicle settings >
The display tabs q page 29, Fig. 14 will ap-
Steering wheel button.
pear as soon as you press the button CD
c::> Fig. 15 on the mu ltifunction steering The tab marked II
is only vis ible if one or
wheel. more warning/ind icator lamps or driver mes-
sages are displayed .
How to use the controls
.. Switch on the ignition. The function that Note
was Last selected will be displayed. - The measurement units may be different
.. To switch between the tabs, press the left or on vehicles for some markets. IJllo.
rig ht side of the button CD c::> Fig . 15.
Driver information system 31

- The information in the memory is cancel- button r:> page 30, Fig. 15 and select Ef
led if the battery ls disconnected. ficiency programme c::> page 30 from the
- For information on the efficienc:y pro- menu.
gramme, refer to ~ page 31.
The efficiency programme can help to save
- Please refer to the MM!* Operating Man-
fuel. It evaluates fuel efficiency data, shows a
ual for more information on the multi-
list of auxiliary equipment affecting fuel con-
function steering wheel.
sumption c> page 32, and suggests gear
changes r:>page 31. It also provides eco1110-
Boost display my tips r:> page 32 for saving fuel.
Applies to vehicles: with boost pressure display
The efficiency programme uses the trip and
f uel consumption data from on-board com-
puter 1. When you clear the data from tlhe ef-
ficiency programme on vehicles without mul-
t i-function steering wheel (r:> page 28) or
vehicles with multi-function steering wheel
(c::> poge 30), the values in on-board comput-
er 1 are reset to zero.

Fig . 17 Instrument cluster: Boost display Advanced gear-change indicator


Applies to vehicles: with manual gea rbox and driver infor-
Boost pressure display mation system

The current boost level of the engine (that is


the current charge pressu re) is indicated by a
bar which moves from left to right.

Efficiency programme
Description
Applies to vehicles: with driver information system

!o Fig. 1 9 Instrument cluster: Advanced gear-change in-


> dicator on vehicles with monochrome display
~

Fig . 18 Instrument cluster: Efficlency prog ramme

Calling up the efficiency programme~


Fig . 2 0 Instrument cluster: Advanced gear-change in-
.,. Using the windscreen wiper lever*: Keep dicator on vehicles with colour display
pressing the IRESET I button @ c::> page 28,
Fig. 13 until the efficiency programme ap- Important: The efficiency programme a. must
pears on the display. have been called up c::> page 31.
... Using the mu lti-function steering wheel*:
... Using the windscreen wiper lever*: Keep
Call up the vehicle frunctions by pressing pressing the IRESET I button @ <=:> page 28, .,.
32 Driver information system

Fig. 13 until the instrument cluster display The efficiency programme shows a list of aux-
shows the advanced gear-change indicator. iliary equipment currently affecting the vehi-
... Us ing the multi-fun ction steering wheel*: cle's fuel consumption. The display shows up
Scroll the thumbwheel @ Q page 30, to three auxiliaries @ . The auxiliary load
Fig. 15 until the display s hows the advanced drawing the most power appears at the top of
gear-change indicator. the list. If more than three auxiliaries are
switched on, the ones currently using the
The advanced gear-change indicator is based
most power are displayed .
on the same logic as the "regular" gear-
change indicator page 12. In addition, a scale @ indicates the overall
current fuel consumption of all auxiliary
CD CAUTION equipment.
The advanced gear-change indicator is in-
tended to help save fuel. It is not Intended Economy tips
to recommend the right gear for all driving Applies to vehicles: with driver information system

situations. In certain situations, only the


driver can choose the correct gear (for in-
stance when overtaking, driving up a steep
gradient or towing a trailer).

@ Note
The "regular" gear-change indicator' disap-
pears from the display when the advanced
gear-change indicator appears.
Fig. 22 Instrument cluster: Economy tip (Air condi-
tioner swit ched on: close windows and sun roof)
Auxiliaries
Applies to vehicles: with <:I river information system and Economy tips are displayed ifthe fuel con-
automatic air conditioner
sumption increases in certain situations. By
following these economy tips, you can save
fuel. The tips are displayed automatically and
only appear in the efficiency programme. The
economy tips automatically disappear again
after a while .
... To clear an economy tip from the display im-
mediately, press any of the controls on the
windscreen wiper lever* /multi-function
Fig. 21 Instrument cluster: Auxiliaries steering wheel*.

... Using the windscreen wiper lever*: Keep


pressing the IRESETl button @ page 28,
- Once you have cleared an economy tip
Fig. 13 in the efficiency programme until from the display, it will not appear again
the instrument cluster display shows the until the next time you switch on the ig-
auxiliaries. nition .
... Using the multi-function steering wheel" :
- The economy tips are not always dis-
Scroll the thumbwheel @ Q page 30,
played in every conceivable situation, but
Fig. 15 in the efficiency programme until
are deliberately spaced out over time.
the auxiliaries appear on the display.
Driver information system 33

Active Cylinder Management Camera-based traffic


Applies to vehicles: with Active Cyli nder Management
(1.4 TrSJ 103 kW engine)
sign recognition
Description
Applies to vehicles: with camera based traffic sign recog
nition

Fig. 23 Instrument cluster; 2-cylinder mode display

The engine shuts down two cylinders to save


fuel under Light-load cond itions and automat Fig. 24 Instrument cluster: Traffic sign recognition
lcally re-activates them when they are needed, (example}
the whole process being imperceptible to the
occupants.

Displaying the cylinder mode


Important: The on-board computer must be
displayed .

.. Using the w indscreen wiper lever*: Keep


pressing the function selector switch @
page 28, Fig. 13 until the instrument Fig. 25 Windscreen: Camera window for traffic sign
cluster display shows the current or average recognition
fuel consumption.
.. Using the mu lti-function steering wheel*: Traffic signs detected by the camera appear in
Scroll the th um bwh ee l @ ~ page 30, the instrument cluster display to keep you in-
Fig. 15 until the instrument cluster display formed of current speed restrictions and no
shows the current fuel consumption . overtaking zones. In cases where the system
is able to detect temporary speed limits appli-
You are driving in 2-cylinder mode when the
cable at certain times of day Ci], in wet
driver message 2-cylinder mode is displayed.
weather ~ or to vehicles towing a trail-
Basic conditions for 2-cylinder mode er ~ it will also display these traffic re-
strictions Fig . 24.
The engine automatically runs on two cyli n-
ders when certain basic conditions are met. General notes
These include:
The traffic sign recognition system can detect
- Power demand is low. standardised speed Limit signs within the
-Vehicle is in a forward gear. camera's range of vision. It makes use of the
- Engine speed is between 1,300 and navigation data to evaluate the detected
3900 rpm. speed limits and show them on the display.
- The selected interior temperature has been Under certain conditions, the system will also
reached. display the applicable speed limits on roads
- Engine is warm. without speed limit signs. IJJ>
34 Driver information system

Traffic sign recognition Is not available in all - The traffic sign recognition system does
countries. For a curre nt list, see the Internet not warn you if you exceed the speed lim-
(e.g. www.audi.com) . The system is also sub- it and does not alter the speed of your
ject to certain inherent restrictions and may vehicle to obey the speed limit.
be partially or completely unavailable in the - The speed limit displayed in the instru-
following situations: ment cluster (e.g . SO) may apply in mph
- If visibility is impaired by snow, rain, fog or or km/h, depending on the units applica-
heavy road spray. ble in a particular country.
- In dazzli ng light, e.g. from the sun or on-
coming traffic. Controls
- At high speeds. Applies to vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recog-
nitio n
- If the camera's range of vision r:::> Fig. 25 is
Impaired, e.g. by dirt or stickers. Notes on
cleaning r:::> page 204.
- If the traffic signs are partially or complete-
ly obscured, e.g. by trees, snow, mud or oth-
er vehicles.
- If traffic signs deviate from the standard ap-
pearance (round with red border).
- If traffic signs are damaged or bent.
- If matrix traffic signs are mounted on over-
Fig. 26 Instrument cluster: Secondary di splay
head gantries.
- If traffic signs or routes have changed (navi- Calling up the traffic sign recognition
gation data out of date).
Press the 1 button on the multi-function
Some types of slow moving vehicles (such as steering wheel.
heavy goods vehicles) carry speed stickers Scroll and press the thumbwheel to select
which, if detected by the system, may affect Traffic signs from the Vehicle functions
the display. menu .

.&_ WARNING Activating the secondary display


-
Always direct your fu ll attention to the You can also activate traffic sign recognition in
road and surroundings, even when you are other display tabs, e .g . in the navigation dis-
using traffic sign recogn ition. The actua l play r:::> Fig. 26.
traffic signs on yo u r route a lways take
Select the fol lowing on the MMI*: IMENU !
precedence over the information on the
button > control button Systems I Car sys
display. It is a lways the driver's responsi-
tems > Driver assist > Traffic signs > Dis-
bility to assess the traffic situation and
play In instrument cluster > on .
take appropriate care.
- Under adverse conditions, the traffic sign Displaying signs for trailers
recognition system may misinterpret or
You can also display speed limits which apply
fail to detect traffic signs. It is therefore
specially to vehicles towing a trailer1>. ~
possible that the speed limit display may
occasionally be unavailable or even incor-
rect.

1) Applies to factoryfltted towing brackets only


Driver information system 35

.. Select the following on the MMI*: !MENU I The veh icle is in a country or reg ion out of the
button > control button Systems I Car sys system's range (i.e. the navigation system has
tems > Driver a ssist > Traffic signs> no corresponding data) .
Automatic trailer recognition > o n.
Traffic sign recognition : currently restricted
Secondary display
This message appears, for instance, in the
If the instrument cluster is currently showing
event of a navigation system fault. The Limi-
a function other than traffic sign recognition,
ted functionality may ca use fewer speed Li m-
the speed lim it will be displayed in the top
its t o be displayed (wh ich increases t he possi-
right-hand corner ~ Fig. 26. If the system is
bility of an error).
able to detect a temporary speed restriction in
a given situation, it will update the d isplay ac- Traffic sign recognition: currently unavaila
cordi ngly. ble

Temporary speed restrictions a re displayed in The system is currently unable to funct ion
the following situations: properly and will be deactivated . This can hap-
pen, fo r instance, if the camera is dirty and a
- A temporary speed restriction for wet
navigation system malfunction occurs simul-
weather is detected wh ile the windscreen
taneously.
wipers are operating.
- The veh icle is towing a trailer and the Auto Traffic sign recognition : system fault
matic trailer recognition option in the MM!* The function of the system is impaired; t he
is on . In this case, restrictions applying to system will be deactivated. Drive to a quali-
trailers are displayedll. fied workshop soon.
- A speed restriction applying at certain times
of day has been detected and corresponds to Traffic sign recognition: currently restricted.
the time displayed in the instrument cluster. No camera view
This message will appear if the ca mera view is
Q) Note obstructed ~ page 33.
If you activate the Signs for trailers option,
the system will show the maximum na- Rest recommendation
tional speed limit for vehicles towing a
trailer. Different speed limits are not dis- General notes
Appli es to vehicles: with rest recommendation fun ction
played for different types of towed trans-
port veh icle. Under certain conditions, the system can de-
tect that the driver needs to take a break.
Driver messages
At t h e beginn ing of a t rip, the system moni-
App lies to vehicles: with camera-based traffic sign recog
nition tors the driver's general steering style . Using
this as a reference, the system continuously
No traffic sign recognised compares the current steering input at speeds
A speed limit was not detected (e.g . on a mo- of between 65 km/h and 200 km/h. If t he
torway with no speed restriction). evaluation of the steering input implies a
Lapse in the driver's concentration, the system
Traffic sign recognition: outside operational
will then recommend a break Q page 36, In-
area
strument cluster display.

l) Applies t o factory-fitted towing brackets only


36 Driver information system

The rest recommendation II


is designed for input has resu lted In a rest recommendat ion.
journeys o n motorways and major roads. This is a lso indicated by a warning tone. Ta ke a
break as soon as possible.
System limitations
The message may be d isplayed again once if
The rest recommendation function may misin-
necessary.
terpret the steering input in certain driving
situations, such as the following:
Switching on/off
- On twisty roads. Applies to vehicles: with rest recommendation function
- On rough roads.
To switch the rest recommendation on/off*:
- In poor weather.
- During performance driving. Vehicles wit h sou nd syst em*
- When the driver's attention is distracted.
.. Select: ISETUP I button> control butto n~
Resetting the system Driver assist > Rest recommendation .

The system is automatically reset if you ... Vehicles with MM!*:


.. Select: I MENUI button> control button Sys-
- switch off the ignition.
tems I Car systems > Driver assist > Rest
- release the driver's seat belt and open the
recommendation .
driver's door.
- drive slower than 65 km/h for a wh ile . If you
subsequently increase your speed again, the
system will reevalu ate the driving style. If yo u switch off the system, it will remain
swit ched off the next time you switch o n
A WARNING the ig nit ion.
- Never drive when you are tired. As a driv-
er you are a lways responsible for ensur- Lap timer and engine
ing t hat you are ifit to d rive. oil temperature display
- On long journeys, make sure to take ade-
Introduction
quate breaks at regu lar intervals.
Applies to vehicles: with lap timer (S models)
- The system cannot a lways tell if you
need a break. The engine oi l temperature is only shown in
- In certain situations, the system may t he lap timer display.
misinterpret driving manoeuvres and in-
lap timer
appro priately recommend a break.
- No acute warning is g iven if the driver You can use the lap t imer in the display
falls into a microsleep. page 37, Fig. 28 to record and evaluate
lap times. The times are recorded in minutes,
@ Note seco nds and t enths of a second. The hour will
appea r in the display a nd the tent hs of a sec-
The system is not available with all equip-
ond will disappear if the session lasts for over
ment versions.
60 m inutes.

Instrument cluster display Ind ividual lap times stop automatically after
Applies to vehicles: with rest recommendation function 99 hours 59 m inutes and 59 seconds. A new
lap will then start automatically.
II Rest recommendation
The lap t imer stops after a maximum of
If the warning lamp lights up and the mes- 30 laps. You can then evaluate the lap times
sage appears, the eva luation of the steering o r start a new session. II>
Driver information system 37

Engine oil temperature dis play Controls on windscreen


Engine oil temperatures below 60 C are indi- wiper lever
cated by the symbol~. followed by three
dashes"- - -"and the unit (C). Calling up the lap timer and recording
lap times
The engine has reached its operating temper- Applies to vehicles: with lap timer IS models)
ature in normal driving conditions when the
oil temperature is between 80 'C and 120 'C.
If the engine is running under increased load
at high ambient temperatures, the oil temper-
ature may increase above this value. This is no
cause for concern, provided that the indicator/
warning lamps . Q page21 or l l
Q page 24 in the display do not start flashing.
-------
Operating logic
Fig. 2 7 Windscreen wiper lever: Controls
You can use the fo llowing to operate the lap
timer, depend ing on the optional equ ipment
in your vehicle:
- Controls on windscreen wiper lever
Q page 37, or
- Control buttons on multi-function steering
wheel* Q page 39

A WARNING
Fig. 28 Instrument cluster: Lap timer
Please direct your full attention at all
times to the road! As the driver, you have Calling up the lap timer
full responsibility for the safety of the ve-
,,. Keep pressing the IRESET I button @
hicle and other road users. For this reason,
Q Fig. 27 until the lap timer Q Fig. 28 ap-
you should only use the lap timer func-
pears on the display.
tions in a manner that allows you to main-
tain control of the vehicle In all situations - Recording lap times
accident risk!
,,. To start recording a lap time, press the top
part of t he rocker switch @ . The lap t ime is
@ Note
displayed in line @ Q Fig. 28.
You can call up information from the on- ,,. To finish measuring the current lap time,
board computer while the stopwatch of press the top part of the rocker switch @
the lap timer is running. again. The next lap time starts running im-
mediately. The previous lap time moves t o
the top of the display @ . The current Lap is
shown in line @ .
The . symbol will stay green if the current
lap time is the best time so far. The . sym-
bol will turn red if the lap time is not as
good @ . IJI-
38 Driver information system

Displaying split times and interrupting Evaluating lap times and resetting the
the lap timer for a break lap timer
Press the bottom part of the rocker switch Applies to vehicles: with lap t imer CS models)

to display a split time ~. The split time You can use the lap timer to evaluate the
appears in line @ for approximately 10 sec- fastest, slowest and average lap times.
onds. The current lap time continues run-
ning in the meantime.
To inte rrupt the lap timer, e.g. to take a
break (pause m), press and hold the bot-
tom part of the rocker switch @ .
To res ume recording of the lap time, press
the top part of the rocker switch @ .

If you interrupt the lap timer to take a break,


you can resume recording later on, even if you
Fig. 29 Instrument cluster: Ev.aluating lap times
switched off the ignition in the meantime.
Legend for centre d isp lay~ Fig. 28: After you have evaluated the lap times., the
lap timer starts a new session (i.e. continues
CD Last recorded lap time
with lap 1).
@ Symbols:
-[i]:Start ti me To evaluate the session, press and hold the
- :Worst lap time I RESETlbutton @ ~ page37, Fig. 27. The
- . : Best lap time fastest lap"+", the slowest lap"- " a n d t he
- ~:Split time average time "0" will appear in the display.
-m: Pause
To reset the lap timer and clear the lap
t imes, press the IRESET I button again for
Current lap time
a bout 2 seconds.
@ Menu : To restart the lap timer and record new laps,
- Lap 1 (start lap) press the top part of the rocker switch @
- New lap (start another lap) r::;> page 3 7, Fig. 2 7.
- Split time (lap sector time) To exit the lap timer, briefly press the
- Pause (interrupt lap timer) IRESETI button .
- Reset (zero all lap times)
Explanation of evaluation in ~ Fig. 29:

@ Total number of laps


II:Best lap time
. : Worst lap t ime
t'.1:Average lap time
1::2 I ! !: Page down/up
De lete entries and return to lap time
recording

- Recorded lap times cannot be deleted in-


dividually from the overall resu lts. ..,.
Driver information system 39

- The data recorded in the lap timer re- Lap time moves to the top of the display (!).
main stored after the ignition is switched The current lap is shown in Line @ .
off.
The . symbol will stay green if the current
Lap time is the best time so far. The . sym-
Controls on multi- bol will turn red if the lap time is not as
function st,e ering good! @ .
wheel Displaying split times and interrupting
Calling up the lap timer and recording the lap timer for a break
lap times To display a split time ~. scroll the thumb-
Applies to vehicles: with lap timer (S models) and multi- wheel @ until Split time appears in line @ .
fu nction steering wheel
Press the thumbwheel @ to confirm your
selection. The split time appears in Line @
for approximately 10 seconds. The current
Lap time continues running in the mean-
time.
If you want to take a break (pause m> imme-
diately after displaying the split times, first
press the thumbwheel @ to confirm the
menu item Back - select OK.
Fig. 30 Multi-function steering wheel: Controls To pause the timer, scroll the thumb-
M
wheel @ until Pause appears in Line @ .
"'
~ Press the thumbwheel @ to confirm your
co
<D selection. The pause symbol m appears in
Line @ .
Press the thumbwheel @ to resume the Lap
time.

If you interrupt the Lap timer to take a break,


you can resume recording later on, even if you
switched off the ignition in the meantime.
Fig. 31 Instrument clust:er: Lap timer
Legend for centre display ~ Fig. 31:
Calling up the lap timer
Press button @ on the multi-function steer- CD Last recorded Lap time

ing wheel and scroll the th umbwheel @ @ Symbols:


~ Fig. 30 until Lap timer Q Fig. 31 is selec- -[i]:Start time
ted in the menu. - . : Worst Lap time
Press the thumbwheel @ to confirm your -ril Best lap time
selection. - ~: Split time

Recording lap times


-m: Pause

To start the timer, press the thumbwheel @


on the menu item Lap 1 - select OK. The Lap
ti me is dis played in Line @ Q Fig. 31.
To finish measuring the current lap time,
press the thumbwheel @ on the menu item
New lap - select OK . The next Lap time
sta rts running immediately. The previous
40 Driver information system

... To restart the lap timer and record new laps,


Current lap time
press the thumbwheel @ .
@ Menu :
To exit the lap timer, press button on the
- Lap 1 (start lap)
multi-function steering wheel and scroll the
- New lap (start another lap)
thumbwheel @ 9 page 39, Fig. 30 until a
- Split time (lap sector time)
new menu item is selected . Press the
- Pause (interrupt lap timer)
thumbwheel @ to confirm your selection.
- Statistics (evaluate lap times)
- Reset (zero all lap times) Explanation of evaluation in Fig. 32:

@ Total number of laps


Evaluating lap times and resetting the
lap timer II:Best lap time
Applies to vehicles: with lap timer (S models) and multi-
function steering wheel
. : Worst lap time
@ r!J:Average lap time
You con use the lop timer to evaluate the
fastest, slowest and overage lop times. C I!!!:Page down/up
Delete entries and return to lap time
recording

{O Note
- Recorded lap times cannot be deleted in-
dividually from the overall resu lts.
- The data recorded in the Lap timer re-
ma in stored after the ig nition is switched
off.
Fig, 32 Instrument du:ster: Evaluating lap ti111es

After you have evaluated the lap times, you


can resume the existing session or start a new
session (i.e. start again with lap 1) .
... To evaluate the lap times, scroll the thumb-
wheel @ 9 page 39, Fig. 30 unti l Statistics
appears in line @ 9 poge 39, Fig . 31. Press
the thumbwheel @ to confirm your selec-
tion . The fastest lap .... ", the s lowest lap"- "
and the average time "0" will appear in the
display. To display the individual lap times,
scroll the thumbwheel @ down C or
up !!!.
... Press the thumbwheel @ to resume the cu r-
rent session .
... To reset the lap timer and clear the lap
times, first press the t humbwheel @ . Then
scroll the thumbwheel @ 9 poge 39,
Fig. 30 until Reset appears in line @
9 page 39, Fig. 31. Press the thumbwheel
@ to confirm your selection.
Doors and windows 41

Doors and windows This makes it more difficult to break into the
vehicle c:::> & .
Central locking system
It is possible t o deactivate the safelock mech-
Description anism manually any time you lock the vehicle:

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via the - Turn the key in the door lock to the lock po-
central locking system. You can use the fol- sition a second time within 2 seconds. Or:
lowing (depending on the equipment on your - Press the i'.D button on the remote control
vehicle): key a second time within 2 seconds. Or:
- Touch the sensor* on one of the front door
- Remote control key c:::> page 44
handles a second time within 2 seconds (ap-
- Lock on driver's door c:::> page 45 plies to vehicles with convenience key) . Or:
- Sensor in front door handles on vehicles
- Before locking the vehicle, press the ~ but-
with convenience key* c:::> page 45
ton for the interior monitor and tow-away
- Interior central locking switch c:::> page 47 protection* c:::> page 48.
Unlocking one side of the vehicle only The LED on the top of the driver's door trim
When you lock the veh icle, the central locking acknowledges this procedure as follows : first
system will lock the doors and the boot lid. it flashes rapidly for a short time, then it goes
When you unlock the vehicle, the central lock- out for about 30 seconds, and finally it s tarts
ing system will unlock either the driver's door flashing again slowly.
only, or all the locks on the vehicle, depending If you switch off the safelock mechanism*, the
on the setting you have selected in the MMI* interior monitor and tow-away protection* are
i::> page46. automatically disabled.
Automatic locking function (Auto Lock) Anti-theft alarm system*
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and If the anti-theft alarm system senses int erfer-
the boot lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed ence with the vehicle it triggers an audible
of about 15 km/h . and visible alarm .
The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- The anti-theft alarm system is automatically
tion key is removed . Alternatively, the vehicle switched on when the vehicle is locked . It
can also be unlocked via the central locking switches off automatically if you unlock the
switch or by pulling one of the inside door vehicle using the remote control or t he sensor
handles. The Auto Lock function can be on the door handle (conven ience key).
switched on and off on the sound system or
MMI* c:::> page46. If you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key
in the driver's door, you shou ld switch on the
In the event of an acc ident in which the air- ignition within 15 seconds to prevent the
bags inflate, the doors will be automatica lly alarm from being triggered . On some export
unlocked to facilitate access and assistance. versions, the alarm is triggered immed iately
when you open a door.
Safelock mechanism
When you switch off the ignition, the mes- To deactivate the alarm, press the ffi button
sage Be aware of door safelock. See owner's on the remote control key/convenience key or
manual appears in the instrument cluster dis- switch on the ignition . The alarm also stops
play as a reminder that the safelock mecha- automatically after a certain period.
nism is automatically activated when you lock Switch off the interior monitor and tow-away
the vehicle from the outside. The doors can protection if you wish to prevent the ala rm ~
then no longer be opened from t he inside.
42 Doors and windows

from being triggered accidentally properly. You should have the malfunc-
c::>page48. tion repaired by a qualified workshop.
- The interior monitor of the anti-theft
Turn signals
alarm* system will only function as in-
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- tended ifthe windows and the sun roof
hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is are closed.
locked.

If the turn signals do not flash, one of the Set of keys


doors, the bonnet or the boot lid is still open.
On vehicles with the convenience key, the igni-
tion may still be switched on.

Accidental lock-out
The central locking system prevents you from
being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-
ing situations:

- When the driver's door is open, the vehicle


Fig. 33 Keys supplied with the vehicle
will not be locked if you press the central
locking switch and then close the door Remote control key or convenience key
Q page47.
- On vehicles with convenience key*, the boot The convenience key is a remote control key
lid will be released again automatically if with special functions Q page 45, Locking
the key that was last in use is left inside the and unlocking the vehicle with the conven-
boot when the boot lid is closed. ience key and c::> page 88, Vehicles with con-
venience key. The remote control key will lock
To prevent yourself from being locked out, do and unlock the car via the central locking sys-
not lock the vehicle with the remote control tem and start the engine . Press the release
key/convenience key* until all of the doors button Fig. 33 -arrow- to make the key
and the boot lid are closed. spring out of the handle and to fold it back in .

&_ WARNING Number of keys


Do not leave anyone (especially children) in You can check how many keys are initialised
the car if it is locked from the outside and for your vehicle using the MMI*. This feature
the safelock mechanism* is activated: the enables used car buyers to make sure they
doors and windows cannot then be opened have received all of the keys. Select: control
from the inside. Locked doors could delay button Systems or Car systems > Servicing &
assistance in an emergency, potentially checks > Initialised keys.
putting lives at risk.
Replacing a key
Q) Note If you shou ld Los@ a k@y, pl@ase contact an
- Never leave any valuable items in the ve- Audi dealer. Have the remote control coding
hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is for that key deactivated. For this purpose you
not a safe. shou ld bring all available keys with you . It is
also important to notify your insurance com-
- If the LED on the driver's window sill
pany if a key has been lost. .,.
lights up for about 30 seconds when the
vehicle is locked, the central locking sys-
tem or anti-theft alarm* is not working
Doors and windows 43

Immobiliser LED and battery in remote control key


The immobiliser is designed to prevent unau-
thorised persons from driving the vehicle. It
may not be possible to start the engine if
there is another radio transmitter (e.g. an ig-
nition key for another vehicle or a transpond-
er) on the same key ring.

Data stored on remote control key or


convenience key
Data related to the service and maintenance Fig. 3 4 Remote control key: LED
of the vehicle are stored continuously on your
remote control key or conven ience key*. Your
Aud i dealer can read out the data and will
then be able to tell you what service work is
required.

A WARNING
-Always take the key with you when leav-
ing the vehicle - even if you only intend
to be gone for a short time. This is espe- Fig. 35 Remote control key: Opening the cover

cially important if children are left in the


LED on remote control key
car. They might otherwise be able to
start the engine o r use power-operated The LED~ Fig. 34 lights up when you press
equipment such as the electric windows - t he buttons.
this could lead to injuries.
.... The LED should flash once when you press
- Wait for the vehicle to come to a stand-
one of the buttons briefly.
still before removing the ignition key
.... The LED should flash repeated ly when you
from the Lock. Otherwise the steering
press and hold one of the buttons (conven-
lock could engage suddenly, causing an
ienice open/close*).
accident.
.... If the LED does not flash, the battery in the
remote contro l key is flat. In addition, the
@ Note
Ill
ind icator lamp may light up and the
The function of the remote control key message Please change key battery may ap-
may be impaired by interference from oth- pear on the instrument cluster display. Re-
er nearby rad io signals (for example from pla ce t he battery.
a mobile telephone or TV transmitter) if
t hese are in the same freque ncy range. Repnacing the battery for the remote
control key
.. Use a coin to lever off the cover Fig. 35.
.... Insert the new battery with the "+" symbol
faci ng up.
.... Press the cover back onto the key until it
clicks into place.

We recommend having the battery changed


by a qua lified workshop if required. ..,..
44 Doors and windo w s

boot lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the


@ For the sake of the environment
car. This function prevents the vehicle from re-
Used batteries must be disposed of appro- maining unlocked ifthe un lock button is
priately and must not be discarded with pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you
ordinary household waste. press and hold the G!I button for one second
or ~onger.
(D Note
On vehicles with the security central locking
The new battery must be of the same type
feature (for unlocking one side of the vehicle
as the original one.
only) page 46, you can unlock just the
driver's door and the tank flap by pressing the
Synchronising the remote control key ~ button once, or the whole vehicle by press-
If the remote control fails to lock or unlock ing the button twice.
the vehicle, it will be necessary to re-syn-
chronise the system .
.&_ WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in
Press the ~ button on the remote control.
the car if it is locked from the outside and
Unlock the driver's door within 30 seconds
the safe lock mechanism* is activated: the
by turning the key in the Lock.
doors and windows cannot then be opened
Press button ~ or lJ.
from the inside. Locked doors could delay
assistance in an emergency, potentially
Locking and unlocking the vehicle by putting lives at risk.
remote control

Applies to vehicles with start/stop system


arnd ISTART ENGINE STOP I* button: The ig-
nition remains on when the start/stop sys-
tem stops the engine . Before leaving the
vehicle, ensure that the ignition is switch-
ed off Q page 89. Otherwise it will not
be possible to lock the vehicle.

Fig. 36 Remote control key/convenience key: Buttons


Note
To unlock the vehicle, press the ~ button - Do not use the remote control key/con-
Q Fig. 36. venience key when the vehicle is out of
To lock the vehicle, move the selector Lever sight.
to position P (automatic gearbox) and press - For further fu nctions of the remote con-
the ~ button &,. trol key/convenience key, please refer to
To unlock the boot lid, press the ~ button Q page 51, Convenience open I close

briefly. funcVon.
To lock the vehicle without activating the
safelock mechanism*, press the ~ button a
second time within 2 seco nds.
To open the boot lid, press the G!I button for
at least one second .

The vehicle will be locked again automatically


if you do not open one of the doors or the
Doors and windows 45

locking and unlocking the vehicle with


the key
CD CAUTION
Applies to vehicles with start/stop system
If the central locking system should fail to and I START ENGINE STOPI* button : lhe Ig-
operate, the driver's door can still be locked nition remains on when the start/stop sys-
and unlocked by turn;ng the key in the lock. tem stops the eng ine. Before Leaving the
vehicle, ensure that the ignition is switch-
ed off~ page 89. Otherwise it will not
be possible to loc,k the vehicle.

(D Note
For further functions of the remote control
key/convenience key, please refer to
q page 51, Convenience open I close
function .
Fig. 37 Driver's door l ock

... To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to locking and unlocking the vehicle with
the convenience key
the unlock position @ .
Applies to vehicles: with convenience key
... To lock the driver's door, move the selector
lever to position P (automatic gearbox) and The front doors and the boot lid can be locked
turn the key to the Lock position once and unlocked without handling the remote
9 _& . control key.
... To lock t he vehicle without activating the
safelock mechanism*, t urn the key to the
lock position a second time within 2 sec
onds.

In o rder to switch off the anti-theft alarm*,


you must switch on the ignition within 15 sec-
onds after opening the driver's door. Other-
wise the alarm will be triggered.
The system will unlock either the whole vehi- Fig. 38 Driver's door: Locking vehicle wi th convenience
cle or one door only, depending on the set- key

tings you have chosen on the driver informa-


... To unlock the door automatically, take hold
tion system* CMMI") ~ page 46.
of the driver's/front passenger's door !han-
&. WARNING dle !=? Fig. 38.
... Then pull the door hand le to open the door.
Do not leave anyone (especially child ren) in
... To unlock/open the boot, press the release
the car if it is locked from the outside and
catch on the boot lid page 49, Fig. 42.
the safelock mechanism* is activated: the
... To lock the vehicle, move the selector lever
doors and windows cannot then be opened
to position P (automatic gearbox), close the
from the inside. Locked doors could delay
door and touch the sensor on the driver's
assistance in an emergency, potentially
door handle once q _&. Do not take hold of
putting lives at risk.
the door handle while doing so .
... To lock the vehicle without activating the
safelock mechanism*, touch the sensor on IJJ>
46 Doors and windows

the driver's door handle a second time with dle once to unlock the vehicle, and a sec-
in 2 seconds. ond time to open it.
- To prevent the battery from becoming
The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from the
discharged and thus maintain the vehi-
front doors and boot lid only. The remote con
cle's starting ability for as long as possi-
trol key has to be within a range of about
ble, the power management system will
1.5 metres of the relevant door or the boot
gradually switch off convenience func-
lid. It does not matter where you carry the
tions that are not required. In this case
key, for instance whether it is in your jacket
you may not be able to unlock the vehicle
pocket or in a handbag or briefcase.
with this convenience function.
The locking function may be affected if you
grasp the door handle while the vehicle is be- Security central locking
ing locked. Applies to vehicles: with security central locking

Once the doors have been locked, they cannot The security central locking feature allows you
be opened again immediately. This will enable to unlock only the driver's door and the tank
you to check that the driver's door is properly flap. All other doors and the boot lid rema in
closed. locked.
The system will unlock either the whole vehi Unlocking driver's door and tank flap
cle or one door only, depending on the set-
tings you have chosen on the driver informa- Press the ~ button on the remote control
tion system* (MMI*) page 46. key/convenience key once or turn the key to
the unlock position once.
A WARNING Unlocking all the doors , the boot Lid and
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the tank flap s imultaneously
the car if it is locked from the outside and
Press the ~ button on the remote control
the safelock mechanism* is activated: the
key/convenience key twice within 5 seconds
doors and windows cannot then be opened
or turn the key to the unlock position twice
from the inside. Locked doors could delay
within 5 seconds.
assistance in an emergency, potentially
putting lives at risk. The safelock mechanism* and the anti-theft
alarm* are deactivated immediately even if
CD CAUTION you unlock only the driver's door, without un-
Applies to vehicles with start/stop system locking the other doors.
and ISTART ENGINE STOPI* button: The ig- You can change the settings for t he security
nition remains on when the start/stop sys- central locking system d irectly on vehicles
tem stops the eng ine. Before leaving the with MMI* page 46.
vehicle, ensure that the ignition is switch-
ed off page 89. Otherwise it wi ll not
Adjusting the settings for the central
be possible to lock the vehicle. locking system
Applies to vehicles: with driver information syste m
i Note
You can pre-select particular settings in the
Please note the following points if the ve-
MMI* or sound system .
hicle ls left parked for long periods:
- To save electrical power, the proximity On the sound system or MMI*, you can select
sensors are switched off after a few days. whether the vehicle is automatically locked at
You will then need to pull the door han- speeds above 15 km/h ("Auto Lock"). In addi-
tion, you can control whether or not the ..,..
Doors and windows 47

exterior mirrors fold in when you lock the ve- Fold mirrors. For more information, refer to
hicle. Q page 61, Adjusting the exterior mirrors.

Settings for unlocking doors (on vehicles If you select on the exterior mirrors will be
with MMI) folded in automatically when you press the lru
button on the remote control key
You can specify which doors you wish to have
Q page 61.
unlocked when you unlock the vehicle.

.,. Select: Control button Systems or Car sys- Unlock doors - You can select whether all
tems >Vehicle settings > Central locking > doors or only t he driver's door are unlocked by
Unlock doors. the central locking system. The boot lid will
also be unlocked if you select all. If you select
If you select off/ all, the whole vehicle will be
driver on vehicles with convenience key, only
unlocked when you press the!m button on the one door will be unlocked (whichever door you
remote control key. grip by the handle).
If you select on/ driver, only the driver's door When the driver setting Is activated, you can
will be unlocked when you press the~ button still unlock all the doors and the boot lid by
on the remote control key o nce. On vehicles pressing the [@] button on the remote control
with convenience key, only one front door will key twice.
be un locked (whichever door you grip by the
handle). If you press the lliJ button twice, the You can still unlock the whole vehicle. To do
whole vehicle will be unlocked. The whole ve- so, press the ~ button on the remote control
hicle is always locked when you press the ~ key/convenience key twice. Alternatively, if
button. your vehicle has a key Q page 42, Fig. 33, turn
the key in the door lock to the unlock position
Auto Lock setting (on vehicles with sound twice within 2 seconds.
system)
If you press the ~ button, the whole vehicle
.,. Select: ISETUP I button> control button !
will be locked. At the same time you will hear
Central locking > Lock when driving .
an acoustic signal 1) .
If you have selected this function, the whole
vehicle is locked automatically when it rea- Central locking switch
ches a speed of lS km/h.

Auto Lock setting (on vehicles with MMI)


... Select: Control button Systems o r Car sys-
tems > Vehicle settings > Lock when driv-
ing.

If you select on, the whole vehicle is locked


automatically when it reaches a speed of
15 km/h.

Folding in exterior mirrors (on vehicles


with MMI) ... To lock the vehicle, press the 11 button
.,. Select: Control button Systems or Car sys- Q_&,
tems > Vehicle settings > Central locking > .,. To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button
<:) Fig. 39.

1l This function is not available on all export versions.


48 Doors and windo w s

Please note the following when you use the can prevent the alarm from being triggered
centra l locking switch to lock your vehicle: accidentally by switching off the interior mon
itor and/or tow-away protection.
- The doors and the boot lid cannot be opened
from the outside (for safety reasons, when ... Switch off the ignition and press the button
stopped at traffic lights, etc.). c::> Fig. 40 to deactivate the interior monitor
- The LED in the central locking switch lights and tow-away protection. The LED in the
up when all of the doors are closed and button will light up.
locked. ... If you now lock the vehicle, the interior
- You can open the doors ind ividually from the monitor and tow-away protection will re-
inside by pulling the inside door handle. main deactivated until the next time a door
- In the event of an accident in which the air- is opened.
bags inflate, doors locked from the inside
If you switch off the interior monitor and tow-
wi ll be automatica lly unlocked to facilitate
away protection, the safelock mechanism* is
access and assista nee.
automatically disabled.
& WARNING
.& WARNING
- The central locking switch is still opera-
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in
t ive when the ignition is switched off and
the car if it is locked from the outside and
will automatically lock the entire vehicle
the safelock mechanism* is activated : the
when the[@] button is pressed .
doors and windows cannot then be opened
- The central locking switch inside the ve-
from the inside. Locked doors could delay
hicle is not operative when the safelock
assistance in an emergency, potentially
mechanism is activated if the vehicle has
p utting lives at risk.
been locked frorm the outside.
- Locked doors could delay assistance in an
emergency, potentially putting lives at locking the passenger's door and rear
risk. Do not leave anyone (especially chil- doors* manually
dren) in the vehicle. If the central Locking system should foil to
work at any time, each door will have to be
Deactivating the interior monitor and locked separately.
tow-away protection
App lies to vehfcles: with .antitheft alarm system

Fig. 41 Locking. the door manually

Fig. 40 Side trim in open driver's door: Button for inte- The driver's door can be locked manually by
rior monitor/tow-away protection turning the key in the door lock r::> page 45.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be The mechanical locking device for the other
triggered if movements are detected in the in- doors is located on the end face of the front
terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli- passenger's door and the rear doors*. It is on-
nation is changed (e.g . during transport). You ly visible when the door is open. ..,..
Doors and windows 49

Pull the cap out of the opening.


Insert the key in the slot inside and turn it
A_ WARNING

as far as the stop to the right (if the door is - After closing the boot lid, a lways check
on the right side) or to the left (if the door is t hat the catch has engaged properly. The
on the left side). boot lid could otherwise open suddenly
when the vehicle is moving - this could
Once the door has been closed it can no lon- result in an accident.
ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte - The boot lid must always be completely
rior door handle once to unlock and open the closed when the vehicle is moving; other-
door. wise toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn
into the interior.
Boot lid
(D Note
Opening and closing the boot lid
When the vehicle is locked, you can unlock
the boot lid separately by pressing the~
button on the remote control key. The
boot lid will lock automatically when you
close it again.

Manual release of the boot lid


The boot Lid con be released manually fr om
the inside.
Fig. 4 2 Boot lid: Opening {release catch}

Fig. 43 Boot lid/handle on Inside (example): Closing Access to manual release


-
Fig. 44 (A3/A3 Sportback) Detail of inside of boot lid:

Opening boot lid


Press the ~ button on the remote control
key for at least one second, or
Press the release catch on the boot lid
r:::>Fig . 42.

Closing boot lid


Pull down the boot lid by the handle on the
inside and let it drop into the latch Q Fig. 43 Fig. 4 5 (A3/A3 Saloon) Detail of inside of boot lid: Ac-
r:::> . cess to manual release

To access the manual release mechanism, fold


down the rear seat backrest Q page 73. .,..
50 Doors and windows

The steps for manually releasing the boot lid Electric child safety switches
vary according to the vehicle model. Applies to vehicles. with electric child safety switches (A3
Sportback/A3 Saloon)
Manual release (A3/A3 Sportback)
The child safety switches disable the rear win-
Use the blade of the ignition key to prise off dows and prevent the rear doors from being
the cover <D
Q Fig . 44. opened from the inside.
Insert the key in the opening behind the
cover @ and pull the key in the direction of
the arrow until the boot is unlocked.

Manual release (A3 Saloon)


Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool
kit Q page 236. Use the flat-blade side of
the reversible insert.
Use the screwdriver to prise off the cover @
~ Fig. 45.
Fig. 47 Detail of driver's door: child safety switches
Insert the key in the opening behind the
cover and pu ll the key in the direction of To activate the child safety switches on the
the arrow until the boot is unlocked. rear doors, press the left/right button m on
the driver's door Q Fig . 47. The LED in the
Child-proof catches button will light up.
To deactivate the child safety switches on
Mechanical child-proof catches
Applies to vehicles: with mechanical childproof catches
the rear doors, press the left/right button m
on the driver's door. The LED in the button
The child-proof catches t prevent the rear will go out.
doors being opened from the inside.
The following functions are disabled by the
child safety switches:

- Door handle on the inside of the corre-


sp onding rear door,
- Electric window in the corresponding rear
door,
To activate the child safety switches on both
sides, you need to press them buttons one af-
ter the other.
Fig. 46 Rear doors: Child-proof catches
Driver message
To engage the child-proof catch turn the ig-
nition key in the d irection of the arrow.
IGl Child-proof catch: system fault!
To disengage the child-proof catch turn the If this message appears, the child safety
ignition key in the opposite direction of the switches cannot be switched on . Drive to a
arrow. qualified workshop soon and have the fault
rectified . To prevent the rear doors from being
When the child-proof catch is engaged, the in-
opened from the inside, engage the mechani-
side door handle will not function, and the
cal child-proof catches Q page 50. ~
door can only be opened from the outside.

The child-proof catches only function for the


door on which they were engaged .
Doors and windows 51

.&.. WARNING @ Switch for window in front passenger's


doo r
Always take the key with you when leaving
Switch* for window in rear left door (A3
the vehicle - even if you only intend to be
Sportback/A3 Saloon)
gone for a short time. This is es pecially im-
@ Switch* for window in rear right door (A3
portant if children a re left in the car. They
Sportback/A3 Saloon)
might otherwise be able to start the en-
gine or use power-operated equipment Safety switch* (A3 Sportback I A3 Saloon)
such as the electric windows - this cou ld Child safety switch
lead to injuries.
When the safety switch <::> Fig. 48 is activa-
ted, the symbol ~ in the switch is lit. The
Electric windows windiow switches in the rear doors are deacti-
Controls vated.

The driver can operotf! all the electric win-


dows.
.&.. WARNING
- Always take the key with you when leav-
ing the vehicle- even if you only intend
to be gone for a short time. This is espe-
cially important if children are left in the
car. They might otherwise be able to
start the engine or use power-operated
equ ipment such as the electric wihdows -
this could lead to injuries. The window
switches are only deactivated when the
driver's door or the front passenger's
Fig. 48 Detail of the driver's door: Controls (example door is opened.
for A3 Sportback/A3 Saloon)
- Always be careful when closing the win-
All electric windows have two-stage switches: dows. Careless use of the electric win-
d ows can cause severe injuries.
Opening a window - When locking the vehicle from the out-
"" Press the switch as far as the first stop and side, make s ure that nobody is inside the
hold it until the window has moved to the vehicle, as the windows cannot be
desired position. opened from the inside in an emergency.
"" Press the switch briefly to the second stop:
t he window will automatically open all the (!) Note
way. The windows can be operated for about
ten m inutes after the ignition has been
Closing a window
switched off. The window switches are only
"" Pull the switch as far as the first stop and deactivated when the driver's door or the
hold it until the window has moved to the front passenger's door is opened.
desired position.
"" Pull the switch briefly to the second stop: Convenience open I close function
the window will automatically close all the
way. The convenience open/close function allows
you to open and close the windows and panor-
Switches for electric windows ama sun roof* conveniently from outside the
@ Switch <::> Fig . 48 fo r window in driver's vehicle via the central locking system. .,..
door
52 Doors and windows

Convenience open function them. The windows and sun roof stop
Press and hold the Im button on the remote moving as soon as the button is released .
control key until aU the windows and the
panorama sun roof* have reached the de- What to do after a malfunction
sired position, or:
First unlock the vehicle using the Im button The one-touch open and close function must
on the remote control key, then insert the be reactivated if the battery has been discon-
key in the driver's door lock, turn it to the nected.
"unlock" position and hold it there until all Pull and hold t he electric window switch un-
the windows and the panorama s un roof* t il the window is fu lly closed .
have reached the desired posit ion. Release the switch and then pull it again for
Convenience close function at least one second.

Press and hold the Im button on the remote


control key until aU the windows and the
Panorama sun roof
panorama sun roof* are closed c::> .&,, or Description
Turn the key in the driver's door lock to the Applies to vehicles~ with panorama sun roof
lock posit ion and hold it there until a ll the
windows and the panorama sun roof* are
closed.

Convenience close function with


convenience key*
Touch a nd keep your hand in contact with
t he sensor* on one of t he fro nt door ha ndles
until a ll the windows and the panorama sun
roof* are closed . Do not rest your hand on Fig. 49 Detail of headliner: Button for panorama sun
the door handle while this is happening. roof

Adjusting settings for convenience ope n The switch operates in two stages. Whenever
function via MMI*
the switch is pressed or pulled to the second
Select: IM ENU I button > control button Sys- stage, the sun roof automatically opens or
tems or Car systems > Vehicle settings > closes all the way. The sun roof stops moving
Central locking > Long press to open win- immediately ifthe switch is pressed in any di-
dows and/or Front windows on/ off and/or rection.
Roof on/ off*.
@ Tilting open and closed
A WARNING To ti lt the sun roof fu lly open, briefly press
- Take care when closing the windows and the switch to the second positio n.
the panorama sun roof*, Careless or un- To close the sun roof completely, briefly pull
controlled use ca n cause injuries. the switch downwards to t he second posi-
- For safety reasons, you should only use t ion or briefly slide t he switch forwards to
the remote control open and close func- the second position c::> .&..
tions within about 2 metres of the vehi- To set an intermediate position, press/pu ll
cle. To avoid injuries, always keep an eye the switch to the first position until the sun
on the windows and the panorama sun roof has reached the desired position. IJI.
roof* when pressing the button to close
Doors and windows 53

@ Opening and closing Closing the panorama sun roof manually


... To slide the sun roof fully open, briefly slide Applies to vehicles: with panorama sun roof

the switch backwards to the second posi- If the panorama sun roof detects a resistance
tion . whi le it is closing (e.g. caused by an object
... To close the sun roof completely, briefly trapped in the mechanism), a safety cut-out
slide the switch forwards to the second posi- will be triggered and the roof will open again
t ion or briefly pull t h e switch downwards to automatically. If the roof will still not dose
the second position c::> ,&.. automatically after you remove the object and
... To set an intermediate position, press the operate the switch agai n, you ca n use the
switch forwards/backwards to the first posi- safety cut-out override to close it.
tion until t he sun roof has reached t he de-
sired posit ion. ... After the sun roof opens automatically, pull
and hold the switch within 5 seconds unti l
A wind deflector incorporated in the panora- the sun roof is closed.
ma sun roof adapts automatically to suit the
If you release the switch before t he panorama
position of the sun roof. This feature minimi-
sun roof is fu lly closed, it will open again au-
ses wind noise in all roof positions.
tomatica lly.
The panorama sun roof can be operated for
about ten minutes after the ignition has been
switched off. The switch is deactivated imme-
d iately when one of the front doors is opened.

Sun blind
The sun blind can be opened and closed by
hand when the panorama su n roof is open in
a ny position. The sun blind can be adjusted to
any intermed iate position.

A WARNING
Take care when closing the panorama sun
roof. Careless or uncontrolled use can
cause injuries. For this reason, always take
the ignition key with you when leaving the
vehicle.

CD CAUTION
You should always close yo ur panorama
sun roof when leaving the ca r. Sudden rain
could seriously damage your car's interior
equipment, especially the on-board elec-
tronic systems.

(D Note
- Details on the convenience open/close
function ~ page 51.
- The panorama sun roof can be opened
on ly at temperatu res above -20 c.
54 Lights and vision

Lights and vision 0$ - Rear fog light(s)


Exterior Lights AU-weather lights*
Applies to vehicles with LED headlights
Switching lights on and off
Press the button c:> Fig. 50:

~C> -All-weather lights (in place of the front


fog light switch ~D.)

On vehicles with all-weather lights, the front


lights are adjusted automatically so that the
head lights on your own vehicle do not blind
you, for instance when driving on a wet road.

Headlight range control ~D


Fig. SO Dashboard: Lig ht switch with head light range
cont rol Your vehicle is equipped with a headlight
range control to prevent oncoming traffic
Light switch -'t;. from being dazzle d when the vehicle is heavily
Turn the switch c:> Fig. SO to the appropriate laden.
position. The corresponding symbol lights up On vehicles with xenon headlights* or LED
when the lights are on . headlights*, the headlight beam settings are
0 - Lights off. On vehicles for some markets, adjusted automatically (even during braking
the daytime running lights are switched on and acceleration).
and off together with the ignition. On vehicles with halogen headlights, the knob
AUTO* - The automatic headlights switch on c:> Fig. 50 must be used to adjust the head-
(and off again) automatically according to the light beam settings:
ambient light conditions (for instance at dusk, - Briefly press the knob to release it.
in the rain or in a tunnel) . On vehicles with in- - Turn the knob towards 3 or 0 to reduce or in-
tegrated daytime running lights*, the daytime crease the range of the headlights.
running lights or the dipped headlights (dif- - Briefly press the knob again to engage it.
ferent versions for different countries) are
switched on automatically, depending on the 0 - One or two front occupants, luggage com-
ambient light level. partment empty

:oo: - Side lights 1 - All seats occupied, luggage compartment


empty
~D - Dipped head lights
2 - All seats occupied, luggage compartment
When you lock the vehicle, the lights are con- loaded
trolled as follows, depending on the position
of the light switch: 3 - Driver only, luggage compartment loaded

- ~D
- Dipped headlights: The exterior lights Audi adaptive light*
are switched off completely. The adaptive light is activated only whien the
- AUTO*: The coming home* function is light switch is set to AUTO. You can deactivate
switched on c:> page 59. the adaptive light on the MMI* c:> page 58.
Front and rear fog lights When the lights are on, they are automatically
Press the corresponding switch c:> Fig . SO: adapted to bends in the road, dependiing on
the speed of the vehicle and the steering ._
iD - Front fog lights
Lights and vision 55

wheel angle. This feature provides better illu-


mination when you drive through a corner.
(D Note
The system is active at speeds from approxi- - The light sensor for the automatic head-
mately 10 km/h to 110 km/h. lights* is located in the mounting for the
interior mirror. Do not affix any stickers
Static cornering light (turning light)* (on on this section of the windscreen.
vehicles with adaptive light) - the turning - Some of the settings for the exterior
light is automatically activated when the lighting can be adjusted ~page 58.
steering wheel angle exceeds a specified value
- A buzzer will sound if you switch off the
(up to about 70 km/h) or when the turn sig-
ignition and open the door when the ex-
nals are switched on Cup to about 40 km/h).
terior lighting is on.
This feature provides better illumination at
- On vehicles for some markets, the rear
the side of the vehicle when you turn off at a
lights remain off when the daytime run-
junction .
ning lights are switched on.
Speed-dependent light distribution* - The - In cool or damp weather, the inside of
speed-dependent light distribution adjusts the headlights, turn signals or rear li'ghts
the vehicle lighting as required in towns, on can sometimes mist up, due to the tem-
motorways and on other main roads. Intersec- perature difference between the interior
tions can also be illuminated if your vehicle is and exterior of the car. They should clear
equ ipped with a navigation system*. again partially or completely soon after
you switch on the headlights. This phe-
Motorway light function*
nomenon has no influence on the life ex-
(On vehicles with adaptive light or LED head- pectancy of the vehicle Ug hts.
lights) - this function adjusts the vehicle light- - If you are towing a trailer or caravan
ing on motorways according to your speed. equipped with a rear fog light on a vehi-
cle with a factory-fitted towing braclket,
_& WARNING only the rear fog light on the trailer or
~1

- The automatic headlights* are only in- caravan will light up.
tended to assist the driver. The driver
must always ensure that the headlights Turn signal and main beam lever
are used when required, and may have to
The turn signal lever also operates the main
switch them on manually when the light
beam headlights, parking lights and head-
conditions or visibility are poor. For ex-
light flasher.
ample, the light sensors are not able to
detect fog. Therefore, you should always
switch on the dipped headlights ~Di n
these conditions and when driving after
dark.
- Observe all relevant statutory require-
ments when using the lighting systems
described here.

CD CAUTION
Fig. 51 Turn signal and ma.in beam headlight lever
To avoid dazzling the traffic behind you,
the rear fog light shou ld only be used in
accordance with statutory regulations.
56 Lights and vision

Turn signals c:> and parking lights pE- Main beam assist
The turn signals will flash if you move the lev- Applies to vehicles: with main beam assist

er while the ignition is switched on . The park- The main beam assist automatically switches
ing light will come on if you move the turn the main beam headlights on or off depend-
signal lever while the ignition is switched off. ing on the surrounding light conditions.
@ -Turn signals/par king lights (right side)

@ -Turn signals/parking lights (left side)

If you just tap the lever, the turn signals will


flash three times (one-touch signalling).

Main beam and headlight flasher ~D


Move the lever to the appropriate position:

@ -Main beam headlights on (vehicles with


Fig. 52 Turn signal and main bea m lever: Switching
main beam assist*~ page 56, vehicles with main beam assist on/off
adaptive headlight range control*
~page 57)

-Main beam headlights off or headlight


flasher

The indicator lamp II will light up in the in-


strument cluster.

8,. WARNING
- 1
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Fig. 53 Instrument cluster: Indicator lamp for main
Risk of accident! Never use the main beam beam assist
headlights or the headlight flasher If they
could dazzle other drivers. Activating the main beam assist
Important: The light switch must be set to
@ Note AUTO, the dipped beam headlights must be
A buzzer will sound if you open the door on and the main beam assist must be activa-
when the parking light is on . ted on the MM!* ~ page 58.

Push the lever to position @ to activate the


main beam assist. The indicator lamp El
will Light up in the instrument cluster dis-
play Fig. 53 and the main beams will be
switched on/off automatically. An indicator
lamp II lights up when the main beams are
switched on .

Switching the main beams on/off


manually
If the main beams are not switched on or if
the headlights are not dipped as expected,
you can control the dip function manually: ..,.
Lights and vision 57

To switch on the main beams manually, - Highly reflective objects, such as road
push the lever to position (!). The indicator signs
lamp . will light up. To dip the headlights - Windscreen misted up, dirty, frosted or
again, pull the lever to position @ . covered by stickers in front of the sensor
To dip the headlights manually after the
main beams have been switched on auto-
Adaptive headlight range control
matically, pull the lever to position @ .
Applies to vehicles: with adaptive headlight range control
Flashing the headlights The adaptive headlight range control auto-
Pull the lever to position @ to flash the matfrally regulates the cone of light emitted
headlights when the main beam assist is ac- by the main beam headlights depending on
tivated. The main beam assist wi ll remain the ambient surroundings.
activated. ..,
0
q
Driver messages in the instrument cluster ::c
~
display
llJ Main beam assist: system fault!
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
the fault rectified. You can still switch the
main beam headlights on and off manually.
llJ Main bea m assist : currently unavailable. Fig. S4 Turn signal and main beam lever: Switching
No camera view adaptive headlight range control on/off

The camera vision is impaired, e.g. by stickers


A camera (located in the mounting for t he in-
or dirt.
terior mirror) detects light sources from other
The sensor is located between the interior road users. The vertical and horizontal range
mirror and the windscreen. Do not affix any of the headlights is varied smoothly and virtu-
stickers on this section of the windscreen. ally steplessly between dipped and main
beams. The system controls the activation/de-
&_ WARNING activation of the main beams depending on
The main beam assist is only intended to how far away the traffic is on either side of the
assist the driver. The driver must always road.
ensure that the headlights are used when
Activating the adaptive headlight range
required, and may have to switch them on control
or off manually, e.g. when the light condi-
tions or visibility are poor. In the fo llowing Important: The light switch must be set to
situat ions manual intervention may be AUTO and the main beam assist function must
necessary: be activated on the MMI* Q page 58.
- Hazardous weather conditions such as Push the lever to position (!) to activate the
fog, heavy rain and snow or water adapt ive headlight range control. The indi-
splashes. cator lamp llJ
will light up in the instru-
- Roads on which oncoming traffic is parti- ment cluster display and the main beams
ally concealed (e.g . on motorways). will be switched on/off automatically. The
- Indiscernible road users (e.g. cyclists ind icator lamp . is lit when the main
with poor lighting) beams are partially or fully on. ~
- Tight corners, steep hill crests or valleys
- Poorly lit towns
58 Lights and vision

Switching the main beams on/off - Hazardous weather cond itions such as
manually fog, heavy rain and snow or water
If the main beams are not switched on or if splashes.
the headlights are not dipped as expected, - Roads on which oncom ing traffic is parti-
you can control the dip function manually: ally concea led (e.g . on motorways).
- Indiscernible road users (e .g. cyclists
... To switch on the main beams manually,
with poor lighting)
push the lever to position (D. The indicator
ml
lamp will light up. To dip the headlights
- Tight corners, steep hill crests or valleys
again, pull the lever to position @ . - Poorly lit towns
... To d ip the headlights manually, pu ll the lev- - Highly reflective objects, such as road
er to position @ . signs
- Wi ndscreen misted up, dirt y, frosted or
Flashing the headlights covered by stickers in front of the sensor
... Pull the lever to position @ to flash the
headlights when the adaptive headlight @ Note
range control is activated. The adaptive The range of the headlight beams will be
headlight range control remains activated. adjusted automatica lly when traffic in
front is detected on either side of the road.
Do not affix any stickers to the windscreen in
This prevents yo u from dazzling other road
the vicinity of the camera.
users .
Driver message in the instrument cluster
display Adjusting the settings for the exterior
ml Main beam assist: system fault! lighting

Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have You con change the settings for these func-
the fault rect ified. You can st ill swit ch the tions on the sound system/MM!*.
main beam headlights on and off manually.
Vehicles with sound system*
ml Main beam assist: currently unavailable. ... Press the l sETUPI button.
No ca mera view
... Select lights using the control button ~ .
The camera vision is impaired, e.g. by stickers
Vehicles with MM!*
or di rt .
... Select: IMENU I button > control button Sys
The sensor is located between t he interior terns I Car systems > Vehicle settings > Ex
mirror a nd the windscreen. Do not affix any terior lighting .
stickers on this section of the windscreen .
Automatic headlights
A WARNING The following settings are ava ilable in the Au-
The adaptive headlig ht range control is o n- tomatic headlights menu:
ly intended to assist the driver. The driver Activation time - You can determine how soon
m ust always ensure that the headlights t he lig hts are switched on by using the set-
are used when required, and may have t o tings early, medium or late to adjust the sen-
switch t hem on or off manually, e.g . when s itivity of the light sensor.
the light conditions or visibility are poor.
Main beam a ssist* - You can switch the main
In the following situations manual inter-
beam assist* or adaptive headlight ra n ge con-
vention may be necessary:
trol* on and off. .,._
Lights and vision 59

Audi adaptive light* - You can switch the A message appears when the headlight set-
adaptive light on and off. tings have been changed:

Coming home, leaving home* Applies to left-hand drive vehicles:

The coming home fu nction lights up the area Iii Headlamp converter active for driving on
round the vehicle after dark when the ignition left. Range reduced!
has been switched off and the driver's door
Applies to right-hand drive vehicles:
opened. To activate this function, select
Lights when getting out > on. Iii Headlamp converter active for driving on
right. Range reduced!
The leaving home function lights up the area
round the vehicle after dark when the vehicle (D Note
is unlocked. To act ivate this function, select
If the head lam p converter is activated,
Lights when unlocking > on .
t his is displayed In the driver information
The coming home and leaving home functions syst em eve ry t ime the ignition is switched
are operational after dark when the light o n.
switch is set to AUTO .

Daytime running lights* Hazard warning lights

In countries which allow the daytime running


lights to be switched off/on, this can be done
via the MMI*. In other countries, the daytime
running lights stay on permanently.

Headlamp converter for driving abroad*


The asymmetric low beams of the headlights
are designed to light up the near side of the
road more intensely. On vehicles with LED
Fig . SS Dashboard: Switch for hazard warning lights
headlights* or xenon headlights* with turn-
ing light*, the headlight dip settings must be
The hazard warning lights are used to make
modified if you drive a right-hand drive vehicle
other road users aware of your vehicle in haz-
in a left-hand drive country, or vice versa. 0th
ardous s ituations.
erwise you will dazzle oncoming traffic. On
vehicles with regular halogen or xenon head .. Press t he switch~ to switch the haza rd
lig hts, it is not necessary to cha nge t he di p warning lig hts on/off.
settings.
Whe n you bra ke ha rd, the brake lights flas h to
To avoid dazzling oncoming traffic: ale rt ot he r road users to the hazard. The haz-
ard warning lights a re switched on automat i-
- On vehicles with LED headlights* or xenon
cally after an emergency stopl>. The hazard
headlights* with turning light*, the head-
warning lights are switched off automatically
lamp converter must be activated. Press the
when you drive off again.
I MENUI button. Select> control button Sys-
tems I Car systems > Vehicle settings > Ex- You can use the turn signals to indicate a
terior lighting > e.g. Lights for driving on change of direction (or lane) even when the
left. hazard lights are on. The hazard lights will be
interrupted tempera rily. .,..

1l This function is not available on all export versions.


60 Lights and vision

The hazard warning lights also work when t he or when the vehicle is tocked or the ignition is
ignition is switched off. switched on. The lighting goes out automati-
callly after a few minutes if a door is left open.
Interior lights Interior lights
Front/ rear interior lights Various optional lighting functions are availa-
ble for the vehicle interior. The settings for
certain functions can be adjusted on the
MMI* . Select: IMENU I button> control button
Systems I Car systems > Vehicle settings >
Background lighting.

Instrument lighting

The brightness of the lighting in the instru-


Fig. S6 Front headliner: Switches for Interior lights ment cluster and the centre console can be
(example) adjusted as required.

Fig. S7 Rear headliner: LEO read ing lights (example) Fig . SS Instrument lighting

Your interior lights may differ from the illus- Important: The lights must be switched on.
tration, depending on the equipment in your
Briefly press the knob to release it.
vehicle.
Turn the knob towards"-" or"+" to reduce or
~ Reading lights* increase the brightness of the lighting.
Briefly press the knob again to engage it.
Press the ~ button to switch the appropriat e
reading light on/off.

~ Interior lights (manual)


The needles and the dials in t he instru-
Press the ~ button to switch the interior m ent cluster are illum inated when the ig-
lights on/off. nition is on and the dipped headlights are
off. The illumination is automatically re-
] Interior lights (automatic)
duced as it becomes dark outside and is
Press the ~ button to control the interior eventually switched off altogether. This
lights automatically. function is intended to remind the driver
to switch on the dipped headlights in good
When the switch is on (in this case an LED in
time.
the ] button will be lit), the interior lighting
comes on automatically when the vehicle is
unlocked, a door is opened or the key is pulled
out of the ignition. The interior lighting goes
out a few seconds after the doors are closed,
Lights and vision 61

Clear vision rors will then fold in when you lock the vehi-
cle, and will fold out again when you switch
Adjusting the exterior mirrors on the ignition .

.&_ WARNING
Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors
give a larger field of vision. However, they
make objects look smaller and further
away than they really are. If you use these
mirrors to estimate the distance to
veh icles behind you when changing lane,
you could misjudge the distance. Risk of
Fig. 59 Driver's door: Adjuster knob for exterior mir- accident!
rors (example)

Turn the knob to the appropriate position:


CD CAUTION
- Applies to vehicles with electrically re-
Q/P - In these positions you can adjust the
t ractable exterior mirrors: If one of the
exterior m irrors (left or right) by moving the
m irror housings is knocked out of posi-
knob in the desired direction.
t ion (e.g. when parking), the mirrors
@-The mirrors are heated* (depending on must be fully retracted with the electric
the outside temperatu re and road speed) . control. You will hear a loud noise when
t he mirrors snap back into place. Do not
8 - The exterior mirrors are retracted*.
re adjust the mirror housing by hand, as
Tilt function for front passenger's exterior t his will interfere with the mirror adjust-
mirror* er function.
The mirror can be slightly tilted automatically - Applies to vehicles without electrically
to provide a better view of the kerb when retractable exterior mirrors: If one of the
parking backwards. This feature is operational mirror housings is knocked out of posi-
when the knob is in position P. t ion (e.g. when parking), it must be re-
turned to its proper position by hand.
You can adjust the tilted mirror surface by - Before washing the vehicle in an auto-
moving the knob in the desired direction. This matic car wash, please make sure to re-
new position is automatically stored and as- t ract the exterior mirrors to prevent
signed to the remote control key when you them from being damaged. Electrically
take the car out of reverse. retractable exterior mirrors must NOT be
The mirror returns to its original position as folded in or out by hand. Always use the
soon as you drive forwards at over 15 km/h or electrical power control.
switch off the ignition.
Q) Note
Folding mirrors in/out
If the electrical adjustment should fai l to
To fold in the mirrors using the knob, turn it operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-
to the position marked 8. ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of
the mirror glass.
To fold the mirrors out, turn the knob to posi-
tion Q, P or 0.
Applies to vehicles with MMI*: You can use the
settings in the MMI to have the mirrors fold in
when you lock the vehicle ~ page 47. The mir-
62 Lights and vision

Anti-dazzle setting - The automatic anti-dazzle mirrors do not


darken if the interior lighting is on or the
Your vehicle is equipped with a manual or au-
car is in reverse gear.
tomatic* anti-dazzle interior m irror.

Sun visors

(.._____ )

Fig. 60 Au t omat ic anti dazzle interior mirror*

Manual anti-dazzl1e interior mirror Fig. 61 Left side: Sun vi sor

Pull the lever at the bottom of the mirror to- The sun vi sor can be pulled out of its mount-
ward s you. ing and turned towards the door @ .
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors* The light* for the make-up mirror comes on
Press button @ . The indicator lamp @ will automatically when you slide open the mirror
light up. The interior mirror and driver's ex- cover @ .
terior m irror* will darken automatica lly
when bright light (e.g . from the headlights Windscreen wipers
of a following vehicle) shines on the surface
Switching on the windscreen wipers
of the mirror.

A WARNING
Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken au-
tomatic anti-dazzle mirror. This fluid can
cause irritation to the skin, eyes, a nd respi-
ratory organs. Wash thoroughly with clean
water should you come into contact with
this flu id . Seek medical assistance if nee-
ded. Fig. 62 Windscreen wiper lever: Operating the wind-
screen wipers (exa mple shows vehicle w it hout rear win
CD CAUTION dowwiperl
..,
Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken au- "'
N
0
tomatic anti-dazzle mirror. This fluid can
~
damage plastic surfaces. Use a wet sponge
or sim ilar to remove the fluid as soon as
possible.

@ Note
- The automatic anti-dazzle mirrors may
not function as intended if the light fall- Fig. 63 Windscreen wiper lever with rear w indow wip
ing on the surface of the interior mirror er: Operating the rear wiper II>
is obstructed .
Lig hts and v ision 63

Important: The ignition must be switched on. 0 - Rear wash/wipe*. The number of wiper
cycles depends on how long you hold the lever
Move the windscreen wiper lever to the appro-
in position Q).
priate position:
@ - Rear wiper* off.
@ - Front wipers off
CD - Intermittent wipe. Move switch @ to the A WARNING
left or to the right to i ncrease or reduce the - The rain sensor is only intended to assist
wiper delay interval. While a vehicle with the driver. The driver is still obliged to
light/ra in sensor* is stationary, the wind- manually operate the windscreen wipers
screen wipers can be activated by pulling the as required depending on visibility.
lever briefly to position (the wipers are ac- - Do not use water-repellent coatings on
tivated automatically when the speed exceeds the windscreen. In bad visibility condi-
about 4 km/h). The higher the sensitivity level tions such as Light rain, low sun or when
for the rain sensor (i.e. the further switch @ driving at night these coatings can cause
is moved to the right), the sooner the wind- increased dazzle, which is a serious safe-
screen wipers react to moisture on the wind- ty hazard. Such coatings can also caUJse
screen. the wiper blades to judder.
@ - Slow wipe - Poor visibility can cause accidents. Al-
ways ensure that the wiper blades are in
@ -Fast wipe
good condition <:!> page 64, Changing
-Single wipe. If you hold the lever in th is the windscreen wiper blades.
position, the wipers will switch from slow con-
tinuous wiping to fast continuous wiping after CD CAUTION
a while. - In icy conditions, check that the w iper
-Wash/wipe. The screen is given an extra blades are not frozen to the windscreen.
wipe a few seconds later to remove any drib- If the w iper blades are frozen to the
bles of water (if the vehicle is moving and the windscreen when you switch on the
temperature is above approx. 4 (). You can windscreen wipers, this could damage
deactivate this function by moving the lever the wiper blades.
to position again within 10 seconds after - Make sure you switch off the windscreen
the extra wipe. The extra-wipe function is acti- wiper system (lever in position 0) before
vated again the next time you switch on the you use an automatic car wash. This will
ignition. avoid Inadvertent triggering of the wi p-
ers and possible damage to the wiper
Headlight washers*. The headlight washer
system.
system* on ly operates when the dipped head-
lights are switched on. The headlights are also @ Note
automatically washed! intermittently when
- The windscreen wipers are deactivated
you move the lever to position
when the ignition is switched off. You
Applies to vehicles with rear window wiper: can activate the windscreen wipers after
If the windscreen wipers are on and in opera- switching the ignition on again by mov-
tion, the rear window wiper will also be ing the windscreen wiper lever to any po-
switched on automatically when you engage sition.
reverse gear. - Worn or dirty wiper blades can cause
smearing on the glass. This can also im-
- Rear wipe*. The rear window is wiped ap- pair the effectiveness of the rain sensor.
proximately every 6 seconds. Please check the wiper blades regularly. ..,.
64 Lights and vision

- The windscreen washer jets are heated* Service pos ition I wiper change position
when the ignition is switched on if the .,. To move the windscreen wipers to the serv-
outside temperature is low. ice position, switch off the ignition and
- If you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights, move the windscreen wiper lever briefly to
the wiper speed setting will automatical- position i::> poge 62, Fig. 62.
ly be reduced by one level. .,. To move the windscreen wipers back to their
- You can switch t h e rain sensor on or off original position, switch on the ignition and
in the Driver assist menu on vehicles move the windscreen wiper lever to position
with MM!*. @ c) page 62, Fig. 62.
Taking off the wiper blade
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
... Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
Clean the wiper blades if the wipers leave ... Press the release buttonCD on the wiper
smearing on the glass. Use a soft cloth and blade i::> Fig . 64. Keep hold of the wiper
glass cleaning solution. blade while doing so.
Windscreen wipers ... Take off the wiper blade in the direction of
the arrow .
... Set the wiper arms to the service position
Q poge 64 . Fitting the wiper blade
... Lift the wiper arms away from the glass. ... Fit the new wiper blade into the mounting
Rear window w iper* on the wiper arm @ . You should hear it en-
gage in the wiper arm .
... Lift the rear wiper arm away from the glass. .,. Fold the wiper arm back down onto the
windscreen .
_& WARNING .,. Switch off the service position again .
Dirty wiper blades can impair the driver's
view - risk of accident. _& WARNING
-
For safety, the wiper blades should be
CD CAUTION changed once or twice a year.
If the wipers still leave smearing on the
glass after they have been cleaned, the CD CAUTION
wiper blades should be replaced - The wipers must be in the service posi-
i::> poge 64. tion before lifting them off the wind-
screen! Otherwise the wiper motor or the
Changing the windscreen wiper blades paintwork on the bonnet may be dam-
aged.
- Never drive your vehicle or operate the
windscreen wiper lever while the wiper
arms are off the glass in a raised posi-
tion. The wipers will otherwise automati-
cally return to their park position and
may damage the bonnet and windscreen.

(D Note
Fig. 64 Removing the wiper blades - You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over ..,.
Lights and vision 65

the windscreen in the winter to keep it


clear of ice.
- You cannot activate the service position
when the bonnet is open.

Changing the rear wiper blade


Applies to vehicles: with rear window wiper (A3/
A3 Sportback)

Fig. 65 Rear window w iper: Removing the wiper blade

Taking off the wiper blade


Lift the rear wiper airm away from the glass.
Take hold of the wiper blade below the cen-
tre and pull the blade out of the retainer in
the d irection of the -arrow- ~ Fig. 65. Keep
hold of the wiper arm while doing so.

Fitting the wiper blade


Press the mounting on the wiper blade into
the retainer. While doing so, keep holding
the plastic top end of the wiper arm.
Fold the wiper arm back down onto the rear
window.

A WARNING
- 1
For safety, the wiper blades should be
changed once or twice a year.
66 Seats a nd s t orag e

Seats and storage the seat belt and airbag could fail to re-
strain the wearer properly in an accident,
General notes possibly leading to injury.

.&. WARNING - 1 Electric adjustment of seats


The Safe driving chapter c::> page 152, Applies to vehicles: with electric seat adjustme nt
Safety first contains important informa-
tion, tips, suggestions and warnings that
you should read and observe for your own
safety and the safety of your passengers.

Front seats
Manual adjustment of seats

Fig. 67 Front seat: Electric adjustment

@ - Lumbar support: Press the appropriate


side of the button.

- Seat height: Press the button up/down.


To adjust the front of the seat cushion, press
the front of the button up/down. To adjust the
rear of the seat cushion, press the rear of the
Fig. 66 Front seat: Manual adjustment
button up/down.
@ - Seat forwards/backwards: Lift the lever @ - Seat forwa rds/backwards: Press the but-
and move the seat. ton forwards/backwards.
@ -Thigh support*: Lift the handle and move - Backrest angle: Press the button for-
the thigh support in or out. wards/backwards.
-Angle* of seat cushion: Pull/press the Lev- @ -Thigh support*: Lift the handle and move
er. the thigh support in or out.
-Lumbar support*: Press the appropriate
side of the button .
A WARNING
- Never adjust the front seats when the ve-
-Seat height: Pull/press the lever.
hicle is moving - t his could lead to an ac-
@ -Backrest angle: Turn the knob. cident.
- The electric seat adjustment also works
_&. WARNING when the ignition is off and when tihe key
- Never adjust the front seats when the ve- is not in the ignition. To avoid accidental
hicle is moving - this could lead to an ac- injuries, never leave children unattended
cident. in the vehicle.
- Be careful when adjusting the seat - Be careful when adjusti ng the seat
height. Careless or uncontrolled use of height. Careless or uncontrolled use of
the seat adjustment can cause injuries. the height adjustment can cause injuries.
- Do not drive with the backrests of the - Do not drive with the backrests of the
front seats reclined too far as otherwise front seats reclined too far as otherwise
the seat belt and airbag could fail to ~
Seats and storage 67

restrain the wearer properly in an acci- - When using the easy entry function, al-
dent, possibly leading to injury. ways slide the seat all the way back to
ensure that it locks in position. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the seat is prop-
Easy entry function
Applies to vehicles. with eilsy entry function (A3)
erly locked in position .

The easy entry function facilitates access to i Note


the rear seats.
If the seat does not lock properly in posi-
;:; tion after using the easy entry function,
0
0
> slide the seat all the way back as far as the
~
stop. Then adjust the seat position as de-
sired.

Front centre armrest


Applies to vehicles: wi th fronl cen tre armrest

The centre armrest can be adjusted to several


Fig. 68 Driver's seat: Easy entry controls positions.

Fig. 69 Tips for using the easy entry feature, seat ad- Fig. 70 Armrest between driver's seat and front pas-
justment with memory function senger's seat

Tipping the front backrests forward .. To adjust the angle, lift the armrest
.. Pull the lever @ c:> Fig. 68 forwards . Q Fig. 70 until it engages in the desired po-

.. Fold the backrest down until it locks. Then sition .


take hold of the seat by the backrest and .. To lower the armrest aga in, lift the armrest
push it all the way forwards @ . slightly from the top click stop and then fold
it back down. Then raise the armrest to the
Returning front backrests to an upright desired position if necessary.
position
.. Take hold of the seat by the backrest and You can move the armrest backwards or for-
push it all the way back @ ~ Fig. 69 . wards.
.. Move the backrest back into its upright posi- There is a storage compartment underneath
tion until it engages @ . the armrest.

The seat will then return to the position it was


in before using the easy entry function.

&. WARNING
For safety reasons the front seat backrests
must be tocked while driving.
68 Seats and storage

Rear centre armrest head restraint as near as possible to this posi-


Applies to vehicles: with rear centre armrest tion .

A storage compartment and cup holder are ... To raise or lower the head restraint, adjust
integrated in the armrest. the position of the head restraint until you
fee l it click into place c:> Fig. 72.

Rear head restraints

Fig. 71 Rear armrest

Folding down armrest


... Fold the armrest all the way down . Fig. 73 Rear outer head restr~int: Release po int

Opening storage compartment Before carrying passengers on the rear seats,


... Release the catch .at the top and lift the lid . pull the head restraints on the occupied seats
up at least one notch c:> ,&..
For information on how to operate the cup
holders please refer to page 70. Adjusting head restraints
... To raise the head restraint, take hold of it on
Head restraints both s ides and move it all the way up until
you feel it click into place.
Front head restraints
... To lower the head restraint, press button @
Applies to vehicles. with .adju stable head restraints
r::::> Fig. 73 and slide the head restra int down-
wards.

Removing head re straints


The backrest on the appropriate side has to be
tipped forwards slightly in order to remove
the head restraint.
... Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool
kit c:> page 236 .
Fig. 72 Front seat: Adjusting standard head restraint ... Release the backrest c:> page 73.
... Press button @ c:> Fig. 73 and slide tihe head
Applies to vehicles with super sports seats restraint upwards as far as the stop<=:? ,&..
(not illustrated): The head restra int is integra- ... Insert the screwdriver in the opening @ ,
ted in the backrest and cannot be adjusted. press button @ and at the same time pull
the head restraint out of the backrest c:> ,&..
Adjusting standard head restraint
.,. Push the backrest up until it engages se-
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of curely ~ &. in Extending the luggage com-
the head restraint is level with the top of your partment on page 73. ..,.
head. If this is not possible, t ry to adjust the
Seats and storage 69

Installing head restrai nts


A WARNING
-
The backrest on the appropriate side has to be Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as
tipped forwards slightly in order to install the
this could cause a fire .
outer head restraints .
.. Release the backrest c) page 73. Cigarette lighter
.. Push the posts of the head restraint into the Applies to vehicles: with cigarette lighter
guides until you feel them click into place. It
should no longer be possible to pull the
head restraint out of the backrest.
.. Push the backrest up until it engages se-
curely c) ,& in Extending the luggage com-
partment on page 73 .

A WARNING
-
- Please observe the important safety
warnings ~page 156, Correct adjust- Fig. 75 Ce ntre console: Cigarette lighter
ment of head restraints.
- Remove the rear head restraints only if .. Press in the cigarette lighter.
this is necessary in order to attach a child .. When the cigarette lighter springs out, pull
seat c) page 158. I nstall the head re- it out completely.
straint again immediately after removing The cigarette lighter should only be used as a
the child seat. Travelling with the head power source in exceptional circumstances,
restraints removed or not raised increa- e.g. for the compressor of the tyre repair kit.
ses the risk of severe injuries.
A WARNING
Ashtray The cigarette lighter only works when the
Applies to vehicles. with ashtray ignition is on. Improper use can cause seri-
ous injury or start a fire. To avoid the risk
of injury, never leave children unsuper-
vised in the vehicle with the key.

CD CAUTION
- Always use the correct type of plugs to
avoid damaging the sockets.
- The cigarette lighter socket shou ld only
be used for a short period of time as a
Fig. 74 Front centre console: Ashtray
power source for electrical equipment.
Please use the electrical sockets* in the
The ashtray is inserted in the centre console
and can be placed on either the driver's or vehicle when connecting equipment for
front passenger's side. Lift the lid to open the longer periods.
ashtray. Always put the ashtray safely back in
1 Note
to the holder after removing it (e.g. after
emptying it). Using electrical appliances with the engine
switched off will drain the battery.
70 Seats and storage

Electrical socket (D Note


Applies to vehicles: with e lectrical socket
Using electrica l appliances with the engine
Electrical equipment can be connected to the switched off will drain the battery.
12 Volt socket.
Storage
:,.
----
--- ---
~ -1~ -
' '
- -
Cup holders
I I

Fig. 76 Centre console: 12 Volt socket (front/rear)

Fig. 78 Centre console: Front cup holders

Fig. 77 Side trim in luggage compartment: 12 Volt


socket (example)

... Pull the dummy plug out of the socket on


Fig. 79 Detail of the rear seat bench: Rear cup holder*
the centre console Fig . 76, or
... Open the cover of the socket in the luggage Front cup holder
compartment* Fig. 77.
Place your drinks in the holder Fig. 78.
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance in-
Two drinks can be placed in this cup holder.
to the socket.
You can also stow larger plastic bottles or
Electrical equipment can be connected to the similar in the compartments in the door
12 Volt socket. The appliances connected to trim.
the socket must not exceed a power rating of
Rear cup holder*
120W.
... To open t he cup holder, lightly press the
A WARNING front of the cup holder Fig. 79 .
The socket will only work when the ignition ... To place a cup in the cup holder, swivel ei-
is switched on. Improper use can cause se- ther of the arms @ outwards.
rious injury or start a fi re. To avoid the risk Then press the arm t ight against the cup.
of injury, never leave children unsuper- To close the cup holder, slide it all the way
vised in the vehicle with the key. back into the s lot. ..,.

CD CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to
avoid damagihg the sockets.
Sea t s and s torage 71

.&.. WARNING -
Glove box

- Do not put any hot drinks in the cup


holders while the vehicle is moving. You
could be scalded ifthe hot liquid is spilt.
- Do not use hard china cups or glasses.
These could cause injury in the event of
an accident.

0 CAUTION
You should avoid putting open drinks con- Fig. 81 Glove box
tainers in the cup holders. The drinks could
otherwise spill over and cause damage to Opening/closing
e.g. the electrical equipment or the seat
"" To open the g love box, pull the handle in the
covers.
direction of the arrow.
"" To close the glove box, swivel the lid up-
@ Note
wa rds unti l it engages.
Further cup holders are located on either
side of the rear seats. .&.. WARNING -
To avoid t he risk of injuries, always keep
Carrier for car key and mobile phone the glove box lid closed when driving.
Applies to vehicles: with carrier

Further storage compartments

You wi ll find further storage compartments


and retainers at various points in the vehicle:
- In the top section of the glove box.
- In t he centre console below the centre arm-
rest*.
- At the front end of the right front s eat. This
Fig. 80 Fron t centre console: Carrier compartment can hold objects weighing up
to 1 kg .
The carrier is suitable for stowing the follow- - Coat hooks on the B-pillars ~ .&..
ing items:
- Car key while you are driving (on vehicles
A WARNING
-
with convenience key*) - Make sure that any items of clothing
- Mobile phone hanging from the coat hooks do not ob-
struct your view to the rear.
The carrier is inserted in the centre console - Only use the coat hooks for light items of
and can be placed on e ither the driver's or clothing and make sure that there are no
front passenger's side. Always put the carrier heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.
safely back into the holder after removing it.
- Do not use clothes hangers to hang up
the clothing, as this could interfere with
the function of the head-protection air-
bags.
72 Seats and storage

Roof carrier the rear attachment points are marked


by arrows on the top edge of the side win-
dow @ ~ Fig. 82.
- Applies to A3 Sportback and A3 Saloon
(without roof railings): The front andl rear at-
tachment points @ and are only visible
when the doors are open @ ~ Fig. 82.
- Applies to A3 Sportback (with roof railings):
The attachment points are visible on the in-
side face of the roof railings Q Fig. 83.
- The maximum permissible roof load for your
vehicle is 75 kg. The load limit applies to the
combined weight of the roof carrier, the ad-
ditional elements and the load itself. Please
do not exceed the maximum carrying load of
the carrier system you are using. For details
of the maximum axle loads and maximum
gross vehicle weight, refer to ~ page 273.

_& WARNING
Fig. 82 1) A3 , 2) A3 Sa loon and A3 Sportback (without
roof railings) : Attachment points for roof carrier - Note the fitting instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the roof carrier sys-
tem. If you do not secure the roof carrier
system and roof load correctly, they can
become separated from the vehicle and
cause an accident.
- The use of a roof carrier system affects
the vehicle's handling by sh ifting the
centre of gravity and increasing suscepti-
bility to cross winds - risk of accident!
Fig. 83 A3 Sportback with roof railings: Attachment Take extra care when driving and adjust
points for roof ca rrier
your speed accordingly.

Note the following points if you intend to car-


ry loads on the roof:
CD CAUTION
Please take care that the boot lid and pan-
- Only use roof carrier cross bars designed for orama sun roof" do not come into contact
your vehicle. The cross bars form the basic with the roof load when opened.
elements of a complete roof carrier system.
Additional elements/carrier systems are @ For the sake of the environment
needed in order to transport luggage and
The increased air resistance means that
sports equipment. We recommend using
the vehicle uses more fuel. For this reason
roof carriers and additional elements from
you should always take off the roof carrier
the range of Audi Genuine Accessories.
when it is not in use.
- The feet of the roof carrier cross bars must
be attached at the points provided on the
roof ~ Fig. 82 I ~ Fig. 83.
- Applies to A3: The front attachment points
@ are only visible when the doors are open;
Seats and storage 73

Luggage compartment Extending the luggage compartment

General notes The backrests con be folded down separately


or together.
&. WARNING -
The Safe driving chapter c:> page 152,
Safety first contains important informa-
tion, tips, suggestions and warnings that
you should read and observe for your own
safety and the safety of your passengers.

Luggage compartment cover


Applies to vehicles: with luggage compartment cover
Fig. 85 Backrest: Release lever (example of left s ide)
The luggage compartment cover blocks the
view into the luggage comportment. Folding down backrest
Slide the head restraint(s) downwards
~ page 68.
Press the release lever @ in the direction in-
dicated (arrow) .
Fold down the backrest.

Returning backrest to an upright position


Push the backrest up until it engages se-
curely ~ ,&.. The red marking on the tab
Fig. 84 Open boot lid with luggage compartment cov should no longer be visible when the back-
er rest is properly secured.

Removing
&_ WARNING
Detach the cords and pull the cover - Make sure that the rear backrest is se-
out of the retainers @ in the direction of the curely locked in position so that the seat
arrows. belt can provide proper protection on the
Installing centre rear seat.
- The rear backrest must always be secure-
Pus h the cover @ horizontally into the re-
ly latched so that objects stored In the
tainers @ on the s ide trim until it engages.
luggage compartment will not fly for-
Attach the cords to the boot lid (!) ~ ,&..
ward during sudden braking.

&. WARNING - CD CAUTION


- The luggage compartment cover must - If you need to adjust the front seats
always be fixed properly (risk of acci- when either of the rear backrests is fol-
dent). ded forwards, please take care to avoid
- The luggage compartment cover should damaging the rear head restraints. If
not be used as a storage shelf. Items necessary, remove the appropriate head
placed on this cover could cause injury in restraints before you slide back the front
an accident or if the brakes are applied seats.
suddenly. -When returning the backrest to an up-
right position, make sure that the seat
74 Seats and s torage

belts for the outer rear seats are not .. Please refer to the safety notes
caught up and damaged in t he catches c::> page 163.
for the backrest.
Stretch net I storage net
Lowering the floor panel Applies to vehicles: with stretch net/storage net
Applies to vehicles: with lowerable floor panel
The stretch net can be used to secure and
You can lower the floor panel to increase the hol d light items in the luggage compartment.
loading height in the luggage compartment.

Fig. 88 Luggage compartment: Stretch net attached


Fig. 86 Luggage compartment: Floor panel lowered (e>eample)

Depending on the equipment fitt ed on your


vehicle, it may be possible to insert the floo r
panel lower down .

.. To lower the floor panel, first lift it.


.. Then pull the floo r panel back slightly and
re-insert it lower down at position @ .
When you no longer need the extra height,
you should return the floor panel to posi- Fig . 89 Luggage compartment: Storage net hooked in
tion @ ; this will make it easier to load and un- place (A3/A3 Sportbaclc)

load normal items of luggage.


Stretch net

Fastening rings .. To secure t he stret ch net, insert first the


Applies Lo vehicles: with fastening ri ngs fro nt hooks and then t he rear hooks ,of t he
stretch net into t he fasteni ng rings -arrows-
Fig. 88.

Storage net
Applies t o A3/A3 Sportback
.. To secure the storage net, insert t he t wo
hooks into the fastening rings @ and attach
the loops @ to the retaining hooks*

Fig. 87 Luggage compartment: Location of fastening


rings (example)
_8 WARNING
The storage net will hold a maximum
.. Use the fastening rings to secure the load weight of S kg. Heavier objects cannot be
-arrows-. safely secured - risk of injury.
Seats and storage 75

Retaining hook load-through hatch with bag


Applies to vehicles: with retaining hooks Applies to vehicles: with loadthrough hatch and remova
ble bag

The bag con be used to transport long items


(such as skis or snowboards) .

Fig. 90 Luggage compartment: Retaining hook (exam



ple of right side)

You can use the hooks to secure light items of Fig. 92 Backrest: Cover of load through hatch
luggage, such as shopping bags, etc .

..&. WARNING
The retaining hooks must only be used for
light items. Heavier objects cannot be
safely secured (injury risk).

Reversible floor covering


Applies to vehicles: with reversible floor covering

The reversible floor covering protects the lug-


gage compartment and the bumper against Loading
dirt and scratches.
.. Fold down the centre armrest in the rear
seat.
.. Fold down the cover of the load-through
hatch Fig. 92 .
.. Push the bag (with the zip pointing towards
the rear of the vehicle) through the hatch
from the luggage compartment into t he
passenger compartment Q ,&..

Securing the bag


Fig. 91 luggage compartment: Reversible floor cover
.. Insert the fastening belt @ of the bag into
ing with backrest folded down (example)
the centre seat belt buckle @ Q Fig. 93 .
You can use either the dirt-resistant or the .. Tighten the fastening belt @ .
decorative side of the reversible floor cover-
ing. When you are finished loading or unload- &
~
WARNING
- I
ing, fold the end of the reversible floor cover- - The bag must be secured in place with
ing back in and close the boot lid. Fold away the fastening belt after it has been loa-
the reversible floor covering only when it is ded. ~
dry.
76 Seats and storage

- Make sure that all objects transported in


the load-through hatch are secured. They
can be catapu lted through the passenger
compartment in case of a sudden brak-
ing manoeuvre - risk of injury!

(j) Note
- Fold up the bag only when it is dry.
- If you are transporting skis or snow-
boards, pull the fastening belt tight be-
tween the bindings.
- Place skis in the bag with their tips fac-
ing forwards, snowboards and ski poles
with their tips facing backwards.
Heating and c ooling 77

Heating and cooling you wish t o save fue l. This will a lso red uce
e m issions. The LED in the button will go
Heating system I air out when the air conditioner is switched
conditioner off. The efficiency programme (on vehicles
with driver information system) shows
Description how your fuel consumption is being affec-
One of the following systems may be fitted in ted by auxiliary equ ipment. In addition, it
your vehicle: provides tips for improving fuel economy
~ page 31.
- Heating and venti lation system or
- Manual air conditioner* or @ Note
- Automatic air conditioner - Keep the air intake s lots in front of t he
The heating and ventilation system heats w indscreen clear of snow, ice and leaves
and ventilates the vehicle interior. The manual to ensure unimpaired heating and cool-
or automatic ai r conditioner* cools and dehu- ing, and to prevent the windows misting
midifies the a ir inside the vehicle. It operates over.
most effectively with the windows and the - Condensation can drip off the air cooling
panorama sun roof* closed. If the vehicle has sys tem* and form a pool underneath the
been standing in the sun, it may cool down vehicle. This is normal and does not indi-
faster If you open the windows briefly to Let cate a leak.
the hot air escape. - If you notice, for instance, that the seat*
or rear window heating is not working, it
The pollution filter removes impu rities, such
may have been temporarily switched off
as dust and pollen, from the air.
by the power management function.
These systems will be available again as
@ For the sake of the environment
soon as sufficient electrical power is
Switch off the cooling mode on the a ir con- available.
ditioner* by pressing the IAICI button if

Controls for heating/ ventilation system or manual air conditioner


Applies to vehicles: with heating/ventilation system or manual air conditioner

Fig. 94 Hea tlng/ventllatl on system or manual air condit ioner* : Controls

The rotary controls and switches are used to spending button lights up when the function
control the functions. The LED in the corre- is switched on. ..,..
78 Heating and cooling

The rear window heating ~ c) page 81 and Adjusting air distribution and air outlets
seat heating Q] c) page 81 are described in The rotary control with symbols ~.~], [;!I and
separate sections of this manual. ~ i s used to adjust the a ir distribution. A set-
Manual air conditioner* t ing between ~ and ~ usually provides a
comfortable environment.
For a comfortable climate inside the vehicle:
At the ~ setting, the windscreen and side
- In the summer, adjust the temperature to windows are defrosted or demisted as quickly
just a few degrees below the outside tem- as possible. The air recirculation is switched
perature off, but can be switched on again manually by
- Do not turn the blower up too high pressing the ~ button.
- Do not point the air outlets directly at the
occupants The round air outlets in the dashboard can be
adjusted page 81.
- Use the "indirect" setting on the air outlets
c> page 78 To prevent the front s ide windows from mist-
ing up in wet weather, we recommend open-
Key-coded settings
ing t he side a ir outlets, pointing them to the
Certain settings will be automatically stored side and selecting the "spot" setting
and assigned to the remote control key in use. page 81.
- Heating and venti lation system : Seat heat- Foot-level air outlets are provided underneath
ing (driver's side) the front seats to heat the rear cabin.
- Manual air conditioner: Seat heating (driv-
er's side), IA1cl button. ~ Switching air recirculation on/ off

In air recirculation mode, the air from the in-


IA!cl Switching air cooling* on/ off terior of the vehicle is filtered and reci rcula-
The air cooling system only works when the ted . This setting prevents fumes etc. from en-
blower is switched on . When the air cooling is tering the interior. We recommend switching
switched off, the air is neither cooled nor de- on the air recirculation mode when driving
humidified. The windows may mist up as a re- through a tunnel or in traffic queues c:> .&.
sult. The air cooling ls switched off automati-
The air recirculation mode is switched off
cally at low outside temperatures (below
when the control is in the defrost posi tion ~-
zero).

~ Adjusting the blower speed & WARNING


You shou ld leave the blower on at a low set- For reasons of safety you should not leave
ting to prevent the w indows from misting up. t he air recirculation switched on for too
To demist the windows, we recommend that long. This mode prevents fresh air from
you increase the blower speed and set the entering the vehicle, so the windows can
control to ~- mist over ifthe air cooling* is switched off.
Bad visibility can cause an accident.
I tel Selecting the temperature
The rotary control can be used to adjust the
temperature in sma LL steps.
Heating and cooling 79

Controls for automatic air conditioner


Applies to vehicles: with au tomatic air conditioner

Fig. 95 Automatic air condition er: Controls

The rota ry controls a re used t o adjust the Ing Is switched off, the air is neit her cooled
t emperature and blower s peed . The function s nor dehumidified. The windows may mist up
can be switched on and off by pressing the as a result. The air cooling is switched off au-
buttons. The LED in the corresponding button tomatically at low outside temperatures (be-
lights up when the function is switched on . low zero).
The rear window heating ~ page 81 and IAUT ol Switching automatic mode on/ off
seat heating ~ page 81 are described in
The automatic mode is switched on when the
separate sections of this manual.
IAUT OI button is pressed. The AUTO mode is
Automatic air conditioner switched off immediately when you operate
any of the manual air controls. The automatic
We recommend pressing the IAUTOI button
mod,e ma intains a constant temperature in-
and setting the te mpe rature t o 22 ( (72 F).
s ide t he veh icle. Air temperature, output and
The air conditioner is fully automatic, a nd will
distribution are regulated automatically. The
maintain the desired t emperatu re at a con-
"eco" modell is activated if you press the
stant level. The temperature of the air sup-
IAUTOI button briefly while automatic mode is
plied to the interior, the blower speed and the
active. Fuel is saved in "eco" mode* because
air distribution are regulated a utomatica lly.
the settings respond more passively. The
When the heater is on, the blower normally
"eco" mode* is on when eco appears in the
only switches to a higher speed once the cool-
console display. The "eco" mode* is deactiva-
a nt has warmed up sufficient ly (this does not
ted when you press the IAU TOI button agai n.
apply to the defrost setting). Key-coded set
tings: The automatic air conditioner settings fi7*l Selecting the temperature
are automatically stored and assigned to the
The tem peratu re sett ing can be controlled in-
remote control key which is being used .
dividually via the controls for the driver's and
IA / Cl Switching air cooling on/ off front: passenger's s ide. The temperature can
be adjusted between +16 C (+60 F) and
The air cooling mode is switched on/off when
+28 C (+84 F). Outs ide this range, LO or HI
the IA!CI button is pressed . When the air cool-
will appear on the a ir conditioner display. In ..,.

ll This function Is not ava ilable on all export ve rs ions.


80 Heating and cooling

the two extreme settings the air conditioner [:;;] Switching air recirculation on/ off
operates continuously with maximum cooling The air recirculation mode can be switched on
or heating output, and the temperature is not manually or automatically*.
regulated automatically.
- To switch the manual air recirculation mode
Synchro nisat ion: By pressing the IAUTO I but- on/off, press the ~ button. The LED is lit
ton for 2 seconds, the temperature of the pas- when the function is on .
senger's side can be set to the temperature of - The automatic* air recirculation function
the driver's side. The settings remain must be activated on the MMI. Select:
synchronised until the temperature is I MENU I button> control button Systems I
changed on the passenger's side. Car systems > A/ C > Auto recirculation. The
~ Adj u sting the blower s peed air quality sensor, which is designed for the
detection of diesel and petrol exhaust
You should leave the blower on at a low set-
fumes, automatically switches the air recir-
ting to prevent the windows from misting up.
culation mode on or off depending on the
You can adjust the blower speed manually.
level of pollution in the outside a ir.
Press the IAUTOI bu t ton for automatic control
of the blower speed. In air recirculation mode, the air from the in-
terior of the vehicle is filtered and reci rcula-
Adjusting the air distribution ted. This setting prevents fumes etc. from en-
tering the interior. We recommend switching
Buttons ffil. [ill and ~ are used to adjust the
on the air recirculation mode when driving
air distribution . Press the IAUTOI button for
through a tunnel or in traffic queues ~ .&. .
automatic air distribution.
The air recirculation mode is switched off
The round air outlets in the dashboard can be
when the ~ or IAUTO I or ~ button is press-
adjusted ~ page 81.
ed.
To prevent the front side windows from mist-
If the engine is cold, the air conditioner will
ing up in wet weather, we recommend open-
automatically switch to air recirculation mode
ing the side air outlets, pointing them to the
when the vehicle is reversing.
side and selecting the "spot" setting
~ page 81.
.&. WARNING
Foot-level air outlets underneath the front For reasons of safety you should not leave
seats and adjustable air outlets at the end of the air recirculation switched on for too
the centre console are provided to heat the long. This mode prevents fresh air from
rear cabin. entering the vehicle, so the windows can
mist over if the air cooling is switched off.
I@ MAXI Switching the defroster on/off
Bad visibility can cause an accident.
The windscreen and side windows are defros-
ted or demisted as quickly as possible . The air
output is increased to maximum and most of
the air comes out of the outlets below the
windscreen. The air recirculation mode is de-
activated. The temperature is regulated auto-
matically. At setting ~ the IA!cl cooling mode
is automatically activated depending on the
ambient temperatu re .
The defroster is switched off when the IAUTO I
button is pressed.
Heating and c ooling 81

Adjusting air outlets Rear window heating

The LED in the ~ button (manua l air condi-


tioner c:> page 77, Fig . 94, automatic air con-
ditioner c:> page 79, Fig. 95) Is lit If the func-
tion is switched on. If rear window heating is
activated with the ignition switched on, the
battery management determines whether or
not the battery charge level is sufficient for
the rear window heating to be switched on.
Otherwise the rear window heating operates
when the eng ine is running, and switches off
automatically after about 10 - 20 minutes,
depending on the outside temperature.
To switch on the rear window heating perma-
nently, press and hold the ~ button (with the
ins cription REAR*) for at least two seconds.
This setting will be stored for approximately
15 minutes after the ignition is switched off.

Fig. 97 Air outlet: Adjusting air f low character. A) Dif- Seat heating
fuse. B) Spot
Appli es to vehicles: with seat heating

The following settings are possible c:> Fig. 96: The seat heating has three levels. The heat
level is indicated by an LED in each of the but-
- CD Air flow intensity
tons (heating system/manual ai r cond it ioner
- @ Air flow direction
c:> page 77, Fig . 94), (automatic air condition-
- @ Air flow character (comfortable or vigo-
er r:') page 79, Fig. 95) .
ro us)
.. To switch on the seat heating, press the
To adjust the air flow intens ity, turn the rib-
Q] button once.
bed outer adjustment ring CD c:> Fig. 96. To
.. To reduce the level, press the Q] button
shut off the air flow, turn the adjustment ring
again.
all the way to the right.
.. To switch off the seat heating, press the
To adjust the air flow direction, move the in- Q] button repeatedly unti l all the LEDs have
side grille @ in the air outlet. gone out.
To adjust the air flow character, pull/push the The seat heating automatically switches from
centre adjustment ring @ c:> Fig. 96: level 3 to level 2 after about 10 minutes.
- Diffuse air flow set ting (indirect/comforta-
When not to switch on the s eat heating
ble @ ): Press the centre adjustment ring
s lightly inwards c:> Fig. 97. Do not switch on the seat heating in the fo l-
- Spot a ir flow setting (d irect/vigorous @ ): lowing situations:
Pull the centre adjustment ring slightly out- - Seat is unused
wards c:> Fig. 97. - A protective cover is fitted on the seat
- A child seat is fitted on the seat
- The seat is damp or wet
82 Heating and cooling

.&. WARNING There are two ways to control the system:

People with limited capacity to feel pain or Switching on/off manually - You can switch
sense temperature could burn themselves the auxiliary heating/ventilation on and off
when using the seat heating. These people immediately either:
must not use the seat heating - risk of in- - via the MMI* Q page 83, or
jury! - using the remote control c:) page 84, or
- using the steering wheel button @
CD CAUTION page 30, Fig. 15 c:) page 30, Assigning a
To avoid damaging the heating elements function to the steering wheel button on
of the seat heating, please do not kneel on vehicles with multi-function steering wheel
the seat or apply s.harp pressure at a single - The auxiliary heating/ventilation is switched
point. off when the blower ~ is switched off via
the A/C controls Q page 79, Fig. 95.
@ Note
Eit her the auxiliary heating or the auxiliary
- The setting for the driver's seat heating ventilation will be switched on, depending on
is assigned to the key in use. the ambient temperature and the tern pera-
- If the front passenger's seat heating was tu re you have selected .
on when you last switched off the igni-
tion, it will be switched on automatically Switching on/off automatically (setting the
only if the ignition is switched on again timer) - You can use the timer to specify the
within 10 minutes. t ime of day at which the temperature inside
the vehicle is to reach the desired level. Your
temperature setting and the ambient t emper-
Supplementary h,e ater
ature will then determine when the auxiliary
Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine
heating or auxiliary ventilation is switched on .
On cold days, the int erior of the vehicle warms You can set three different timers
up more quickly with the supplementary elec- Q page 83 using the MMI* or one timer us-

tric heater. The supplementary heater is ing the remote control Q page 84.
switched on automatically as required, de-
Driver messages on the display
pending on the setting on the veh icle heating
system. ill Auxiliary heating/ventilation : currently
unavailable. Battery voltage too low.
Applies to vehicles with MMI*: The "supple-
mentary heater" function can be switched on/ If this message appears, the battery is not
off. Select: IMENU I button> control button sufficiently charged. In this case, the engine
Systems I Car systems > A/C > Supplementa- must be switched on in order to use the auxili-
ry heater. ary heating.

l!! Auxiliary heating/ventilation: currently


Auxiliary heating/ unavailable. Not enough fuel.
ventilation To conserve fuel, the auxiliary heating cannot
Description be switched on if the fuel level is low.
Applies to vehicles: with auxiliary heatin g/ve ntilation
ill Auxiliary heating/ventilation: system
The auxiliary heating/ventilation system heats fault! Currently unavailable
and ventilates the interior of the vehicle and If this message appears, a system malfunc-
can be used either when the engine is off or tion has occurred . Drive to a qualified work-
when driving (for instance while the engine is shop soon and have the fault rectified . II>
warming up).
Heating and cooling 83

A WARNING
auxiliary heating and turn the rotary push-
button to select the desired running time.
- The auxiliary heating must not be al- .. To switch off the auxiliary heating/ventila-
lowed to run when the vehicle is in a con- tion, select: IMENU I button > Systems I Car
fined space because it can give off toxic systems > Auxiliary heating > Switch off
fumes. auxiliary heating. Or:
- To avoid any possi b le fire risk, never have .. Switch off the blower ~ on the air condi-
t he auxiliary heating switched on when tioner or heater control console c:> page 77,
refuelling the vehicle. Fig. 94 or c:> page 79, Fig. 95.
- Because of the high temperatures which
occur when t he auxiliary heating is run- The HI symbol flashes on the air conditioner
ning, make sure when parking t he car console when the auxiliary heating is switched
that the exhaust outlet under the car is on. The air conditioner console is illuminated
not obstructed in any way and that the when the auxiliary ventilation is switched on.
exhaust gases do not come into contact
with flammable materials (fire risk).
The auxilia ry heating/vent ilation can be
(0 Note switched on/off immediately even if a t im-
- The auxiliary heating/ventilation system er has been programmed.
heats/cools the interior to the tempera-
ture you last selected on the ai r cond i- Setting a timer via MMI*
tioner c:> page 79. Applies to vehicles with auxiliary heating/ventilation
- At low outside temperatures some visi-
Hdndbcd: I
ble water vapour may form in the engine
Auxiliary heating
compartment. This is a normal phenom-
Switch on auxiliary heating Status
enon, and no cause for concern.
Timer 1: Mo 01.01. 9:10 ~ not
- The auxiliary heating/ventilation will not
Timer 2 Mo 21.10 9: 11 active
switch on or will switch itself off earlier
Timer 3: Mo 20.06 10: 12
than intended if the battery charge or
fuel level is low.
Program timers
Car syste'lls

Switching on/off immediately via MMI* Fi g. 9 9 MMI: Setting a timer


Applies to vehicles; with auxlhary heating/ventilation
Set the departure time in the timer. The vehi-
cle will be heat ed (in cold weather) or venti la-
ted (i n hot weather) so that the desired interi-
or temperature is reached by t he time speci-
fied in this setting.

Setting the heating effect


.. If you want the auxiliary heating to defrost
the windows, select: IMENU Jbutton> Sys-
tems I Car systems > Auxiliary heating >
Fi g. 98 MM!: Switching auxiliary heating on/off imme-
diately
Program timers > Heating effect > defrost.
.. If you want the auxiliary heating to defrost
.. To switch on the auxiliary heating/ventila- the windows and heat the vehicle, select:
tion, select: IMENU I button> Systems I Car I MENU I button > Systems I Car systems > ~
systems > Auxiliary heating > Switch on
84 Heating and cooling

Auxilia ry heating > Program timers Using the remote control to set the
Heating effect > warm. auxiliary heating
Applies to vehicles: with auxiliary heat1ng/vent1lat1on
Setting the timers
Select: IMENUI button> Systems I Car sys-
tems > Auxiliary heating > Program timers
>e.g. Timer 1: departure .
Set the time and d ate.
To activate the timer, press the IBACKI but-
ton to go back one level.
Use the rotary pushbutton to confirm the
setting and activa t e the timer. A./ will ap-
pear in the box on the right <::) Fig . 99. Fig. 100 Remote control for auxiliary heating:
switchin g on lmmedlately @ settlng the timer
The departure time specifies when the vehicle
interior is to reach the desired temperature. Selecting a menu
The auxiliary heating/ventilation switches off
Press the ~ button on the remote control.
automatically about 10 minutes later.
You will see the symbols Ill and~ on the
After the departure time expires, the next cal- left side of the display. The arrow points to
endar date is automatically entered on the the selected menu. To change menus, press
MMI. To activate the auxiliary heating/ventila- the ~ button again.
tion for the following day, you then only have
Switching on immediately
to confirm the setting (by setting a ./on the
MMI <::) Fig. 99). Select the Ill menu (!) Q Fig. 100.
To increase/reduce the running time, press
i Note t he 0 or 8J button.
- To ensure that the timer operates cor- To confirm the running time, press the loKI
rectly, check that the correct time and button. The Tsymbol will flash while the da-
date are entered in the MMI settings. ta are being transmitted to the vehicle.
Please refer to the operating manual for When the data have been successfully trans-
your MM! system for details of how to mitted and the auxiliary heating/ventilation
set the date and time. has been switched on, the time setting and
- The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be the ill symbol will appear. The remote con-
switched on/off ummediately even if a trol switches off automatically after a few
timer has been programmed. This has no seconds.
effect on the programmed timer setting Setting the timer
as long as the auxiliary heating/ventila-
tion is not switched off manually during Select the menu @ .
the programmed period. Enter the hour, minutes and date, one after
the other. Confirm each entry with the !OKI
button. When you confirm the last ent ry,
the Tsymbol will flash and the data will be
transmitted to the vehicle.
When the data have been successfully trans-
mitted, the time setting and the 0 symbol
will appear. The remote control switches off
automatically after a few seconds. ~
Heating and cooling 85

Checking I clearing the settings "' Press the release button on the battery
carrier and pull out the battery carrier in the
"' To check the settings, press the ~ button.
"' To clear the settings, confirm the query Ill direction of the arrow.
OFF? or~ OFF? with the loKI button. "' Insert the new battery with the G symbol
facing downwards. The new battery must be
The timer settings entered on the remote con- of the same type as the original one
trol are displayed as Timer 1 on the MMI. (CR 2430).
"' Slide the battery carrier carefully into the re-
The range of the remote control transmitter is
mote control and refit the cover.
about 600 metres; however this can be great-
ly reduced by obstacles (buildings, etc.) be-
tween the remote control transmitter and the
@ For the sake of the environment
vehicle. Used batteries must be disposed of appro-
priately and must not be discarded with
Fault warnings ordinary household waste.
If any of the following symbols appear when
you switch on the remote control, the remote
control cannot be used to switch on the auxili-
ary heating:

There is a system fault in the auxiliary


,....c -
heating.
BU - The auxiliary heating cannot be switched
on because there is not enough fuel in the
tank.

ea -The auxiliary heating cannot be switched


on because the vehicle battery charge is too
low.
)( - The vehicle could not receive the trans-
mitted data.

Changing the remote control battery


Applies to vehicles: with auxiliary heating/ventilation

Fig. 101 Remote control: Changing battery

"' Press the release button @ and pull the cov-


er in the direction of the arrow.
86 Driving

Driving Vehicles with ignition


Steering Lock
Starting the engine with the key
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Applies to vehicles. with mechanical 1gnit1on lock
The height and reach of the steering wheel Insert the key in the ignition lock to switch on
con be adjusted as required to suit the driver. the ignition and start the engine.

Fig. 102 Steering column: Lever for steering column


Fig. 103 Ignition key positions
adjustment

Steering lock
... Push the lever ~ Fig. 102 down ,&..
... Move the steering wheel to the desired posi- If the steering wheel cannot be turned, the
tion . steering lock has engaged.
... Then push the lever towards the steering
Important: The selector lever (automatic
column until the catch engages. gearbox*) must be in position Pin order to
lock the steering.
A WARNING
... To lock the steering, turn the steering wheel
- Never adjust the position of the steering
with the ignition key removed until the
wheel when the vehicle is moving - this
steering lock engages.
could cause an accident.
... To release the steering lock, insert the igni-
- Press the lever upwards so it is secure
tion key in the lock and turn the key in the
and so that the position of the steering
direction of the -arrow while simultaneous-
wheel cannot shift unexpectedly while
ly turning the steering wheel.
the vehicle is moving risk of accident!
Switching the ignition on/off and
preheating the glow plugs
Ignition Lock
To switch on the ignition, turn the ignition
Depending on the model, your vehicle is key to position @ .
equipped with the following: To switch off the ignition, turn the ignition
- Mechanical ignition lock page 86 or key to position @.
- Convenience key Q page 88 Diesel engines are preheated when the igni-
tion is switched on ll.
Starting the engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
start function . As soon as you turn the igni
tion key briefly to position @ , the engine
starts automatically. ..,.
Driving 87

~ Manual gearbox: Press the clut ch pedal all


the way down and move the gear lever into
A WARNING
neutral. - Never run the engine in confined spaces.
~ Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal The exhaust gases are toxic.
and move the selector lever to position P or - Never remove the key from the ignition
N. while the vehicle is moving. The steering
~ Turn the ignition key briefly to position @ . lock would engage, and you would not be
The ignition key automatically returns to po- able to steef the car - risk of accident !
sition @ . Do not press the accelerator. - Always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle. This is especially im-
Electrical components with a high power con-
portant if children are left in the car.
sumption are switched off temporarily while
They might otherwise be able to start
you start the engine.
the engine or use power-operated equip-
Diesel eng ines can take a few seconds longer ment such as the electric windows - t his
than usual to start on cold days. Please keep could lead to injuries.
your foot on the clutch pedal (manual gear- - Never leave children or disabled people
box) or brake pedal (automatic gearbox) until a lone in the car. The doors cou ld be
the eng ine starts. The indicator Lamp II Locked with the remote control key and
lights up while the glow plugs are preheating . t he occupants cou ld become trapped in
the vehicle. The vehicle occupants could
The preheating time depends on the outside
be exposed to extremely high or low
temperature and the temperature of the cool-
temperatures, depending on the time of
ant. When the engine is warm, or at outside
year.
temperatures above +8C, the glow plug ind i-
cator lamp II will come on for approximately
CD CAUTION
one second. This means that the engine can
be started immediately. Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and
extreme load conditions until t he engine
If the engine fails to start immediately, switch has reached its normal operating tempera-
off the starter and try again after about ture, otherwise this can damage the en-
30 seconds. To start the engine again, turn gine.
the ignition key to position @ .

Start/stop syste m*
@ For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the eng ine by running it
Please note the information on ~ page 98,
with the car st ationary. You should drive
Start/stop system.
off immediately whenever possible. Thi is
Automatic start function fault will help avoid unnecessary exhaust emis-
sions.
If the indicator Lamp Im (petrol engine) or II
(diesel engine) lights up in conjunction with a (!) Note
fault when starting the engine, there is a fault
in the automatic start function. - If it is difficult to turn the ignition key to
position @ , move the steering wheel (to
To start the engine, turn the ignition key to take the load off the steering lock mech-
position @ and hold it in this position until anism) until the key turns freely.
the engine is running. - When starting from cold the engine may
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have be a little noisy for the first few seconds
the fault rectified . until oil pressure has built up in the hy-
draulic tappets. This is quite normal and
no cause for concern.
88 Driving

- If the battery has been disconnected and equipment such as the electric windows -
then reconnected it will be necessary to this could lead to injuries.
leave the key in position <D
for about 5
seconds before starting the engine.
- Vehicles with automatic gearbox: After
CD CAUTION l
If the engine has been working hard for a
switching off the ignition, you can only
long time, there is a risk of heat building
withdraw the ignition key if the selector
up in the engine compartment after the
lever is in position "P" (parking lock). The
engine has been switched off; this could
selector lever cannot be moved after the
cause engine damage. For this reason, you
ignition key has been taken out.
s hould leave the engine idling for about
2 minutes before switching it off.
Switching off the engine with the key
Applies to vehicles: with mechanical ignition lock Note
Switching off the engine - After the engine is stopped the radiator
fan may run on for up to 10 m inutes,
Stop the vehicle.
even if the ignition is switched off. The
Turn the ignition key to position @ .
fan may also start running again after
Engaging the steering lock some time if the coolant temperature
rises due to a build-up of heat, or if the
Important: The selector lever must be in posi-
engine is hot and the engine compart-
tion P (automatic gearbox").
ment is heated up further by direct sun-
Remove the ignition key while it is in posi- light.
t ion @ q page 88, Fig.104 q &,.
... Turn the steering wheel until you hear the Vehicles with
steering lock engage.
convenience key
The steering lock acts as a theft deterrent.
~iththe
~ button
A WARNING
Applies to vehicles with convenience key
- Never switch off the engine until the ve-
You con use the ISTART ENGINE STOP I button
hicle ls stationary. Otherwise you may
to switch on the ignition and start the engine.
not have the full benefit of the brake ser-
vo and power steering. You may need
more strength to steer and brake the ve-
hicle than you normally would. This
would mean a greater risk of accidents
and serious injury, because you cannot
steer and brake in the normal manner.
- Never remove the key from the ignition
while the vehicle is moving. The steering
lock could engage suddenly, and you
Fig . 104 Centre console: START ENGINE STOP button
would not be able to steer the car.
(vehicles with convenience key)
- Always take the key with you when leav-
ing the vehicle - even if you only intend You can start your vehicle without handling
to be gone for a short time. This is espe- the convenience key. You only need to have
cially important if children are left in the the key on your person.
car. They might otherwise be able to
start the engine or use power-operated
Driving 89

While you are driving, you can stow the con- one second. This means that the engine can
venience key in a special carrier* ~ page 71. be started immediately.

Switching the ignitiion on/off and If the engine fails to start immediately, switch
preheating the glow plugs off the starter and try again after about
If the indicator lamp i"t-D flashes when you 30 seconds.
switch on the ignition, the steering wheel is On vehicles with a start/stop system*, the ig-
locked. In this case, turn the steering wheel nition will be switched off if you press the
slightly to the left/rig ht. I START ENGINE STOP!* button during a stop

... Manual gearbox: To switch the ignition on/ phase .


off, press the I START ENGINE STOP ! button
Start/stop system*
without pressing the clutch pedal.
... Automatic gearbox: To switch the ignition Please note the information on ~ page 98,
on/off, press the I START ENGINE STOPI but- Start/stop system.
ton without pressing the brake pedal.
Automatic start function fault
Diesel eng ines are preheated when the igni- If the indicator lamp [3i (petrol engine) or IJ
tion is switched on m. (diesel engine) lights up in conjunction with a
Starting the engine fault when starting the engine, there is a fault
in the automatic start function.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
start function. When you press the Press and hold the I START ENGINE STOPI but-
I START ENGINE STOP ! briefly, the engine ton to start the engine.
starts automatically. Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
... Manual gearbox: Press the clutch pedal all the fault rectified .
the way down and move the gear lever into
neutral. &_ WARNING
... Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal - Never run the engine in confined spaces .
and move the selector lever to position P or The exhaust gases are toxic.
N. - Always take the key with you when leav-
... Press the l START E NGIN E STOPI button ing the vehicle - even if you only intend
briefly to start the engine. to be gone for a short time. This is espe-
cially important if children are left in the
Electrical components with a high power con-
car. They might otherwise be able to
sumption are switched off temporarily while
start the engine or use power-operated
you start the eng ine .
equipment such as the electric windows -
Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer this could lead to injuries.
than usual to start onr cold days. Please keep - Never leave children or disabled people
your foot on the clutch pedal (manual gear- a lone in the car. The doors could be
box) or brake pedal (automatic gearbox) until locked with the remote control key and
the eng ine starts. The indicator lamp IJ the occupants could become trapped in
lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. the vehicle. The vehicle occupants could
The preheating t ime depends on the outside be exposed to extremely high or low
temperature and the temperature of the cool- temperatures, depending on the time of
ant. When the engine is warm, or at outside year.
temperatures above +8C, the glow plug indi-
cator lamp m will come on for approximately
90 Driving

CD CAUTION
Steering Lockl)

The steering will be locked if you switch off


Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and
the engine with the I START E NGINE STOP I*
extreme load conditions until the engine
button, move the selector lever to position P
has reached its normal operating tempera-
(on vehicles with automatic gearbox) and
ture, otherwise this can damage the en-
open the driver's door.
gine.
The steering lock acts as a theft deterrent.
@ For the sake of the environment
Emergency Off function
Do not warm up the engine by running it
with the car stationary. You should drive If necessary in an emergency, the engine can
off immediately whenever possible. This be switched off while the vehicle is still mov-
will help avoid unnecessary exhaust emis- ing. Press the l sTART ENGINE STOPI button
sions. twice in quick succession or hold it in for lon-
ger than two seconds.
@ Note
- When starting from cold the eng ine may
& WARNING
be a little noisy for the first few seconds - Never switch off the eng ine until the ve-
until oil pressure has built up in the hy- hicle is stationary. Otherwise you may
draulic tappets. This is quite norma l and not have the full benefit of the brake ser-
no cause for concern. vo and power steering. You may need
- If the warning lamp . was flashing in more strength to steer and brake the ve-
the instrument cluster before the igni- hicle than you normally would. This
tion was switched off, it will not be pos- would mean a greater risk of accidents
sible to switch on the ignition again and serious injury, because you cannot
Q page 185. steer and brake in the normal manner.
- If you leave your vehicle with the ignition - Always take the key with you when you
switched on, it will be switched off auto- leave the vehicle. Otherwise the engine
matically after a while. Please note that can be started or power-operated equip-
electrical equipment such as the exterior ment such as the e lectric windows can be
lighting will also be switched off. used. This could result in serious injury.

~inewiththe
CD CAUTION
~ button If the engine has been working hard for a
Applies Lo vehicles : with >Conveni ence key long time, there is a risk of heat building
up ln the engine compartment after the
.,. Stop the vehicle.
engine has been switched off; this cou ld
"" Vehicles with automatic gearbox: Move the
cause eng ine damage. For this reason, you
selector lever to position P.
should leave the engine idling for about
... Press the ISTART ENGINE STOP I button
2 minutes before switching it off.
Q page 88, Fig. 104.
If you can't switch off the engine in the usual i Note
way, please refer to Q page 91, Starting the - After the engine is stopped the radiator
engine a~er a malfunction. fan may run on for up to 10 minutes,
even if the ignition is switched off. The
fan may also start running again after

ll This function ls not available on all export versions.


Driving 91

some time If the coolant temperature Driver messages


rises due to a build-up of heat, or if the
engine is hot and t he engine compart- Switch off ignition before leaving ca r. Bat -
ment is heated up further by direct sun- tery is being discharged
light. This message appears and the buzzer sounds
if you open the driver's door while the ignition
Starting the engine after a malfunction is switched on. Switch off the ignition to pre-
Applies to vehicles. with convenience key vent the battery from being discharged.
If the remote control key battery is exhausted Pressing start/stop button again will switch
or if radio interference or a system malfunc- off engine!
tion occurs, extra steps may be necessary in
Press the ISTART ENGINE STOPI* button again
order to start the engine.
so that the engine can be switched off.
Engine start system: system fault! Please
contact workshop
A fa ult has occurred when starting the eng ine
automatically (automatic start function) .
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
the fault rectified. Press and hold the
ISTART ENGINE STOPI button to start the en-
gine.
Fig. 105 Stee ri ng colum n/remote control key: Start-
ing the engine after a malfunction nJ Key not recognised . See owner's manual
Starting the engine manually This message appears if there is no conven-
ience key inside the vehicle or if the system
If the message f >)) Key not recognised . See cannot detect or identify the key. This can
owner's manual is displayed, you can still happen, for example, if the radio signal from
start the engine manually. the key is obstructed by a metal briefcase or
... Manual gearbox: Press the clutch pedal. similar, or if the key battery is weak. Electron-
... Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal ic equipment, such as mobile phones, can also
Q & in Starting the engine with the interfere with the radio signal from the key.
START ENGINE STOP button on page 89. If you encounter any problems starting or
... Press the ISTART ENGINE STOPI button. stopping the engine, please refer to "What to
... Hold the remote control key against the do if the "START ENGINE STOP" button is in-
symbol y) ~ Fig. 105, as shown in the illus- oper.ational" ~ page 91.
tration. The engine should start.
... If the engine does not start automatically, Ill Key not in vehicle?
press the I START ENGINE STOP ! button Jfthe indicator lamp Ill lights up and the
again. message appears, the convenience key was re-
moved from the vehicle while the engine was
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
running . If the convenience key is not in the
the fault rectified .
vehicle you will not be able to switch on the
i Note ignition or restart the engine after it has been
switched off. You will also not be able to lock
You can call up the driver message again
the vehicle from the outside.
by pressing the ISTART ENGINE STOP!
button. Press brake pedal
92 Driving

This message appears on vehicles with an au- Electro-mechanical


tomatic gearbox if you try to start the engine
parking brake
without first pressing the brake pedal.
Operation
Please press clutch pedal
The electro-mechanical parking broke repla-
This message appears on vehicles with a man-
ces the handbrake.
ual gearbox if you try to start the engine with-
out first pressing the clutch pedal. The engine
will only start if you press the clutch pedal.
Please engage N or P

This message will appear if you try to start or


switch off the engine when the selector lever
is not in Nor P. The eng ine can then not be
started or switched off.
Shift to P, vehicle can roll away. Doors can
Fig. 106 Centre console: Parking brake
only be locked in P

For safety reasons, this message will appear .. Pull switch @ r::!;> Fig. 106 to apply the park-
and a warning buzzer will sound if the selec- ing brake. The warning lamps . in the
tor lever of the automatic gearbox is not in switch and in the instrument cluster display
position P when you switch off the ignition will light up.
with the lSTART EN G INE STOP I* button. Put " To release the parking brake, press the brake
the selector lever in position P; otherwise the or accelerator pedal with the ignition
vehicle can roll away. If the lever is not in po- switched on and simultaneously press the
sition P you will not be able to lock the vehicle switch @ . The warning lamps . in the
using the locking sensor on the door handle or switch and on the display will go out .
the convenience key.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-me-
chanical parking brake. The parking brake re-
Kick-down feature places the conventional handbrake, and is
Applies lo vehicles. with manual gearbox and efficiency mainly intended to prevent the vehicle from
mode
rolling away accidentally.
The kick-down feature is designed to give
maximum acceleration. However, the electro-mechan ica l parking
brake also offers a number of convenience and
If you press the accele rator right down past saf ety features in addition to the functions of
the point of resistance at fu ll throttle when a normal handbrake.
the drive select* function is set to efficiency*
mode r::!;> poge 137, the engine power is auto- When driving away
matically controlled to give your vehicle maxi- - The parking brake auto release function re-
mum acceleration. leases the parking brake automatically when
you wish to start moving r::!;> page 94, Driv-
&_ WARNING ing away from a standstill.
Please note that if the road surface is slip- - When driving away on a gradient, the park-
pery or wet, the kick-down feature could ing brake auto release function prevents the
cause the driving wheels to spin, which vehicle from rolling back unintentionally.
could result in skidding . The braking force of the parking brake is on-
ly released when there is enough power at 11>
Driv ing 93

the wheels to make the vehicle move in the leased is quite normal and no cause for
desired direction . concern.
- The parking brake runs an automatic test
Emerge ncy b raking fun ction
cycle at regular intervals when the vehi-
An emergency braking function enables you to cle is parked. This may cause a slight
stop the vehicle even if the conventional foot noise, which is normal.
brake should fail to work c:> page 94, Emer- - If the warning lamp . appears, there
gency braking function. may be a parking brake malfunction
page 19.
Warning lamps
- If the electrical power supply fails, it is
- The warning lamps . on the display and in not possible to release the parking brake
the switch light up when the parking brake (if it was applied) or to apply the parking
is applied with the ignition swit ched on. bra ke (if it was released) & . You
- The warning lamps . on the display and in should obtain professio nal assistance.
the switch light up for approximately
20 seconds when the parking brake is ap- Parlking the car
plied with the ignition switched off.
... Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to
A WARNINCi a stop.
- The accelerator pedal must on no ac- ... Pull switch @ c:> page 92, Fig . 106 to apply
count be pressed inadvertently when a the parking brake.
gear is engaged and the engine is run- ... Vehicles with automatic gearbox: Move the
ning with the vehicle stationary. The ve- selector lever to position P.
hicle could otherwise start moving im- ... Switch off the engine ,&.
mediately and possibly cause an acci- ... Manual gearbox: Engage first gear.
dent. ... When parking on a hill or gradient, turn the
- It is not possible to apply the parking steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll
brake if the electrical power supply fails. into the kerb if it did start to move acciden-
In this case, park the vehicle on a level tally.
surface and select 1st gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector lever to A WARNINCi
position P (automatic gearbox) to pre- - Always take the key with you when leav-
vent it from rolling. You shou ld obtain ing your vehicle - even if you only intend
professional assistance. to be gone for a short time. This is espe-
cially important if children are left in t he
(!) Note car. They might otherwise be able to
- The parking brake can be applied at any start the engine, release the parking
time - even when t he ignition is switched brake or use power-operated equipment
off. However, the ignition must be such as the electric windows - this cou ld
switched on and t he brake pedal pressed lead to injuries.
before the parking brake can be re- - Do not leave anyone (especially children)
leased. in the vehicle when it is locked. Locked
- The parking brake is applied automati- doors could delay assistance in an emer-
cally if the driver's door is opened while gency, potentially putting lives at risk.
the ignition is on. This is to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
- Any slight noise which may be heard
when the parking brake is applied or re-
94 Driving

Driving away from a standstill Driving away when towing a trailer


The parking brake auto release function re- Please note the following points to prevent
leases the parking brake automatically when the vehicle from rolling back unintentionally
you wish to start moving. on a gradient.

Applying the parking brake when Pull and hold the switch @ q page 92,
stopping Fig. 106 and press the accelerator. Th e park-
> Pull switch @ q page 92, Fig. 106 to apply ing brake wi ll remain engaged and prevent
the parking brake. any tendency to roll back down the slope.
> You can release the switch @ as soon as the
Releasing the parking brake when driving engine is delivering enough power to the
away wheels.
Important: The driver's door must be closed
Depending on the weight of the vehicle and
and the driver's seat belt must be buckled.
trailer and the steepness of the slope, there
> Press the accelerator in the normal way: the may be a tendency to roll back downhill when
parking brake will be released automatically driving away from a standstill.
and the vehicle will start moving.

You can apply the parking brake when stop- Emergency braking function
ping at traffic lights, etc. You do not then have This feature enables you to stop the vehicle if
to hold the car with the brake pedal, as the the main brake system should fail or if the
parking brake will stop it creeping forward pedal is obstructed.
while a gear is engaged in the automatic
transmission. When you drive off in the nor- > To stop the vehicle with the parking brake in
mal way, the parking brake will be released an emergency, pull and hold the parking
automatically and the vehicle will start mov- brake switch @ q page 92, Fig. 106.
ing. > The brakes will be released immediately if
you release the switch @ or press down the
Driving away on a slope accelerator.
When driving away on a gradient, the parking
If you pull and hold the parking brake s witch
brake auto release function prevents the vehi-
@ at a road speed above about 3 km/h, this
cle from rolling back unintentionally. The
will initiate an emergency brake application.
braking force of the parking brake is only re-
The brakes are then applied hydraulicailly at all
leased when there is enough power at the
four wheels. The effect is similar to heavy
wheels to make the vehicle move in the de-
braking q .&..
sired direction.
To prevent the emergency braking function
@ Note from being used accidentally, a warning buz
For safety reasons the parking brake will zer sounds when the switch @ is pulled. The
only release automatically if the driver's brakes are released immediately when you re-
seat belt is engaged in its buckle and the lease the switch @ or press down the acceler-
driver's door is closed. ator.

.&. WARNING -1
You should only use the emergency brak
ing function In a real emergency, for exam-
p le if the brake system were to fail or if the
brake pedal were to be obstructed. If you ~
Driving 95

use the emergency braking function by ac- Switching off the hold assist
tivating the parking brake switch, this has ... Press button @ to switch off the hold assist
the same effect as heavy braking. Please function . The LED in the button will go out.
remember that the ESC (and the integra-
ted ABS, EDL and traction control func- In certain situations, the hold assist transfers
tions) is still subject to certain physical the job of holding the vehicle to the parking
limits. In a corner o r in bad road or weath- brake. As soon as the parking brake is holding
er conditions an emergency stop can cause the vehicle still, the warning lamp . appears
the vehicle to skid or lose steering control. in the instrument cluster.

Hold assist
A WARNING
1
Applies to vehicles: with hold assist The intelligent technology in the hold as-
sist function cannot defy the laws of phys-
ics. Do not let the extra convenience affor-
ded by the hold assist function tempt you
into taking any risks when driving - th is
can cause accidents.
- The hold assist cannot keep the vehicle
stationary in all conditions on a gradient
(e.g. if the road is slippery or icy).
- Always ensure that the vehicle is stopped
Fig. 107 Section of centre console: Button for hold as- properly and safely risk of accident!
sist

The hold assist helps the driver if the vehicle


CD CAUTION
Switch off the hold assist function before
is stationary for a long period or very often,
driving the vehicle into a car wash.
for instance at traffic lights, on steep gradi-
ents or in stop-and-go traffic. i Note
Switching on the hold assist - The last setting of the hold assist (on/
off) is restored when the ignition is
Important: The driver's door must be closed,
switched on. The LED in button @ is lit
the driver's seat belt buckled and the engine
when the hold assist is on.
running.
- Automatic gearbox: When the hold as-
"" Press button @ ~ Fig. 107 in the centre sist function is switched on, it stops the
console to switch on the hold assist func- v1ehicle from creeping forwards when you
tion. The LED in the button will light up. t ake your foot off the brake pedal.
Stopping w ith the hold assist - In certain situations, the hold assist can-
not hold the vehicle. The LED in the but-
... Once it detects that the vehicle has stopped, ton will go out.
the hold assist keeps the vehicle stationary.
You can now take your foot off the brake
pedal.
Hill hold assist
Applies to vehicles: with hill hold assist
... Drive off in the normal way: the brake will
be released automatically and the vehicle The hill hold assist function makes it easier to
will start moving. drive away on a slope.

Important: The driver's door must be closed,


the seat belt buckled and the engine running. ~
96 Driving

The system is activated when you press and Speed warning


hold the brake pedal for a few seconds.
function
When you release the brake pedal the braking
Introduction
force will be maintained for a moment in or-
Applies to vehicles: with speed warning function
der to hold the vehicle and make it easier for
you to drive away. The speed warning function con help you keep
below a pre-set maximum speed.
A WARNING
The speed warning function will warn you if
- The intelligent technology in the hill
t he vehicle exceeds the pre-set maximum
hold assist function cannot defy the laws
speed. The system gives an audible warning
of physics. Do not let the extra conven-
signal ifthe set speed is exceeded by about
ience afforded by the hill hold assist
3 km/h. At the same time, an indicator lamp
function tempt you into taking any risks
lei wi ll light up in the instrument cluster dis-
when driving - this can cause accidents.
play and the driver message Speed limit ex-
- The hi ll hold assist function cannot keep ceeded! will appear. The ind icator lamp [t]
the vehicle stationary in all cond it ions on will go out when the speed drops below the
a gradient (e.g. If the road is slippery or set speed lim it again.
icy).
- If you do not drive away immediately af- You are recommended to store this speed lim-
ter releasing the brake pedal the vehicle it warning if you wish to be reminded of a par-
could start to roll back. You should ticular speed limit. This could be when driving
therefore immediately press the brake in countries with general speed limits, or if
pedal or apply the parking brake. you need to keep below a particular speed
- If the engine should stall you must im- when winter tyres are fitted, etc.
mediately press the brake pedal or apply
the parking brake. Note
- If you are driving away on a slope in stop- - Please bear in mind that, even with the
and-go traffic press and hold the brake speed warning function, it is still impor-
pedal for a few seconds before driving tant to keep a check on the car's speed
off. This will prevent the vehicle from with the speedometer and to observe
rolling back unintentionally. the statutory speed limits.
- On veh icles for some markets, the speed
@ Note warning function warns you when you
reach a speed of 120 km/h . This speed
To find out whether your vehicle is equip-
limit warning is preset at the factory.
ped with the hill hold assist function
please contact an Audi dealership or quali-
fied workshop. Setting speed limit warning
App lie s to vehicles with speed wa rning function

You con use the sound system or MMI* to set,


alter or cancel the speed limit warning.

Vehicles with sound sys tem


.. Select: ISETUPI button > control button ~
Driver assist > Speed warning .
Driving 97

Vehicles w ith MMI - On vehicles with a manual gearbox, the


set speed cannot be reached ifthe cur-
"' Select: control button Systems or Car sys-
t em s > Driver assist > Speed warning . rently selected gear is too high or too
low. Make sure to change up or down a
The speed limit warning can be adjusted in in- gear in good time.
crements of 10 km/h between 30 and - The cruise control system remains active
240 km/h. while you change gears (applies to both
manual and automatic gearboxes).
Cruise control system - The brake lights come on when the sys-
t e m brakes the vehicle.
Description
Applies to vehicles; with cruise control system
Switching on
The cruise control system allows you to drive Applies to vehicles with cruise control system
at a constant speed of 20 km/h or higher.
A constant speed is maintained by adjusting e
the eng ine power or braking the vehicle ac-
cordingly.
f
.&. WARNING
- Always direct your full attention to the
road, even when you are using the cruise
-
~8
control system. It is always the driver
Fig. 108 Control lever for cruise control system
who is responsible for determining the
speed and for keeping a safe distance to Pu ll the lever to position CD Q Fig. 108 to
the other vehicles on the road. switch on the cruise control system.
- For safety reasons, the cruise control sys- Drive at the speed you wish to set the sys-
tem must not be used in city traffic, tem to.
stop-and-go traffic, on roads with a lot of Press the button marked @ to store the
bends or in difficult or slippery driving speed. The indicator lamp . in the instru-
conditions (such as Ice, fog, loose grit or ment cluster will light up.
gravel, heavy rain, etc.) - risk of accident!
- When you take a turn-off, drive along a
Adjusting the speed
motorway exit lane or pass through road- Applies to vehicles: with cruise control system
work sections, please temporarily switch
off the cruise control system. "'Briefly pus h the lever towards GYG
- Make sure you do not unintentionally Qpoge 97, Fig. 108 to increase or reduce
rest your foot on the accelerator - this the cruising speed in sma ll steps.
will override the cruise control system To increase or reduce the speed quickly, hold
which, as a result, will not brake the ve- the lever towards GYO until you reach the
hicle. desired cruising speed.

You can still use the accelerator pedal to in-


i Note
crease speed in the normal way, for example
- The cruise control system is suitable for to overtake another vehicle. Once you release
driving in speed-restricted zones. As a the accelerator, the system will revert to the
driver you are always responsible for speed you stored initially. ~
maintaining the correct speed.
98 Driving

However, if the vehicle exceeds the program- The programmed cruising speed is deleted if
med speed by more than 10 km/h for more you switch off the cruise control system com-
than 5 minutes, the cruise control system will pletely or switch off the ignition.
be deactivated temporarily. The indicator
lamp Ill
in the instrument cluster will go out, .&. WARNING 1
but the programmed speed will remain stor- Do not resume the programmed cruising
ed. speed if this is too high for the traffic con-
ditions - this can cause accidents.
Pre-selecting a speed
Applies to vehicles: with crui se control system

You con pre-select a desired speed while the - The cruise control system will be deacti-
vehicle is stationary. vated if you keep your foot on the clutch
pedal.
Switch on the ignition . - The cruise control system is deactivated
Pull the lever to position CD Q page 97, if the brakes become too hot while driv-
Fig. 108. ing. If this happens on a s lope, you can
Push the lever up towards G or down to- reduce the load on the brakes by select-
wards 0 in order to increase or reduce the ing a lower gear.
cruising speed setting .
- The ESC sport mode cannot be switched
Release the lever to store the ind icated
on when the cruise control system is ac-
cruising speed.
tivated.
This function allows you to enter the desired
cruise control settin g speed ahead of ti me, for Start/stop system
example before joining a motorway. Once you
Description
are on the motorway, you can activate the
Applies to vehicles: with sta rt/stop system
cruise control system by pulling the lever to
position (D. The start/stop system can help to save fue l
and reduce C02 emissions.
Switching off In start/stop mode, the engine Is switched off
Applies to vehicles: with cruise control system
automatically when the veh icle stops, e.g. at
Switching off temporarily traffic lights. The ignition remains on during
this stop phase. The engine is automatically
Press the brake pedal, or
started on demand.
Push the lever to position @ (click stop not
engaged) Q page 97, Fig. 108, or The start/stop system is automatically activa-
ted each time you switch on the ignition.
Switching off completely
Basic conditions for start/stop mode
Push the lever to position @ (click stop en-
gaged), or - The driver's door must be closed.
Switch off the ignition. - The driver's seat belt must be buckled.
- The bonnet must be closed.
The speed setting will remain stored after the
- The vehicle must have been moving at over
system is temporarily deactivated. To resume
4 km/h since the last stop.
the programmed cruising speed, release the
- A trailer must not be hitched up to the vehi-
brake pedal and pull the control lever to posi-
cle. ..,.
tion @ .
Driving 99

A WARNING
Vehicles with manua l gearbox

- Never switch off the engine until the ve- "' When the vehicle stops, put the gear l-ever in
hicle is stationary. Otherwise you may neutral and take your foot off the clutch
not have the full benefit of the brake ser- pedal. The engine will switch off. An indica-
vo and power steering. You may need tor lamp . will light up in the instrument
cluster display.
more strength to steer and brake the ve-
"' The engine will start again automatica lly
hicle than you normally would. This
would mean a greater risk of accidents when you press the clutch pedal. The indica-
tor lamp will go out.
and serious injury, because you cannot
steer and brake in the normal manner. Vehicles with automatic gearbox
- Never remove the key from the ignition
"' Stop the vehicle and keep your foot on the
while the vehicle is moving. The steering
brake pedal. The engine will switch off. The
lock could engage suddenly, and you
indicator lamp . will appear on the dis-
would not be able to steer the car.
play.
- Always take the key with you when leav-
"' The engine will sta rt again automatically
ing the vehicle - even If you only Intend
when you take your foot off the brake pedal.
to be gone for a short time. This is espe-
If the hold assist* is switched on, the engine
cially important If children are left in the
will not start until the accelerator is press-
car. They might otherwise be able to
ed. The indicator lamp . will go out.
start the engine or use power-operated
equipment such as the electric windows - Further information for automatic
this could lead to injuries. gearboxes
- To avoid injury, make sure that the start/ The engine is switched off when the selector
stop system is switched off before work-
lever is in position P, 0, N or Sor in manual
ing in the engine compartment
mode. If the selector lever is in position P, the
~page 101.
'--- engine will remain off even if you take your
foot off the brake . The engine will not start
CD CAUTION again until you press t he accelerator or select
Always switch off the s tart/stop system another gear and take your foot off the brake.
~ page 101 before driving through water.
The engine will start again if you move these-
lector lever to R during a stop phase.
Switching off I starting the engine
Applies to vehicles: with st.art/stop system If you do not want the engine to sta rt, move
the selector lever quickly from D through R to
P.

(D Note
- You can control whether or not the en-
gine is switched off by varying the
amount of pressure on the brake pedal.
For instance, if you brake gently in stop-
a nd-go traffic or before turning off at a
Fig. 1 09 I nstrument cluster: Engine switched off junction, the engine will remain on while
(stop phase) t he vehicle is at a standstill. As soon as
you press the brake pedal harder, the en-
gine will be switched off.
100 Driving

- On vehicles wit h manual gearbox, you - The interior temperature selected on the air
should keep you r foot on the brake dur- conditioner* has not yet been reached.
ing a stop phase to prevent the vehicle - The exterior temperature is very high/low.
from moving. - The windscreen is being defrosted
- If you press the I START ENGINE STOPI c::> page 78, Q page 80.
button" during a stop phase, the ignition - The parking aid* or park assist* is switched
will be switched off. on .
- If the engine stalls on a vehicle w ith - The battery charge is too low.
manual gearbox, you can start it again - The steering wheel is close to full Lock or the
directly by pressing the clutch pedal im- vehicle is being steered .
mediately. - Reverse gear has just been selected.
- Applies to vehicles with - The vehicle is on a steep grad ient.
ISTART ENGINE STOPI* button : The igni-
tion remains on when you bring the vehi- @ w ill appear in the instrument cluster dis-
cle to a halt and the start/stop system play, and . will simultaneously appear in the
driver information system*.
stops the engine. Before leaving the ve-
hicle, ensure that the ignition is switched Engine cuts in again automatically
off; otherwise t he battery will be
drained. The stop phase is interrupted In the following
situations, for example. The engine cuts in au-
- The display differs slightly on some mod-
tomatically without intervention from the
els.
driver.

General notes - The vehicle starts to roll (e.g. on a hill).


Applies to vehicles: with start/stop system - The interior temperature deviates from the
air conditioner setting.
The on-board control system can override the
- The windscreen is being defrosted
start/stop function for various reasons.
c::> page 78, Q page 80.
- The brake pedal is pressed severa l times in
succession.
- The battery charge drops to an insufficient
Level.
- The power consumption is high .

Ignition is switched off automatically


To prevent the battery from being discharged,
the ignition will be switched off automatically
Fig. 110 I nstrument cluster with driver information
system: Engine stop temporarily unava ilable if certain conditions are met. For instance:

- The vehicle has already been driven.


Engine does not switch off
- The start/stop system has switched off the
Before each stop phase, the system checks engine.
that certain conditions have been met. The - The driver's door is opened.
engine will not switch off in the following sit- - The driver's seat belt is unbuckled .
uations, for example. - The brake pedal is not pressed.
- The eng ine has not yet reached the mini- - The vehicle is stationary.
mum temperature required for start/stop If the dipped beam headlights are switched
mode. on in this case, the side lights will be tl\Jrned
on instead. After approx. 30 minutes, or when ..,..
Driving 101

you lock the vehicle, the s ide lights will be Driver messages in the instrument
switched off. cluster display
Applies to vehicles: with start/stop system
If the start/stop system has not stopped the
engine or if you have switched off the start/ Automatic start/stop deactivated: Please
stop system manually, the engine will contin- restart engine manually
ue running and the ignition will not be switch- This message appears if certain conditions
ed off automatically 9 .&.. have not been met during the stop phase and
the start/stop system cannot start the engine
&.. WARNING - I again automatically. In th is case, the engine
Never run the engine in confined spaces. must be started manually.
The exhaust gases aire toxic.
Automatic start/stop: system fault!
Function unavailable
@ Note
There is a malfunction In the start/stop sys-
If you select D, N or S (on vehicles with au-
tem . Drive to a workshop soon and have the
tomatic gearbox) after selecting reverse
fault rectified.
gear, the car must have been moving at
over 10 km/h before the system can
switch off the engine again.

Switching the start/stop system off and


on manually
Applies to vehicles: with start/stop system

You can switch the system off manually ifyou


don't want to use it.

Fig. 111 Centre console: Switch for start/stop system

To switch the start/stop system off or on


manually, press the ~ button. The LED in
the button will light up when the system is
switched off.

(0 Note
If you switch off the system during a stop
phase, the engine will start again auto-
matica lly.
102 g-tron

g-tron - Stop the vehicle Immediately.


- Extinguish any cigarettes immediately.
Natural gas engine - Switch off the ignition .
Introduction - Open all the doors and the boot lid to en-
Applies to vehicles with natural gas engine
sure an adequate supply of fresh air.
- Switch off or remove from the vehicle all
Your vehicle will run on CNG (Compressed items which could cause sparks or fire.
Natural Gas) and petrol. The fuel mode is - Do NOT drive on if the gas odour persists.
changed over automatically. - Obtain professional assistance and have the
Using compressed natural gas (CNG) fault rectified .

In addition to petrol, vehicles with a natural


gas engine will run on either CNG, egas or
A WARNING
- Serious personal injury can result if you
biomethane.
ignore a gas odour inside the vehicle or
The tank must NOT be filled with any other when filling the tank.
ava ilable types of fu:el, such as LNG (Liquefied - Follow the instructions above
Natural Gas), LPG (Liquefied Petroleum Gas) ~ page 102, Safe operation of natural
<=!> & or hythane (a mixture of hydrogen and gas powered vehicles if you notice a gas
methane) <=!> Cl). odour.
- Leave the danger area .
Natural gas quality and fuel consumption
- If necessary, notify the rescue services.
Natural gas is subdivided into two quality cat - Natural gas is highly explosive and highly
egories: Group H and Group L. inflammable. Improper use of natural
H-gas has a higher methane content and thus gas can cause accidents, serious burns
a higher calorific value than L-gas. The higher and other injuries.
the calorific value of the natural gas, the low- - The vehicle is not suitable for the use of
er the fuel consumption. liquefied natural gas (LNG) or liquefied
petroleum gas (LPG) and must never be
However, the methane content and the calo- fuelled or driven with LNG or LPG. Lique
rific value can vary within the same quality fied gas can cause the natural gas tank
group. Consequently, the vehicle's fuel con- to explode and can cause serious injuries.
sumption can vary even if the gas tank is al-
ways filled with fuel of the same quality.
CD CAUTION
The quality of the natural gas is detected au The vehicle is not su itable for the use of
tomatically. The engine management system hythane and must never be fuelled with
adapts the vehicle set up to variations in natu- hythane. Otherwise, serious damage to
ral gas quality. It is therefore possible to mix the engine and fuel system could result.
both quality groups in the gas fuel tan k. It is
not necessary to run the gas tank dry before (D Note
filling up with natural gas of a different quali-
Have the natural gas fuel system checked
ty group.
at regular intervals by a qualified work
Safe operation of natural gas powered shop.
vehicles
If you notice a gas odour or suspect that the
natural gas fuel system may be leaking,
please follow the instructions below Q & .
g-tron 103

Instrument cluster overview


Applies to vehicles: with natural gas engine

The instrument cluster is the driver's information centre. It provides status information while the
vehicle is being driven in natural gas mode and indicates how much fuel is in the gas tank.

Fig. 112 Overview of inst rument cluster for gtron

(!) Rev counter with warning/indi- good time when light conditions become
cator lamps ... . ........... . 10 poor.
@ Fuel gauge for natural gas . .. . 104
@ Ind icator lamps (turn s ignals) Driving in natural gas mode
@ Display Applies to vehicles: with natural gas engine

- Warning/indicator lamps and 14 If you have just refuelled the gas tank or if the
- Driver information system* . . 27 coolant temperature is too low, the engine
- Date* and time ........... . 9 will initially start running in petrol mode. The
- Mileage recorder ... ..... . . 10 engi ne will switch to natural gas mode as
- Service interval display .. . . . 13 sooni as possible.
Speedometer with warning The indicator lamp . in the instrument clus-
lamps ter will light up as soon as the eng ine is run-
@ Fuel gauge for petrol ... ... . . 11 ning in natural gas mode page 103,
0 Reset button for trip record- Fig. 112. The indicator lamp will go out if
er Ia.a I . . . . ... ........ . . . . . 10 there is no more natural gas left in the tank.
The engine will switch automatically to petrol
@ Note mode.
The needles on the dials in the instrument
cluster are illuminated when the ignition is
switched on. The main instrument lighting
(for the dials and needles) comes on when
the vehicle's lights a re switched on. The in-
strument lighting is dimmed automatical-
ly as the daylight starts to fade . This func-
tion is intended to remind the driver to
switch on the dipped-beam headlights in
104 g-tron

Gas fuel gauge ing can occur. Unburnt fuel can then enter
Applies to vehicles: with natura l gas engine the exhaust system. This can lead to over-
heating and damage to the catalytic con-
verter.

@ Note
If the vehicle is refuelled and parked im-
mediately afterwards for a long period,
the fuel level shown on the gas fuel gauge
may be different when you restart the ve-
hicle than it was immediately after refuel-
Ii ng. This does not mean that there is a
fuel leak, but is a side-effect caused by a
drop in pressure in the gas fuel ta nks when
the system cools down after refuelling.

Filling the gas tank


Applies to vehicles: with natural gas engine

Vehicles with a natural gas engine have two


fuel tanks: one for natural gos and one for
petrol.
Fig. 114 Display: Combined fuel warning for petrol
and natural gas

The gauge ~Fig. 113 only works when the ig-


nit ion is swit ched o n. The LED at the bottom
of the dial flashes for a few seconds after the
Ignition is switched on. When t he gauge rea-
ches the reserve zone, the LED at the bottom
of the dial will light up in red. The LED at the
bottom of the dial will flash if the gas level is
very low. Fig. 115 Vehicle as seen from the rear right: Opening
the fuel tank flap
When the gas fuel level is down to the reserve
zone, the message Please add CNG will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster.
When both types of fuel (natural gas and pet-
rol) are down to the reserve zone, a combined
d i splay~ Fig. 114 will appear in the instru-
ment cluster with the message Please refuel
and the indicator lamp l:D
q page 24.

The fuel range will also be displayed.


Fig. 116 Tank flap open: Gas filler neck a nd filler
The tank capacities on your vehicle are given neck sea l @
in the Technical data section Q page 2 73.
When refuelling with petrol, please note the
CD CAUTION additional information and warnings
Q page 210.
Never run t he petrol tank completely dry.
If there is an irregular fue l supply, misfir-
g - tron 105

Switch off the engine, ignition, mobile gas can cause accidents, serious burns
phone(s) and auxiliary heating before refuel- and other injuries.
ling c> &.. - Make sure that the filler nozzle is cor-
Read and follow the instructions at the natu- rectly coupled with the gas filler neck be-
ral gas filling station. Before refuelling with fore adding fuel. Stop fuelling immedi-
natural gas, make sure that the correct type of ately if you notice a gas odour.
fuel is used c> page l 02, Using compressed - The vehicle is not suitable for the use of
natural gas (CNG). liquefied natural gas (LNG) or liquefied
petroleum gas (LPG) and must never be
The flap that covers t h e tank cap is unlocked fuelled or driven with LNG or LPG. Lique-
and locked automatically by the central lock- fied gas can cause the natural gas tank
ing. t o explode and can cause serious injuries.
Unscrewing the tank cap
The gas filler neck is behind the tank flap next
CD CAUTION
The vehicle is not su itable for the use of
to the petrol filler neck c:> Fig. 116.
hythane and must never be fuelled with
.. Press the left side of the flap to open it hythane. Otherwise, serious damage to
-arrow- Q fig . 115. the engine and fuel system could result.
Filling the tank
(!) Note
.. Pull the cap off the gas filler neck <!).
- The procedure for operating the filler
.. Make sure that the seal @ is securely seated
coupling can vary on different gas filler
in the gas filler neck.
units. If you are unsure, ask a trained
.. Fit the coupling of the fuelling line onto the
member of staff at the filling station to
gas filler neck.
demonstrate the filling procedure .
.. Lock the filler nozzle.
- In very hot weather, the overheating pro-
.. Start the refuelling procedure.
tection system on the gas filler unit may
.. If you need to interrupt the fuelling proce-
automatically deactivate the fuelling
dure, press the stop button on the filler
system.
unit.
- You may hear noises while refuelling.
The compressor on the filler unit will be This is normal and does not mean that
switched off automatically when the gas tank t he system is damaged.
is full. - The natural gas fuel system on the vehi-
cle Is suitable for refuelling both at do-
Closing the tank cap
mestic-type appliances using small com-
.. Unlock the filler nozzle. pressors (time-fill) and at CNG fi lling
.. Check that the seal on the gas filler neck @ stations using large compressors (fast-
has not become stuck on the fi ller coupling. fill) .
.. If necessary, fit the seal back onto the gas
filler neck .
.. Press the cap onto the gas filler neck .
.. Close the tank flap . Make sure you hear it
click into place .

.&. WARNING
- Natural gas is highly explosive and highly
inflammable. Improper use of natural
106 Automatic gearbox

Automatic gearbox P - Parking lock


When the selector lever is in this position, the
S tronic gearbox driven wheels are locked mechanically. The
Introduction parking lock must only be engaged when the
App lies Lo vehicles: with S tron ic gearbox vehicle is stationary c:> .&..

The vehicle is equipped with an electron ica lly The interlock button (the button in the selec-
controlled dual-clutch gearbox (S t ronic). Tor- tor lever handle) must be pressed in and the
q ue between t he engine and t he gea rbox is bra ke pedal must be depressed before moving
transmitted via two independent clutches. t he selector lever either in or out of position P.
They enable smooth , uninterrupted accelera-
R - Reverse gear
tion of the vehicle.
Reverse gear must only be e ngaged w hen the
The gearbox shifts u p or dow n automatically
vehicle is stationary and the eng ine is id li ng
and continuously ad apts the timing of the ,&.
gear changes to your driving style.
To move the selector lever to position R, press
When you drive at moderate speeds the gear-
in the interlock button and at the same time
box will select the most economical shift pro-
press the brake peda l. The reversing light
gramme. It will then change up early and de-
comes on when the selector lever is in the R
lay t he downshifts to give better fue l econo-
position with the ignition on.
my.
N - Neutral
If yo u drive at higher speeds with heavy accel-
eratio n, if you open the throttle quickly, or if In t his position, t he gearbox is in neutral.
you use t he kick-down or the ca r's maxim um
DIS - Drive/Sport (standard position for
speed, the gea rbox will a utomatically select
driving forwards)
the more "sporty" shift programmes.
In select or lever position D/S, the gearbox can
If desired, you ca n also select the gea rs man- be operated in e it her t he standard drive mode
ually (tiptronic mode) c:> page 111, Manual (D) or in s port mode (S). To select sport mode
gear selection (tiptronic mode) . (5), briefly pull the selector lever back. The
gearbox will switch back to drive mode (D) if
Selector lever positions you pull the selector lever again. The selected
Applies to vehicles: with S troni c gearbox driving mode is shown in the instrument clus-
ter display.

In t he standard drive mode (0), t he gearbox


a utomatically selects t he best gear ratio. This
depends on the engine load, the road speed
and the drivi ng style.

Se lect sport mode (S) if you wish to t a ke full


advantage of t he car's performance. Th is set-
ting makes use of the engine's maximu m
Fig. 117 Instrument cluster: Selector lever positions power output. When accelerating the gear
shifts may be noticeable.
The current selector lever position and the
Press the brake pedal when moving the selec-
current gear are shown in the instrument clus-
tor lever from N to D/S if the vehicle is sta-
ter display.
tionary or at speeds below 2 km/h c:> .&.. IJll-
Automatic gearbox 107

E - Efficiency*
(D Note
In efficiency mode Q page 136, Audi drive se-
- Drive select: You can select the sport
lect, the gearbox selects the next gear at low-
program for gear changes by activating
er engine speeds. Earlier upshifts give im-
the dy namic mode. The instrument clus-
proved fuel economy because the full power
ter display will show S instead of D.
reserves of the engine are not used .
- If the lever is moved accidentally to N
In this mode, Eis shown on the display in- when driving, take your foot off the ac-
stead of D ~ Fig. 117. clerator and let the engine speed drop
to idling before selecting Dor S again .
.&_ WARNING - It is not possible to move the selector
- The car can roll away even if the ignition lever out of position P if the electrical
is switched off. power supply fails. In this case, these-
- Never move the selector lever to R or P lector lever can be released manually.
when driving, as this could cause an acci- Left-hand drive vehicles Q page 114,
dent. right-hand drive vehicles Qpoge 115.
- In all selector lever positions except P
the vehicle must always be held with the Selector lever lock
foot brake when the engine is running. Applies to vehicles: with S tronic gearbox
This is because an automatic gearbox The selector lever lock prevents gears from
still transmits power even at idling being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve-
speed, and the vehicle tends to "creep" - hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.
risk of accident!
- The accelerator pedal must on no ac-
count be pressed inadvertently when a
gear is engaged with the vehicle station-
ary. The vehicle could otherwise start
moving immediately (in some cases even
if the parking brake is engaged) and pos-
sibly cause an accident.
- Do not press the accelerator while select-
ing a gear with the vehicle stationary and
Fig. 1 18 Selector lever lock
the engine running, as this could cause
an accident. The selector lever lock is released as follows:
- The driver should never get out of the ve-
hicle when the engine is running and a ... Switch on the ignition.
gear is engaged. If you have to leave your ... Press the brake pedal and at the same time
vehicle while the engine is running, you press in the interlock button.
must apply the parking brake and en- Automatic s e lector lever lock
gage the parking lock P.
The selector lever is locked in the P and N po-
- To avoid accidents, apply the parking
sitions when the ignition is on. To move the
brake and put the selector lever in posi-
selector lever out of these positions the driver
tion P before opening the bonnet and
working on the vehicle with the engine must press the brake pedal. To move out of
running. Please observe the important position P, the interlock button must also be
pressed. The following message appears in
safety warnings page 212, Working
the display as a reminder for the driver when
on components in the engine compart-
the selector lever is in position P or N: ~
ment.
108 Automatic gearbox

When stationary a pply footbrake while se- - If the vehicle does not move in the de-
lecting gear sired direction, the system may have
failed to engage the gear correctly. In
The selector lever lock only works if the vehi-
this case, press the brake pedal and se-
cle is stationary or driving at speeds up to 2
lect the gear again.
km/h. At higher speeds the selector lever lock
- If the vehicle still does not move in the
in the N position is disengaged automatically.
desired direction, a system malfunction
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the has occurred. Seek professional assis-
selector lever is moved quickly through posi- tance and have the system checked .
tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This
makes it possible, for instance, to "rock" the General notes on driving an automatic
vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in Applies to vehicles: with S tronic gearbox
snow or mud . The selector lever lock engages
automatically if the brake pedal is not de- The gearbox changes the forward gears up
pressed and the lever is in position N for more and dawn automatically.
than about two seconds.

Interlock button
The interlock button on the selector lever han-
dle prevents the driver from inadvertently en-
gaging particular gears. The illustration
shows the selector lever positions in which
the button has to be pressed, highlighted in
colour Q fig. 118.
Fig. 119 Detail of the centre console: Selector lever
Safety interlock for ignition key* with interlock button

The key can only be withdrawn from the igni-


The engine can only be started when the se-
tion lock with the ignition switched off and
lector lever is in P or N. In the case of Low out-
the selector lever in position P. When the igni-
side temperatures (below-10 (), the engine
tion key is removed, the selector lever is
can only be started when the selector Lever is
locked in position P.
in position P.
(1) Note Driving away from a standstill
- If the selector lever does not lock auto- ... Press and hold the brake pedal.
matically, a malfunction has occurred. In "" Press and hold the interlock button (the but-
this case, the power transmission is in- ton in the selector lever handle), set these
terrupted to prevent the vehicle from lector lever to the desired position (e.g . D)
moving unintentionally. Proceed as fol- r::::> page 106 and release the interlock but-
lows to engage the selector lever lock ton .
again: ... Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a
- Vehicles with 6-speed gearbox: briefly slight movement can be felt).
press the brake pedal. ... Release the brake and press the accelerator
- Vehicles with 7-speed gearbox: press A.
the brake pedal. Move the selector lever
to position P or N and then select a gear. Stopping briefly
- If the vehicle does not move forwards or ... Press the brake pedal to hold the vehicle
backwards even though a gear is selec- when stationary (for instance at traffic
ted, proceed as follows: lights).
Auto m a t ic gearbox 109

.. Do not press the accelerator. In some situatio ns (such as on mountain


.. To prevent the veh icle from rolling away, ap roads or when towing a trailer or ca ravan) it
ply the parking brake before moving off on can be advantageous to switch temporari ly to
steep gradients c> ,&.. the manual shift programme so that the gear
.. As soon as you accelerate as normal with ratios can be selected manually to suit the
you r seat belt fastened, the parking brake driving cond itions c> page 111 .
will automatically be released and the vehi
On level ground it is sufficient to move these
cle will start moving .
lector lever to P. On a gradient the parkin g
Stopping/ parking the car brake should be applied first and the selector
lever should be moved to P c:0 page 92. This
If you open the driver's door while the selec
reduces the load on the locking mechanism
tor lever is not in position P, the vehicle can
and makes it easier to move the selector lever
roll away. The message Shift to P, otherwise
out of position P.
vehicle can roll away. Doors to not lock if lev
er is not in P. appears on vehicles with con
venience key*. A buzzer will also sound.
A_ WARNING
- The driver should never get out of the ve
.. Press and hold the brake pedal c> ,&.. hide when the engine is running andl a
.. Apply the parking brake. gear is engaged . If you have to leave your
.. Move the selector lever to P. vehicle while the engine is running, you
must apply the parking brake and en-
Stopping on a slope
gage the parking lock P.
.. Always keep your foot on the brake pedal to - If the engine is running and a gear is en-
hold the vehicle and prevent it from rolli ng gaged (D/S or R) or the vehicle is in "tip-
back down the slope c> ,&.. Do not try to tronic" mode, you will need to hold the
stop the vehicle "rolling back" by increasing car with the footbrake. Otherwise, the
the e ngine speed when a gear is engaged car will "creep" forwards as the power
~ CD. transmission is not fully interrupted even
Driving away on a slope (vehicles without when t he engine is idling .
hill hold assist* I Audi hold assist*) - The accelerator pedal must on no ac-
count be pressed inadvertently when the
.. Apply the parking brake.
vehicle is stationary. The vehicle could
.. Once you have engaged a gear press the ac
otherwise start moving immediately (in
celerator carefully. The parking brake will be
some cases even if the parking brake is
released automatically if you are wearing
engaged) and possibly cause an accident.
your seat belt.
- Do not press the accelerator while select-
Driving away on a slope (vehicles with hill ing a gear wit h the vehicle stationary and
hold assist*) the engine running, as this could ca use
.. Once you have engag ed a gear, release the an accident .
footb rake and press the accelerator - Never move the selector lever to R or P
when driving at normal speeds, as t h is
~ page 95, Hill hold assist.
could cause an accident.
Driving away on a slope (vehicles with - Before you drive down a steep gradient,
hold assist*) reduce the speed and use "tiptronic" to
.. Once you have engaged a gear, release the select a low gear.
footbrake and press the accelerator - Never a llow the brake to drag when driv-
c> page 95, Hold assist. ing downhill and do not use the brake II>
110 Au tomat ic g earb ox

pedal too often or for long periods. Con- - If you allow the car to roll with the en-
stant braking will cause the brakes to gine switched off, the S tronic gearbox
overheat and will considerably reduce will be damaged as it will not be lu brica-
the effectiveness of the brakes. It will in- ted c:> page 246, Tow-starting I towing
crease the braking distance and could away.
cause the brake system to fail.
- To avoid rolling back on gradients always i Note
hold the vehicle with the footbrake or For safety reasons the parking brake will
parking brake if you have to stop. only release automatically if the driver's
- Never attempt to hold the vehicle with seat belt is engaged in its buckle.
the clutch when stopping on a gradient.
The clutch is disengaged automatically if Downhill speed control
it is overloaded and becomes too hot - Applies to vehicles. with S tronic gearbox
accident risk! If the clutch is overloaded,
The downhill speed control function helps the
the Indicator lamp [;] will light up and a
driver when driving down steep gradients.
message will appear c:> page 113.
Downhill speed control is activated on a
CD CAUTION downh ill grad ient when the selector lever is in
- When you have stopped on a gradient, D/S and the driver presses the brake pedal.
do not try to stop the vehicle rolling back The gearbox automatically selects a suitable
by accelerating when a gear is engaged. gear for the gradient. The downhill speed con-
This could cause the automatic gearbox trol function attempts to maintain the speed
to overheat and become damaged. Apply at which the vehicle was travelling when the
the parking brake or press the brake ped- foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of
al in order to prevent the vehicle from physics and technical limitations of the power
rolling back. train). It may be necessary to adjust the speed
- If you allow the car to roll with the selec- again using the foot brake. The downhill
tor lever in position N with the engine speed control can change down to 3rd gear
switched off, the automatic gearbox will but no further, so it may be necessary to
be damaged as it will not be lubricated . change to tiptronic mode on very steep gradi-
- In certain driving and traffic conditions, ents. In this case, change down manually to
for instance in stop-and-go traffic, if you 2nd or 1st gear in tiptronic mode to use the
have to pull away frequently or if the ve- engine braking effect and reduce the load on
hicle creeps forwards over a long dis- the brakes.
tance, the gearbox can overheat and be- Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon
come damaged. If the warning lamp . as the road levels out again or you press the
lights up, stop the vehicle at the first op- accelerator pedal.
portunity and let the gearbox cool down
c:> page 113. On vehicles with cruise control system"
c:> page 9 7, downhill speed control is activated
- In certain driving and traffic conditions,
for instance in stop-and-go traffic, if you when you set a cruising speed .
have to pull away frequently or if the ve-
hicle creeps forwards over a long dis-
..&. WARNING
tance, the gearbox can overheat and be- The downhill speed control function can-
come damaged . If the warning lamp [;] not defy the laws of physics and may
lights up, stop the vehicle at the first op- therefore not be able to maintain a con-
portunity and let the gearbox cool down st ant speed in certain circumstances. Al-
c:> page 113. ways be prepared to use the brakes!
Automatic gearbox 111

Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode) " To shift up a gear, briefly pull the paddle lev-
Applies to vehicles: with S tronlc gea rbox/paddle levers er 0 q Fig.121.
" To shift down a gear, briefly pull the paddle
The tiptronic feature allows the driver to also
Lever 0 .
change gears manually.
If you use the paddle Levers when the selector
lever is in positions D/S, the gearbox will re-
main in manual mode for a while. To switch
back immed iately to automatic mode after
changing gears manually, pull the padd ~e lev-
er 0 c:> Fig. 121 for approximately 1 second.
If you wantto use the paddle levers perma-
nently, push the selector Lever from position
DIS to the right into the tiptronic selector
Fig. 120 Centre console: Manual gear selection us ing gate .
se lector lever
The gearbox automatically shifts up or down
into the next gear before a critical engine
speed is reached.
The gearbox only allows manual gear changes
if the engine speed would remain within the
permissible range.

Kick-down feature
Fig. 121 Steering wheel: Manual gear selection with Applies to vehicles: with 5 tronic gearbox
paddle levers
The kick-down feature is designed to give
Gear selection with selector lever
maximum acceleration.

The tiptronic mode can be selected either with When the accelerator pedal is pressed right
the vehicle stationary or on the move. down past the point of resistance at full. throt-
tle, the gearbox will shift down to a Lower
" From position D/S, push the selector lever to
gear, depending on road speed and engine
the right into the tiptronic selector gate to
speed . The upshift to the next higher gear is
activate tiptronic mode. As soon as the au-
delayed until the engine reaches maximum
tomatic gearbox has activated this mode,
rpm ..
the letter M will appear on the display
Q page 106, Fig. 117; e.g. M4 means that

the vehicle is in 4th gear.


& WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
" Briefly push the selector Lever forwards G
pery or wet, the kick-down feature could
Fig. 120 to change up a gear.
cause the driving wheels to spin, which
Briefly pull the selector lever back 8 to
could result in skidding.
change down a gear.

Gear selection with paddle levers*


Coasting mode
You ca n use the paddle levers when the selec- Applies to vehicles: with S tronlc gearbox, Audi drive se-
lect, except for 1.2 TFSI
tor lever is in position D/S or M (= t iptronic se-
lector gate). In coasting mode, you can use the vehicle's ki-
netic energy to drive without using the accel-
erator on certain stretches of road. This saves .,.
112 Automatic gearbox

fuel by allowing you to take your foot off the - The vehicle can pick up speed if you are
accelerator earlier and let the vehicle coast driving down a slope in coasting mode -
(for instance when approaching a speed re- risk of accident!
striction in a built-up area). - If other people are using your car, you
Switching on coasting mode should draw their attention to the coast-
ing mode.
Important: Selector lever must be in D, gradi-
ent must be less than 12 %. (D Note
" Select efficiency mode in drive select - Coast ing mode is only available in effi
Q page 136 (you only have to do this once). ciency mode (drive select*).
" Take your foot off the accelerator. - The message Coasting only appears
If you have selected the "on-board computer" when the current fuel consumption dis-
display, the message Coasting will then ap- play is select ed. The gear is no longer
pear. The gearbox automatically d isengages displayed when you are in coasting mode
the clutch at speeds above 20 km/h and let s (e.g. E instead of E7) .
the vehicle coast without the engine braking - The coasting mode Is deactivated tempo-
effect. The engine ticks over at idling speed rarily on gradients of 15 % or greater.
while the vehicle Is coasting.
Launch control programme
Stopping coasting mode
Applies to vehicles w1Lh launch control I 6-speed S lronrc
gearbox I diesel engines 125 kW and higher I petrol en-
... Press the brake pedal or accelerator.
gines 140 kW and higher
To use the engine braking effect and overrun The Launch control programme enables maxi-
fuel cut-off again, a ll you need to do is tap the mum acceleration.
brake pedal briefly.
Important: The eng ine must be warm and the
You can improve your fuel economy and help steering wheel must be pointing straight-
to reduce emissions by using a combination of ahead.
the coasting mode (i .e . coasting with low fuel
consumption on a longer stretch of road) and ... Deactivate the start/s top sys tem"
the overrun fuel cutoff (i.e. using the engine <=:> page 101 . The LED in the button ~ will
braking effect with no fuel consumption on a light up.
shorter stretch of road). ... Deactivate the hold assist Q page 95. The
LED in the button will go out.
A WARNING ... Press the ln OFF I button once briefly while
the engine is running l >2l.
- If you are approaching an obstruction
... Briefly pu ll t he selector lever back from po-
when coasting mode is swit ched on,
sition D/S to select position S, or move the
please remember that the vehicle will
selector lever to the right into the tiptronic
not slow down as quickly as usual when
gate, or select dynamic mode in drive se-
you take your foot off the accelerator -
lect ~ page 136. 1J.
risk of accident!

I) On vehicles with driver information system, the ESC


lamp lights up permanently and the message Stabili-
sat ion cont rol (ESC): sport. Warning! Restricted sta
billty appears temporarily in the instrument cluster to
indicate the deact ivation status.
2> Vehi cles with out driver information system: Th e indi-
cator lamp flashes slowly.
Automatic gearbox 113

Press the brake pedal firmly with your left S tronic gearbox will switch to a backup pro-
foot and hold it down for at least one sec- gramme. The vehicle can still be driven in the
ond. backup programme, however only at reduced
At the same time, press the accelerator all speed and not in all gears. In certain cases,
the way down with your right foot until the you may not be able to select reverse gear.
engine revs are high and steady.
Take your left foot off the brake. CD CAUTION
If the gearbox switches to the back-up pro-
_&. WARNING gramme, drive to a qualified workshop
- Always adapt your driving style to the without delay and have the fault rectified.
traffic conditions.
- Only use the launch control programme Gearbox malfunction
when road and traffic conditions permit,
Gearbox malfunction: please stop the ve-
and make sure your manner of driving
hicle and s elect P.
and accelerating the vehicle does not in-
convenience or endanger other road There is a malfunction in the gearbox. Park
users. the vehicle safely and do not drive on. Obtain
- Please note that the driven wheels may professional assistance.
start to spin when the sport mode Is
Gearbox overheating! Please stop vehi-
switched on, causing the vehicle to lose
cle!
grip, in particular on slippery or wet
roads - danger of skidding! The gearbox is overheating and could be dam-
- When acceleration has been completed, aged. Stop the vehicle and let the gearbox
you should deactivate the sport mode cool down with the engine idling and these-
again by briefly pressing the'" OFF[ but- lector lever in position P. If the indicator lamp
ton. and t he message disappear, drive to a quali-
fied workshop soon and have the fault recti-
i Note fied. Do not drive on if the warning lamp stays
on and the message does not disappear. You
- The gearbox may be hot after you have
should obtain professional assistance.
used the launch control programme. In
this case, the programme may not be fi'J Gearbox malfunction: you ca n continue
available for several minutes. The pro- driving
gramme will be available again after a
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
cool-down period.
the fault rectified.
- Accelerating with the launch control pro-
gramme places a heavy load on all parts fil Gearbox malfunction: no reverse gear
of the vehicle. This can result in in- (you can continue driving)
creased wear and tear.
Drive to a qualified workshop without delay
and have the fault rectified.
Back-up programme
Applies to vehicles: with S t ronic gearbox
fi'J Gearbox malfunction: you can continue
driving in D until engine off
A back-up system is in place should a fault oc-
cur in the control system. Park your vehicle well away from moving traf-
fic. You should obtain professional assistance.
If all selector lever positions are highlighted
in the instrument cluster display, a system
fi'J Gearbox overheating: please adapt driv-
ing style ~
malfunction has occurred. In this case, the
114 Automatic gearbox

You can continue driving at moderate speed. is located in the luggage compartment
You can resume normal driving if the indicator c:> page 236. Use the f lat-blade side of the re
lamp goes out. versible screwdriver insert.

mJ Gearbox: please press brake pedal and Removing the selector lever cover
select gear again
" Apply the parking brake c:> &. to prevent
If a gearbox malfunction has occurred due to your vehicle from moving.
overheating, this message wi ll appear once " Insert the flat-blade side of the screwdriver
the gearbox has cooled down again. into the opening at the side of the gear lever
boot and lever off the boot c:> Fig. 122 .
Releasing the selector lever manually " Take hold of the corners of the selector lever
(left-hand drive vehicles) boot by ha nd and carefully turn it inside out
Applies to vehicles: with S tronlc gea rbox over the gear knob c:> Fig . 123.
The selector lever can be released manually if Releasing the selector lever manually
the electrical power supply should foil.
" Press the yellow release mechanism side-
ways with the screwdriver and hold it in
place c:> Fig. 123.
" Now press the interlock button on the selec-
tor lever @ and move the selector lever to
position N.
" After manually releasing the selector lever
make sure you clip the gear lever boot back
into the gearshift gate.

Fig.122 If the power supply should ever fai l (dis-


charged battery, etc.) and the vehicle has to
be pushed or towed, the selector lever must
first be moved to position N. This is possible
after operating the manual release mecha-
nism.

_& WARNING
The selector lever must not be moved out
of position P if the parking brake is not ap-
Fig. 123 Ma nually releasing the selector leve r from
plied. If this is not possible, use the brake
position P
pedal to hold the vehicle. On a slope the
This section describes how to manually re- vehicle could otherwise start to move in-
lease the selector lever on left-hand drive advertently after shifting the selector lever
vehicles. out of position P - accident risk!

The manual release mechanism is located on


the right underneath the selector gate. Re-
leasing the selector lever requires a certain
degree of practica l s kill. We therefore advise
you to obtain professional assistance.
To release the selector lever, you will need the
screwdriver from the vehicle's tool kit, which
Automatic gearbox 115

Releasing the selector lever manually c> page 236. Use the flat-blade side of the re-
(righthand drive vehicles) versible screwdriver insert.
Applies to vehicles with S tronic gea rbox
Removing the selector lever cover
The selector lever can be released manually if
.. Apply the parking brake c> &_ to prevent
the electrical power supply should fail.
your vehicle from moving .
.. Insert the flat-blade side of the screwdriver
into the opening at the side of the gear lever
boot and lever off the boot c> Fig. 124 .
.. Take hold of the corners of the selector lever
boot and carefully turn it inside out over the
gear knob @ .:> Fig. 125 .
.. Take out the panel for the selector lever po-
sition indicator and let it hang down to one
side, suspended by the cable @ c:) Fig. 125.
Fig. 124 Selector lever: Removing the cover
Releasing the selector lever manually
.. Press the yellow release mechanism side-
ways with the screwdriver and hold it in
place @ c> Fig. 125 .
.. Now press the interlock button on the selec-
tor lever @ and move the selector lever to
position N.
.. After manually releasing the selector Lever,
ma ke sure you fit the panel for the selector
Lever position indicator back in the selector
gate and clip the gear lever boot back into
place.

If the power supply should ever fail (dis-


charged battery, etc.) and the vehicle has to
be pushed or towed, the selector lever must
first be moved to position N. This is possible
after operating the manual release mecha-
Fig. 125 Manually releasing the selector lever from nism .
position P

This section describes how to manually re-


&. WARNING
The selector lever must not be moved out
lease the selector lever on right-hand drive
of posit ion P if the parking brake is not ap-
vehicles.
plied. If this is not possible, use the brake
The manual release mechanism is located on pedal to hold the vehicle. On a slope the
the right underneath the selector gate. Re- vehicle could otherwise start to move in-
leasing the selector lever requires a certain advertently after shifting the selector lever
degree of practical skill. We therefore advise out of position P - accident risk!
-------'
you to obtain professional assistance.

To release the selector lever, you will need the


screwdriver from the vehicle's tool kit, which
is located in the luggage compartment
116 Aud i adaptive cruise control

Audi adaptive cruise - Objects cannot be detected until they are


w ithin the range of the sensor cf;> page 117,
control
Fig. 129.
Introduction - The ability of the system to detect objects in
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control front is limited when they are too close,
travelling out of line, or moving into your
The adaptive cruise control is a combined
lane.
speed and distance control system . It assists
- Vehicles that are not clearly discernible, e.g.
the driver by controlling the road speed and
a motorcycle or cyclist travelling in front of
the distance to the vehicle in front within cer-
you and vehicles with high ground clearance
tain limits imposed by the system. The adap-
or a protruding load, are often identified
tive cruise control system can accelerate and
late or are not detected at all.
brake when it detects a vehicle in front. This
- When driving through bends c:>page 117.
provides maximum comfort both on long mo-
- When vehicles are stationary cf;> page 117.
torway journeys and, in conjunction with an
automatic gearbox*, in congested traffic.
.&. WARNING
Please always direct your full attention to
General notes
the road, even when you are using the
General notes adaptive cruise control and pre sense front
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control and r::!> page 125 is activated. It is a lways the
Audi pre sense front driver who is responsible for pulling away
safely and maintaining a safe speed and
distance from other road users. The pur-
pose of pre sense front is to assist the driv-
er. The driver must always intervene man-
ually to avoid an impending collision. As
the driver you are always responsible for
braking in good time.
- For safety reasons, the adaptive cruise
control must not be used on roads with a
Fig. 126 Front of vehicle: Sensor lot of bends or in poor weather or diffi-
cult or slippery driving conditions (such
These general notes apply to the adaptive
as ice, fog, loose grit or gravel, heavy
cru ise control and pre sense front*
rain, etc.) - risk of accident!
cf;> page 125.
- When you take a turn-off, drive along a
The area surrounding the radar sensor motorway exit lane or pass through road-
cf;> Fig. 126 must be kept free of stickers, de- work sections, please temporarily switch
posits and any other substances which could off the adaptive cruise control system.
impair the function of the adaptive cruise con- This is to ensure that the vehicle does
trol and pre sense front systems. Notes on not accelerate to the cruising speed in
cleaning c:> page 204. Please bear the above such situations.
in mind if technical modifications are made to - The adaptive cruise control system will
the front of the vehicle . not brake the vehicle automatically if you
rest your foot on the accelerator pedal.
The fun ctionality of the adaptive cruise con-
Resting your foot on the accelerator ped-
trol and pre sense front systems is restricted
al overrides the speed and distance con-
in certain situations:
trol function. .,..
Audi adaptive cruise control 117

- The adaptive control system does not re- Stationary vehicles


act and the functionality of pre sense Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control and
Audi pre sense fronl
front is restricted when you approach
stationary traffic, such as the end of a
traffic jam.
- The adaptive cruise control and pre sense
front systems do not react to pedes-
trians, animals or crossing or oncoming
traffic.
- Reflecting objects, such as crash barriers,
the entrance to a tunnel, heavy rain or
ice can impair the function of the radar
Fig. 128 Example: Vehicle changing lane and vehicle
sensor.
stationary

CD CAUTION Adaptive cruise control


Impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel The adaptive cruise control system only reacts
arches or underbody can cause misalign- to moving objects or vehicles which have al-
ment of the sensor. The adaptive cruise ready been detected as moving objects. For
control and pre sense front systems can be example, if a vehicle @ , which has already
impaired as a result. Have the systems been detected by the adaptive cruise control,
checked by a qualified workshop. turns off or changes Lane and another station-
ary vehicle @ is located in front of that vehi-
When driving through a corner cle, the system will not react to the stationary
Applies to vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and vehicle. Press the brake pedal to slow down.
Audi pre sense front
Pre sense front
Pre sense front only reacts to stationary ob-
jects at low speed.

Adaptive cruise control


Description
Applies to vehicles. with Audi adaptive cruise control

Fig. 127 Example: Driving Into a bend

When driving into a bend <:!) Fig. 127 and driv-


ing out of a bend, the adaptive cruise control
system may react to a vehicle travelling in the
next lane and therefore brake the vehicle. You
can prevent this from happening by accelerat-
ing briefly.
Fig. 129 Sensor range

What can the adaptive cruise control do?


The adaptive cruise control uses a radar and
video camera . The radar is subject to certain
system Limitations <:!) page 116. ~
118 Audi adaptive cruise control

When there is no t raffic in front, the adaptive Switching on/off


cruise control works just li ke a norma l cruise Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cru ise control
control system by maintaining a constant
speed. When you draw closer to a vehicle in
front which is detected by the system, the
adaptive cruise control matches your speed to
that vehicle by automatically applying the
brakes, and then maintains a constant dis-
tance (which you can adjust in the setti ngs).
As soon as it detects no more veh icles in
front, the adaptive cruise control accelerates
back up to the cruising speed . Fig. 1 30 Control lever: Switching on/off

Applies to vehicles w ith automatic gearbox:


In congested traffic, t he adaptive cruise con-
trol can brake down to a standstill (subject to
general system limitations) and accelerate
again under certain conditions ~ page 120,
Vehicles with automatic gearbox.

In addition, the start/stop system may oper-


ate in the usual way while the vehicle is at a
standstill page 98. Fig . 1 31 Instrument cluster display: adaptive cru ise
control
Which functions can the driver control?
When you switch on the adaptive cruise con- Depend ing on the equipment in your vehicle,
trol, you can set your current speed as the different cruising speeds may apply t o the
"cruising speed" Q page 118, Switching on/ adaptive cruise control:
off. ACC (assist package): You can set any speed 1 l
While you are driving, you can interrupt the between 30 and 200 km/h.
cruise control c::> page 121 or change the ACC: You can set any speed 1 > between 30 and
speed setting Q page 120 at any t ime. 150 km/h.
You can a lso change t he fo llowing settings: Ind icator lamps and messages in the instru-
- Distance c::> page 122 ment cluster display will provide you with in-
- Driving program c:> page 122 formation about the current driving situation
- Driving mode Q page 122 and settings.

Switching on the adaptive cruise control


.. Pull the lever towards you to position CD
c::> Fig. 130. ACC: standby will appear on the
instrument cluster display.

1) The s peed limits vary in different countries and de


pend on t he units of speed on t he speedometer.
Audi adaptive cruise control 119

Setting the speed and activating the The graphical display shows you when a vehi-
cru ise control cle in front is detected and indicates how far
... To set the current speed as the cruising away you are from that vehicle:
speed, press the lsETI button c) Fig. 130. No vehicle - No vehicle has been detected in
The speed setting is indicated by the LEDs front.
@ in the speedometer and is also shown
briefly in the system status indicator @ Vehicle In white A vehicle has been detected
c) Fig. 131 . in front.
.,. Vehicles with automatic gearbox: To activate Vehicle in red - Driver intervention prompt
the cruise control when the vehicle is sta- c) page 123.
tionary, the Audi hold assist* function must
have been activated or you must press the The two a rrows on the scale indicate the
brake pedal. distance to the vehicle in front. If there is no
vehicle in front, no arrows will be shown. If a
Switching off the adaptive cruise control vehicle is detected in front, the arrows will be
... Push the lever away from you to position @ on the scale .
until it engages. The message ACC: off will The green area of the scale represents the dis-
appear. tance setting (for information on how to
The LEDs indicating the stored speed in the change the distance setting, refer to
c) page 122). When the actual distance is
speedometer dial will go out.
shorter (or is likely to become shorter) than
the distance selected, the arrows move into
@ Warning and indicator lamps
the red area of the scale.
-The adaptive cruise control is switched
on. No vehicle has been detected in front. A .&. WARNING -
constant cru ising s peed is being maintained.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: If you
-A vehicle in front has been detected. The press the ISETI button at a speed of less
adaptive cru ise cont rol regulates the speed to than 30 km/h, the vehicle will automati-
maintain a constant distance to the vehicle in cally accelerate up to the minimum speed
front, and brakes and accelerates the vehicle setting of 30 km/h.
automatically.
l Note
all -Automatic gearbox: The adaptive cruise
control is switched on. A vehicle in front has - The speed setting is cleared for safety
been detected. Your vehicle is stationary and reasons when you switch off the ignition
will not be set in motion again automatically. or the adaptive cruise control system.
- When the adaptive cruise control is acti-
- The adaptive cruise control alone is not
vated, you cannot switch on the ESC
able to brake the vehicle sufficiently to main-
sport mode.
tain a safe distance to the vehicle in front. You
must intervene c) page 123, Driver interven-
tion prompt.

Graphical display in instrument cluster


If the adaptive cruise control ls not shown on
the Instrument cluster display, you can call up
the display using the controls on the multi-
function steering wheel c) page 29.
120 Audi adaptiv e cruise control

Setting a new speed (D Note


Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control
You cannot switch on the adaptive cruise
control during a gear change.
e

Vehicles with automatic gearbox
Applies to vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control

The adaptive cruise control assists you when


driving in congested traffic. When the adap-
tive cruise control has detected a vehicle in
G front and that vehicle stops, it applies the
Fig. 132 Control lever: Setting a new speed bra kes (subject to system limitations) and
holds the vehicle at a standstill. When the
... Briefly push the lever up or down to increase
sta rt/stop system is active, the engine is
or reduce the speed in steps.
switched off under certain conditions. The en-
... To increase or reduce the speed quickly,
gine can be switched on again ...
press and hold the lever up or down unti l
the red LED @ reaches the desired speed ... by the start/stop system r::!> page 98.
r::!> page 118, Fig. 131. ... ifthe vehicle in front drives away.
... if you pull the lever to position @
Following any changes, the new stored speed <:!> page 121, Fig. 133 .
will be displayed briefly in the system status ... if you tap the accelerator pedal.
indicator r::!> page 118, Fig. 131 @.
To resume adaptive cruise control mode when
the engine is running:
Vehicles with manual gearbox
... Tap the accelerator pedal, or
Applies to vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
... Pull the lever towards you to position @
The adaptive cruise control is available in sec- <:!> page 121, Fig. 133.
ond gear or higher (when driven in the normal
Using the adaptive cruise control to set
engine speed range).
the vehicle in motion 1l
When the adaptive cruise control is switched
The message ACC: automatic go appears
on, you must press the clutch pedal in the
briefly after the adaptive cruise control has
normal way In order to change gear. The adap-
detected an object in front and braked the ve-
tive cruise control will remain activated when
hicle to a standstill. In this mode, your vehicle
you change gear or press the clutch peda l.
can drive off automatically.
You do not need to press the accelerator after
If the message ACC: automatic go is on the
selecting a gear andl releasing the clutch. The
display and the vehicle in front drives off, your
adaptive cruise control will regulate the speed
vehicle will automatically start moving <=> & .
for you.
You can reactivate the ACC: automatic go
The adaptive cruise control will be switched
message briefly by pulling the lever to posi-
off automatically if you keep the clutch pedal
tion @ page 121, Fig . 133.
depressed for too long or if you change gears
incorrectly or use the clutch pedal improperly. The ACC: automatic go mode is deactivated if
you press the brake pedal. .,..

1) Not available on vehicles for some markets.


Audi adaptive crui se control 121

Conditions for deactivation of the system control is switched on, for instance in order to
For safety reasons, the adaptive cruise control overt ake a vehicle.
is deactivated when the vehicle is stationary: .,. To accelerate manually, pull the lever t o-
wards you to position @ and hold it in this
- if the driver's door is opened.
position. The message ACC: override will ap-
- if the vehi cle remains stationary for over
pear. Or:
3 m inutes.
... Press the accelerator.
- if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled .
... To reactivate the cruise control, release the
A_
I= -
WARNING
- I
lever or take your foot off the accelerator.

If the ACC: automatic go11 message ap- Interrupting the cruise control while
pea rs, your vehicle will sta rt moving even driving
if there is an obstacle between your car ... Move the lever to posit ion @ . The message
and the vehicle in front - risk of accident! ACC: standby will appear. Or:
... App ly the brakes.
(0 Note ... To reactivate the cruise control and acceler-
- If your vehicle does not start moving as ate back up to the target speed, move the
expected with the adaptive cruise con- lever to position @ .
trol, even though the ACC: automatic
Interrupting the cruise control while
gol> message is displayed, you can set
stationary
the vehicle In motion by tapping the ac-
celerator with your foot. Applies to vehicles with a utomatic gearbox:
- The start /stop system operates normally ... Push the lever away from you to position @ .
while you are driving with the adaptive The message ACC: standby will appear.
cruise control. ... To reactivate the cruise cont ro l, press the
brake peda l and pull the lever towards you
Interrupting the cruise control to position @ .
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control
A WARNING
It is dangerous to activate the cru ise con-
trol and accelerate back up to a target
speed which is too high for the current
road, traffic or weather conditions - risk of
accident!

Fig. 13 3 Control lever

Important: The adaptive cruise cont rol m ust


be on .

Overriding the cruise control


Occasionally you may want to exceed the stor-
ed cruising speed whi le the adaptive cruise

ll Not available on vehicles for so me ma rkets.


122 Aud i adaptive cruise control

Setting the distance distance 3: This setting is equiva-


c:::::;, _ _ c:::::;,_

Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control lent to a distance of 50 metres at a speed of
100 km/h (time-based distance of 1.8 sec-
onds) .
dista nce 4: This setting is equiva-
c:::::;,____c:::::;,
lent to a distance of 67 metres at a speed of
100 km/h (time-based distance of 2.4 sec-
onds).

A WARNING
When setting the distance, the driver is re-
Fig. 134 Control lever: Setting the distance
sponsible for adhering to the locally appli-
... To display the current distance setting, cable laws and regulations.
briefly press the rocker switch ~ Fig. 134.
To increase or reduce the distance by one (D Note
level, briefly press the rocker switch to the Distance 3 is set automatically each time
right or left again. The distance between the the ignition is switched on. If you wou ld
two vehicles will be shown on the instru- prefer to have a different distance as the
ment cluster display. default setting, you can have the adaptive
cruise control menu extended/activa ted
When you draw closer to a vehicle detected in by a qualified workshop.
front, the adaptive cruise control matches
your speed to that vehicle by a pplying the
Setting the driving program
brakes, a nd t hen maintains a constant dis-
Applies to vehicles: with Audi adapt ive cruise cont rol
tance (which you can adjust in the settings). If
the vehicle in front accelerates, the adaptive You can select different driving programs for
cruise control will also accelerate, up to the the adapt ive cruise control on veh icles with-
target speed you have specified . out Audi drive select*.
The higher the speed, the higher the distance ... On the MMI*, select: IMENU I button >con-
in metres ~ .& . We recommend you to use the trol button Systems I Car systems > Driver
setting : distance 3. You will then be follow ing assist > Adaptive cruise control > Driving
the general recommendations of automobile program > comfort/standard/ dynamic.
clubs, traffic authorities, etc.
The actua l distance maintained by the adap- Selecting the driving mode
tive cruise control can be longer or shorter, Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control

depending on the traffic situation, your cur- On vehicles with drive select, the driving pro-
rent speed, and the driving style of the driver gram for the adaptive cru ise control is selec-
in front. ted via the driving mode.
distance 1 : This setting is equiva-
c:::::;,_ c:::::;,___
... Select t he desired driving mode with the ro-
lent to a distance of 28 metres at a speed of tary pushbutton: efficiency*, comfort, auto,
100 km/h (time-based distance of 1 second). dyna mic or i ndividual* ~ poge 136.
distance 2: This setting is equiva-
c:::::;,__ c:::::;,__
lent to a distance of 36 metres at a speed of
100 km/h (time-based distance of 1.3 sec-
onds) .
Audi adaptive cruise control 123

Driver intervention prompt been exceeded. The adaptive cruise control


Applies to vehicles: with Audi adaptive cruise control cannot be switched on .
ii) ACC: only available in D, Sor M
Move the selector lever to position D/S or M.

Ii) ACC: parking brake applied


The adaptive cruise control system is deactiva
ted if the parking brake is applied. The adap
tive cruise control will be available again when
the parking brake is released.
Fig . 135 Instrument cluster: Driver intervention fl ACC: currently unavailable. Stabilisation
prompt control input

In some situations the adaptive cruise control This message appears if t he e lectronic stabili-
system alone is not able to brake the vehicle sation control (ESC) intervenes. In t his case,
sufficiently to mainta in a safe distance to t he the adaptive cruise control will automatically
vehicle in front. The driver Intervention be switched off.
prompt warns you to take action in these s it-
llJ ACC off: manual control!
uations.
This message appears if the vehicle rolls back-
The warning lamp . and instru ment cluster
wards when driving away on a slight gradient,
display draw your attention to t he danger
even t hough the adaptive cruise control is ac-
C) Fig. 135. In addition, a tone will sound.
tive. Press the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
Press the brake pedal to slow down.
cle from rolling back or colliding with an ob-
ject behind.
Driver messages
Applies to vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
ID ACC: currently unavailable. Speed too
Low
II ACC: not available This message appears on vehicles with man-
The system cannot detect objects reliably and ual g earbox if the current speed is too Low for
will be deactivated. The sensor is out of align- ACC mode.
ment or defective. Drive to a qualified work-
You cannot store speed settings below 30 km/
shop and have the fault rectified.
h. The cruise control system switches off if t he
II ACC: currently unavailable - no sensor vi- speed falls below 20 km/h .
sion
II ACC: available from 2nd gear up
llJ ACC and Audi pre sense: currently un- The adaptive crui se control only operates in
available. No sensor vision
2nd gear or higher (on vehicles with manual
These messages appear if the radar sensor vi- gearbox).
s ion is impaired, e.g . by leaves, snow, heavy
road spray or dirt. Clean the sensor
llJ ACC: engine speed
C) poge 116, Fig. 126. This message appears if the driver does not
change gear in time when the adaptive cruise
llJ ACC: currently unavailable. Gradient too control accelerates or brakes the vehicle. The
steep
adaptive cruise control is switched off if the
The maximum possible road gradient for safe engin e speed is not maintained within t h e
operation of the adaptive cruise control has permissible range. This is indicated by a warn-
ing tone. .,.
124 Aud i adaptive cruise control

fl) ACC: clutch pedal pressed


Vehicles with manual gearbox: Cruise control
mode is deactivated if the clutch pedal is
pressed for a relatively long period .

Three white dots aptPear if a setting made
with the control lever cannot be implemen-
ted. This might happen after stopping, for ex-
ample, if the adaptive cru ise control cannot
set the vehicle in motion because the driver
has unbuckled the seat belt.
Door open

Vehicles with automatic gearbox: You cannot


switch on the adapt1ive cruise control if the ve-
hicle is stationary and a door is open .
Audi pre sense 125

Audi pre sense Drive select: the activation threshold is differ-


ent in dynamic mode.
Introduction
Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense basic or Audi pre _8. WARNING
sense fronl
The protection provided by pre sense basic
Pre sense basic and pre sense front can take is still subject to the prevailing physical
action to protect the occupants in certain haz- limits. It is a driver assist function and
ardous conditions, subject to the limitations cannot prevent a collision on its own . Do
of the system. not let the extra safety provided tempt you
into taking any risks when driving - th is
Because the different on-board systems are
can cause accidents.
networked, pre sense basic can detect critical
situations and take action to prepare the occu- - Due to inherent system limitations, false
pants for a potential impending collision. activation of the system is possible.

Pre sense front uses a radar sensor and video


camera*. It remains active (subject to the lim-
- Certain pre sense basic functions are de-
itations of the system) even when the adap-
activated when the ESC sport mode is
tive cruise control* is switched off.
switched on and when reversing.
- The functions of the pre sense basic sys-
General notes tem may also be unavailable if a fault de-
General notes velops in the ESC system or airbag con-
Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense front or Audi trol unit.
adaptive cruise control - For pre sense basic, please note that if
the front passenger's airbag has been
_8.
1--
WARNING
- 1
deactivated, the reversible belt tensioner
Please observe the general safety warn- on the passenger's side will be deactiva-
ings on ~ page 116, General notes. ted as well.

Audi pre sense basic Audi pre sense front


Description Description
Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense basic Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense front or Audi
adaptive cruise control
Pre sense basic functions are activated at
Pre sense front informs you if you are too
speeds above 30 km/h.
close to the vehicle in front for an extended
The system can activate the following func- period. In certain s ituations it can warn you if
tions in certain situations: there is a danger of collision, and can initiate
the application of the brakes.
- Seat belt tensioning (e.g. during hard brak-
ing): The seat belts on the front seats have Given sufficient time to react, it can assess a
reversible tensioners. Provided an accident dangerous situation where a vehicle in front
does not occur, the !belts are loosened again brakes suddenly or where you are driving fast
slig htly and kept ready for activation. and approach a much slower vehicle. The pre
- Windows and sun roof* automatic close sense front will not react if it is not in a posi-
function (e.g. during understeer or over- tion to detect the danger.
steer) : The sun roof* is closed completely
but a small gap is left when the windows are
closed.
126 Audi pre s ense

Warnings creasing brake forcen, in order to slow the


Applies to vehicles: with Audi pre sense front or Audi vehicle down and take the impact out of a
adaptive cruise control potential collision. In addition, the message
Audi pre sense Input will appear.
- At low road speeds, pre sense front can lni
tiate a fu ll brake applicationll just before an
impending collision.
- If the pre sense front detects that you are
not braking hard enough in the event of an
impending collision, it will increase the
brake pressure.

Fig. 136 lnstrumentduster: Collision warning A_ WARNING


-
- The protection provided by pre sense
The system draws the driver's attention to
front is still subject to the prevailing
hazardous situations:
physical limits. It is a driver assist func
- Vehicles with adaptive cruise control: A d is tion and cannot prevent a collision on its
ta nce warning is given if you are too close to own. The driver must always intervene
the vehicle in front for more than just a mo personally. As the driver you are always
ment. If the vehicle in front were to brake responsible for braking in good time. Do
hard, a collision would no longer be avoida not let the extra safety provided tempt
ble. This is indicate d by a warning lamp . you into taking any risks when driving -
- A collisio n warning is given if the vehicle in this can cause accidents.
front is much slower than you or if it brakes - Due to inherent system limitations, false
hard. If this warning is given, you may need activation of the system is possible.
to take evasive action or brake hard to avoid - Please note that the sensor is not always
a collision. The driver message Aud i pre able to detect all objects which may rep-
sense fillDist a nce! c;) Fig. 136 and a warn- resent a potential hazard (accident risk).
ing tone draw your attention to the danger. - Pre sense front does not react to people,
On vehicles equipped with adaptive cruise animals, crossing traffic or objects that
control, the warning lamp . will also light cannot be clearly recognised
up. ~ page 116, General notes.

If you do not t ake appropriate action in time, - Reflecting objects, such as crash barriers,
the pre sense front will assist by applying the the entrance to a tunnel, heavy rain or
brakes. ice can impair the function of the radar
sensor a nd the ability of the system to
- In the event of an impending collision, an detect a collision risk.
acut e warning will be given initially in the
form of a brake jolt . In addition, the instru-
ment cluster display c;) Fig. 136 draws your
CD CAUTION
Impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel
attention to the danger. On vehicles equip-
arches or underbody can cause misalign-
ped with adaptive cruise control, the warn-
ment of the sensor. This can impair the
ing lamp . will also light up.
function of the pre sense front system .
- If you do not respond to the acute warning,
Have the systems checked by a qualified
the pre sense front can, subject to general
workshop.
system limitations, apply the brakes with in-

11 Not availa ble on vehicles for some markets.


Audi pre sense 127

(D Note (0 Note
- The automatic brake application with in- - The pre sense is deactivated if you re--
creasing brake force can be cancelled by strict or switch off the ESC c) page 183.
applying the brakes yourself or by press- - Switch off pre sense while the vehicle is
ing the accelerator firmly or by taking being loaded onto a car transporter,
evasive action. t rain or ferry boat, etc. This prevents the
- For driver messages relating to pre sense pre sense system from activating a warn-
refer to c) page 12 7. ing in an inappropriate situation.
- Please note that pre sense front can ap-
ply the brakes unexpectedly. Always se- Driver messages
cure your luggage to prevent damage Applies to vehicles. with Audi pre sense or Audi adaptive
and possible injury. cruise control

- Certain pre sense front functions are de-


Audi pre sense: currently unavailable. No
activated when the ESC sport mode is
sensor vision
switched on and when reversing.
- The functions of pre sense front will be This message appears if the radar sensor vi-
unavailable if a fa11.J lt develops in the s ion is impaired, e.g. by leaves, snow, heavy
adaptive cruise control* c) page 123 I road spray or dirt. Clean the sensor
c) page 127. c) page 116, Fig. 126.

Audi pre sense: off


Settings on the infotainment system
This message appears in certain situations,
Applies to vehicles. with Audi pre sense front or Audi
adaptive cruise control e.g . when the ESC is switched to sport mode
c> page 183.
~ Select the following on the MMI*: I MENU I
button > control button Systems I Car sys- Audi pre sense: system fault!
t ems > Driver assist> Audi pre sense. This message appears if the functions of the
pre sense system are impaired. An impair-
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
ment can occur, for example, if a sensor fails .
two different operating concepts are used:
If the message remains displayed permanent-
- Concept 1: When the Audi pre sense is
ly, drive to a qualified workshop and have the
switched off via the Syst em setting, it re-
fault rectified.
mains deactivated the next time you switch
on the ignition.
- Concept 2: When the Audi pre sense is
switched off via the System setting, it is au-
tomatically activated again the next time
you switch on the ignition.

Switching the system on/off


System - Audi pre sense can be switched on/
off. This allows you to deactivate the early
warning and prevent Audi pre sense from ap-
plying the brakes automatically.
Early warning - The distance and collision
warnings can be switched on/off permanent-
ly.
128 Audi active l ane assist

Audi active lane assist only be initiated if the system dete,c ts a


lane marking on the side in question.
Lane departure - Variations in the road surface or objects
warning feature on the road may be misinterpreted as
lane markings. In this case, the steering
Description
may be corrected unexpectedly or not at
Applies to vehicles. with Audi active lane assist
all.
The active lane assist uses a camera in the - The camera's view may occasionally be
windscreen to detect lane markings (subject obstructed, for example by vehicles trav
to general system limitations). If you ap- elling in front, rain, snow, heavy road
proach one of the detected lane markings, the spray, adverse light or a dirty wind-
system corrects the steering to warn you that screen. If this happens, the active lane
the vehicle might be about to cross one of the assist may not detect the lane markings
markings. You can override this steering input or may respond incorrectly.
at any time. The steering wheel vibrates - In certain circumstances, for instance if
slightly if you cross a lane marking. The vibra- visibility is poor, the setting for the
tion warning must be activated beforehand in steering Input may be switched from
the MMI*. The active lane assist is functional "early" to "late" l).
when it detects a demarcation line on at least - In certain driving conditions, such as ruts
one side of the lane in which you are driving. in the road surface, adverse cambers or
The system does not warn you if you operate side winds, the assistance provided by
the turn signal before crossing a lane mark- the steering correction may be insuffi-
ing. In this case, it assumes that you intend to cient to keep the vehicle in the middle of
change lanes. the lane.
- For safety reasons, the active lane assist
As the system is designed for driving on mo- must not be used in poor weather or in
torways and other major roads, it is only ac- difficult or slippery road conditions (such
tive above a speed of about 65 km/h (may as ice, fog, loose grit or gravel, heavy
vary in different export markets). rain, snow, etc.) - risk of accident!

_A WARNING
- The system Initiates a corrective steering
input to warn the driver that the vehicle
is about to leave the lane. As the driver
you a re a lways responsible for staying in
your own lane.
- The system can assist you to keep the ve
hicle in the lane, however it is not capa
ble of driving on its own. Never take your
hands off the steering wheel.
- In certain situations, e.g. during heavy
braking, the system may not correct the
steering.
- In certain circumstances, not all of the
lane markings may be detected by the
camera. A corrective steering input can

l) This function is not available on all export versions.


Audi active lane assist 129

Switching on/off - The bend is too tight.


Applies to vehicles: with Audi active lane assist - You have taken your hands off the steering
wheel.
i
i i Note
- Make sure that the camera window
<:;>Fig. 138 is not covered with stickers or
similar objects. Notes on cleaning
e>page 204.
- On vehicles for some export markets:
once the system is activated, it is "ready"
Fig. 137 Turn signal lever: Button for active lane assist each time the ignition is switched o n.

Instrument cluster display


Applies to vehicles: with Audi ac tive lane assist

Fig. 138 Windscreen: Camera window for active lane


assist

.. Press the button Q Fig. 137 to switch the


system on/off. The indicator lamp . or . Fig. 139 Instrument cluster: Monochrome display

in the instrument cluster will light up or go


out.

Indicator lamps
Ready: The indicat or lamp lights up when
the system is fully functional. The system is
ready to intervene .
Not ready: The ind icator lamp lights up
when the system is switched on but not ready Fig. 140 Jnstrum ent cluster: Multi-coloured display
to intervene. The causes for this can include
the following: Different controls are used to operate the ac-
tive Lane assist, depending on the equipment
- There are no lane markings.
in your vehicle:
- The system cannot detect the relevant lane
markings (e.g. temporary markings for road - Controls on windscreen wiper lever
works or markings obscured by snow, dirt, c:> page 28, or
rain or adverse light). - Control buttons on multi-function steering
- The vehicle's speed is below 65 km/h, the wheel* c:> page 30
speed at which the lane assist system is acti-
vated (the threshold may vary in different Monochrome display
export markets). Refer to c:) Fig. 139.
- The lane is narrower than 2.5 m or wider
than 5.5 m.
130 Audi active lane assis t

@ Solid lines: The active lane assist is - The inside of the camera window is misted
switched on and ready to give warnings up. In this case, wait for the camera window
on the side indicated. to demist before switching on the active
lane assist system again.
@ Flashing line (left or right): The active
lane assist warns you by vibrating the - Due to the road conditions, the system has
steering wheel before you cross the not been able to detect the lane markings
lane demarcation. for a long period. Do not switch the active
lane assist system on again before the lane
Unfilled line(s): The active lane assist is
markings are discernible.
switched on but not ready to give warn-
in gs. Pit Audi active lane assist: currently unavail-
No lines: The active lane assist is able
switched off. A t e mporary fault is preventing the act ive lane
assist system from functioning. Try switching
Multi-coloured display
on the active lane assist system again !later.
Refer to ~ Fig. 140.
Pit Audi active lane ass ist: system fault!
@ White solid lines: The active lane assist
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have
is switched on and ready to give warn-
the fault rectified .
ings on the side indicated.
@ Red line (left or right): The active lane Pit Audi active lane assist: please continue
assist warns you by vibrating the steer- steering vehicle
ing wheel before you cross the lane de- This message will appear if you do not steer
marcation. the vehicle yourself. In this case, the active
Grey solid lines: The active lane assist is lane assist will switch to "not ready for warn-
switched on but not ready for warning. ing" but will not be deactivated completely.
No lines: The active lane assist is The system can assist you to keep the vehicle
switched off. in the lane. However it is your own responsi-
bility to steer and control the vehicle.
Driver messages in the ins trument cluster
display
Setting the steering input time and
Should the active lane assist experience a vibration warning
fault, the indicator Lamp B in the instrument Applies to vehicles with Audi active la ne assist
cluster display will go out and one of the fol- You con change the active lane assist settings
lowing messages will appear: on t he MM! to suit your individual preferen-
B Audi active lane assist: currently unavail- ces.
able. No camera view
... Select: IMENUI button> control button Sys
This message is displayed when the camera is terns I Car systems > Driver a ssist > Audi
no longer functional after the system has con- active lane assist.
tinuously failed to detect the lane markings.
Steering inputl>
This can have the following causes:
early: If this setting is selected, a continuous
- The outside of the camera window
steering input assists the driver to keep the
~ page 129, Fig. 138 is dirty or frosted. Re-
vehicle in the middle of the lane. ~
move dirt or ice from this area of the wind-
screen.

ll This function Is not available on all export versions.


Audi active lane assist 131

late: If this setting Is selected, the steering is


not corrected until just before a wheel touch-
es a detected lane marking.

Vibration warning
You can switch the additional steering wheel
vibration warning on/off.

_& WARNING
1~~ - 1
W hen the vibration warning is switched
off, no visual warni ngs are given in the in-
strument cluster display if you cross a lane
marking.

@ Note
Your personal settings are stored automat-
ically and assigned to the remote control
key which is being used (only applies to
some countries).
132 Audi side assist

Audi side assist lamp on the relevant exterior mirror w ill light
up at low intensity.
Lane change assist
The intensity of the warning lamp in this in-
feature formation mode is kept relatively low, so that
Description it d oes not distract you whi le you a re looking
App lies to vehicles: with Audi side assist at t he road in front.

Warning mode
If you operate the tu rn signal, t he s ide assist
will wo rn you if it reg iste rs what it judges t o
be a critica l vehicle. In t his case, the warning
lamp on the relevant exte rior mirror wi ll flash
brig ht ly. Please check the situation in t he ex-
terior m irror and by looking back over yo ur
shoulder c:;, .& in General notes on page 133.
Fig. 141 Area covered by the radar sensors

- You can adjust the brightness of the


warning lamp on the exterior mirror
<=> page 134.
- Please refer to the notes on the use of a
towing bracket c:;, page 133 .

The side assist function assists the driver in


monitoring following traffic and the blind
spots on both s ides of the car. Within certain
limits imposed by the syst e m, it warns you if
it detects vehicles approaching qu ickly or trav-
e lling at about the same speed as your own
vehicle in the area covered by the sensors
c:> Fig. 141 . If it judges a lane change to be
critica l, the warning lamp @ on the exterior
mirror lig hts up c:;, f;g. 142.

The warning lamp on t he left-hand mirror as-


sists the driver when changing lane towards
the left and the wanning lamp on the right-
hand mirror assists the driver when chang ing
lane towards the rigrht.

Information mode
As long as you do not operate the turn signal,
the side ass ist wi ll merely inform you of the
presence of veh ides that it has detected and
judges to be critical. In this case, the warning
Audi side assist 133

General notes side assist will give a warning for the vehicles
Applies to vehicles: with Audi side assist it has detected at the latest when they enter
the "blind spot".

Other vehicles being overtaken


When you are overtaking another vehicle
slowly, with a speed differential of less than
15 km/h, the warning lamp in the exterior
mirror will light up as soon as the other vehi-
cle enters your blind spot.
If you are overtaking another vehicle quickly,
with a speed differential of more than 1 S km/
h, the warning lamp will not light up.

System limitations
The radar sensors a re designed for normal
lane widths and monitor the lanes immed iate-
ly to the left and right of your vehicle. In cer-
tain situations the warning lamp on one of the
exter ior mirrors may light up even if no vehi-
Fig. 14 3 Driving situations cle is travelling in an area that could be critical
in the event of a lane change. For example:
- When you are travelling in a narrow lane or
when you are not travelling in the centre of
the lane. In this case the system may moni-
tor another lane and register a vehicle that
is not in fact travelling in an adjacent Lane.
- When you are driving into a bend. The side
assist may react to a vehicle two lanes away.
Fig. 144 Rear of the vehicle: Location of the sensors
- If the system detects other objects (such as
(example) crash barriers, etc).
- In [poor weather conditions. The functionali-
The s ide assist is active above a speed of ty of the side assist is then restricted.
a bout 30 km/h.
The radar se n so rs ~ Fig. 144 must not be ob-
@ Vehicles approaching from behind structed by stickers, bicycle racks, deposits o r
any other substances which could impair the
In certain cases, a vehicle is judged to be criti-
function of the system. The side assist must
cal in the event of a Lane change even if it is
not be used when towing a trailer. For notes
st ill some dist ance away. The faster a vehicle
on cleaning, please refer to c:) page 204.
approaches, the earlier the warning will ap-
pear on the exterior mirror.
&_ WARNING
@ Vehicles moving at a similar speed - Always watch the road and the area sur-
The warning Lamp in the relevant exterior mir- rounding the vehicle. The side assist fea-
ror will warn you of vehicles that are moving ture is not a substitute for the full con-
with the flow of traffic at about the same centration of the driver. The driver is al-
speed as you if they are judged to be critical in ways responsible for the safety of lane
the event of a lane change. In all cases, the changes and other manoeuvres. .,.
134 Audi side assist

- In certain situations, the system may not Adjusting brightness of warning lamp
function properly, or the functionality of Applies to vehicles. with Aud i side assist

the system may be restricted. For exam- The brightness of the warning lamp can be
ple: adjusted on the MMI.
- If other vehicles are approaching very
quickly, or if you are overtaking other Select: IMENU I button> control button Sys-
vehicles quickly. The warning lamp may tems I Car systems > Driver assist > Audi
not light up in time. side a ssist.
- In poor weather condit ions, such as
The brightness of the warning lamp in both
heavy rain, snow or road spray.
the information and warning modes is regula-
-If you are travelling in very wide lanes, ted automatically according to the ambient
in tight bends or over crests. The sys- light level. If you are in very dark or very light
tem may not detect vehicles in the ad- surroundings when you adjust the brightness
jacent lane because they are out s ide of the warning lamp, the automatic bright-
the area covered by the sensors. ness cont rol may already have reached the
lowest or t he brightest setting. In such a case
CD CAUTION it is possible that you won't notice a differ-
Impacts or damage to the bumper, wheel ence whi le you are adjusting the brightness or
arches or underbody can cause misalign- that you will on ly notice it once the light sur-
ment of the sensors. This can impair the roundings have changed.
functionality of the system. Have the sys-
Please adjust the brightness of the warning
tems checked by a qualified workshop.
lamp for the information mode so that it does
not distract you while you are looking at the
i Note
road in front. When you change the bright-
The warning lamps on the exterior mirrors ness, the warning lamp on the exterior mirror
may not be properly visible if tinted foil is will light up briefly with the intensity set for
affixed to the side windows on the driver's the information mode. The intensity of the
or passenger's side. lamp in the warning mode is linked to the in-
tensity in the information mode and is adjus-
Switching on and off ted automatically.
Apploes to vehicles with Audi side assis t
(!) Note
The system can be switched on and off on the
MMI*. - The side assist is not active whi le t he set-
t ings a re being adjusted.
Select: IMENUI button> control button Sys-
- Your personal settings are stored auto-
tems I Car systems > Driver assist > Audi matically and assigned to the remote
side assist. Select off to switch off the sys- contro l key which is being used.
tem.

The warning lamps in the exterior mirrors Driver messages


light up briefly each time the ignition is Applies to vehicles; with Audi side assist

switched on to indicate that the system is ac-


Should the side assist be deactivated auto-
tivated.
matically, a driver message will appear in the
instrument cluster display. .,..
Audi side assist 135

$1 Audi side assist: currently unavailable.


No sensor vision
The radar sensors are blocked. The area in
front of the sensors must not be obstructed
by bicycle racks, stickers, deposits or any oth-
er substances. If necessary, clean the area in
front of the sensors page 133, Fig. 144.

@!Audi side assist: currently unavailable


The side assist is temporarily inoperative and
cannot be switched on (for instance if the bat-
tery is not sufficiently charged).

@I Audi side assist: system fault!


The system cannot detect vehicles reliably and
will be deactivated. The sensors are out of
alignment or defective. Have the system
checked by a qualified workshop soon.

$1 Audi side assist: not available when


towing
The side assist function will be switched off
automatically when the electrical connector
for the trailer socket is plugged in on vehicles
with a factory-fitted towing bracket. If the
towing bracket is not factory-fitted the side
assist function may not be switched off auto-
matically. The side assist must not be used
when towing a trailer.
136 Audi drive select

Audi drive select Steering


The degree of power assistance can be varied .
Adjusting the vehicle
Various modes are possible c> page 13 7. The
set-up light, indirect steering response in comfort
Introduction mode is particularly suitable on long motor-
Applies to vehicles: with Audi drive select way trips, for instance. The steering has a
t ig h ter, more direct feel in dynamic mode.
Drive select allows you to use d ifferent set-
ups on your vehicle. The four modes efficien- The steering response is even more agile on
cy*, comfort, auto a nd dynamic allow the vehicles with progressive steering*.
driver, for example, to change from a sporty Cornering lig ht*
mode to a more comfortable one via the :I~
button in the centre console or via the MMI*. The cornering light adapts itself to the con-
In add ition, the individual* mode allows you tour of the corner at speeds from approxi-
to adapt the veh icle set-up to suit your per- mately 10 km/h to 110 km/h. The swivel ac-
sona l driving style. For example, you might tion and light distribution are also adjusted
choose to combine a more dynamic eng ine according to the operating mode.
set-up with a lighter steering response. Air conditioner*
The air conditioner runs in a particularly eco-
Description
nomical mode when the efficiency setting is
Applies to vehicles: with Audi drive select
selected. When this function is selected, eco*
The possible vehicle set-up in each mode de- is shown in the display of the automatic air
pends on which equipment is installed on your conditioner.
vehicle. The eng ine and steering are basic
Cruise control system*
pa rts of your vehicle whi ch are a lways inclu-
ded in the set-up. The acceleration response is particu larly eco-
nomical in efficiency* mode.
Engine and automatic gearbox*
Adaptive cruise control*
The response of the engine and automatic
gearbox to accelerator pedal movements will The acceleration mode can be varied from
be more spontaneous or balanced, depending comfort to sport by changing the setting in
on which mode you select. In efficiency* mode drive select. The setting also determines
the automatic gearbox* selects the next gear whether the response of the adaptive cruise
at lower eng ine speeds and the coasting mode control to the driving style of the driver In
is activated page 1 11. This helps to reduce front is more balanced or spontaneous. The
fue l consumption. efficiency* mode chooses a set-up for maxi-
mum economy.
Suspension control (Audi magnetic ride)*
The suspension control uses sensors to collect Note
information on steering movements, braking - On some models the vehicle's maximum
and acceleration input by the driver, road sur- speed can only be obtained in the auto
face quality, road speed and veh icle loading. and dynamic modes.
Wit h drive select you can choose between dy- - On vehicles with manua l gearbox, an E
namic and comfort-oriented suspension set- appears In the gear-cha nge indicator
ups (dynamic and comfort modes), or opt for when efficiency mode is activated.
a more balanced set-up (auto mode).
Audi drive select 13 7

- On vehicles with automatic gearbox, if mode appears in the instrument cluster dis-
you select efficiency* mode when these- play. Or:
lector lever is in position D, E will auto- "" Select the following on the MM!*: IMENU I
matically appear in the instrument clus- but ton > Systems I Car systems > efficien-
ter display. cy, comfort, auto, dynamic or individual*.
- Please note that t he efficiency* mode is
You can change the mode while the vehicle is
not available in towing mode.
stationary or moving. If traffic conditions per
mit, take your foot off the accelerator briefly
Selecting the driving mode
after you change the mode so that the new
Applies to vehicles: wit h Audi drive select
mode is also activated for the engine.
You con choose between efficiency", comfort,
efficiency* - t rims the vehicle to an especially
auto, dynamic and individual*.
fuel-saving set-u p and helps the driver adopt
an economical driving style.
comfort - a lters the vehicle set-up for a more
comfortable ride and is suitable fo r long mo-
torway trips, for instance.

auto - g ives an overall impression of a com-


fortable but dynamic ride and is a good choice
of set-up for everyday use .

Fig. 145 Centre console: Button for drive select dynamic - gives the vehicle a tighter set-up
and is ideal for performance driving.
individual* - ~ page 137.

The last selected mode is still active when you


restart the vehicle.

_.& WARNING
Always keep an eye on the traffic when us-
ing the drive select controls - Risk of acci-
dent!
Fig. 146 MM!: drive select

""To select the mode, p ress the ~:l~.ll button


~ Fig. 145 repeatedlly until the desired

Configuring individual mode

You can configure your own personal vehicle set-up.

"" Select: IMENU Ibutton > Systems I Car sys- The equipment installed on your vehicle de-
tems > control button Set individual. The termines which systems you can select. The
individual* mode will be automatically acti- following table provides an overview of the
vated when you select the menu. characteristics. .,..

The individual* driving mode will automati-


cally be activated when you have finished con-
figur ing the settings.
138 Audi drive select

Systems comfort auto dynamic


Engine and Gearbox Comfortable Balanced Dynamic
Steering Comfortable Balanced Dynamic
Cornering light* Comfortable Balanced Dynam ic
Audi adaptive cruise control* Comfortable Balanced Dynamic
Suspension control* Comfortable Balanced Dynamic
Engine sound* Subdued Subdued/dynamical Dynamic
a) Subdued in posit ion D and dynam ic in positi on S.

(D Note
Your settings in individual* mode are stor-
ed automatically and assigned to the re-
mote control key currently in use.
Parking aids 139

Parking aids tant to ensure that there are no small


children or animals near the vehicle - risk
General notes of accident!
Applies to vehicles: with rear parking aid/parking system
- Always keep a close watch on the area
plus/reversing camera/park assist
around the vehicle and make full use of
Various systems are available to help you t he rear-view mirrors.
when parking or manoeuvring in tight spaces,
depending on the equipment fitted on your
vehicle.
CD CAUTION
- The system may not always be able to
The rear parking aid gives an acoustic warn- detect objects such as the following:
ing if t here are any obstacles behind the car - Chains, trailer draw bars, posts or fen-
~page 140. ces
When you are parking, the parking system - Objects above the sensors, such as wall
plus warns you acoustica lly and optically protrusions, etc.
about obstacles detected In front of and be- - Objects with certa in surfaces or struc-
hind the veh i cle ~ page 140. On vehicles with tures, such as wire fences or powder
park assist, the area detected at the side of snow
the vehicle q page 140, Fig. 147 is a lso - As your car moves closer to low obsta-
monitored. cles, they may disappear from the sen-
sors' field of vision. Please note that you
The reversing camera uses the MMI display to will no longer be warned about these ob-
show a picture of the area behind the vehicle stacles.
captured by the camera. This picture helps you - Impacts or damage to the radiator grille,
to park the vehicle parallel or perpendicular to bumper, wheel arches or underbody can
the roadside. In addition, you are assisted by cause misalignment of the sensors. This
the functions of the parking system plus can impair the effectiveness of the park-
q page 142. ing aids. Have the systems checked by a
The park assist helps you to find suitable qualified workshop.
parking spaces, to manoeuvre the vehicle into
spaces parallel or perpendicular to the road- (D Note
side and to drive out of spaces parallel to t he - In certain situations, a warning may be
kerb q page 146. given by the system even if there is no
obstacle within range of the sensors.
.&. WARNING This can be caused by the following , for
- Always watch the road and the area s ur- instance:
rounding the vehicle. The e lectronic sys- - Certain road surfaces or long grass
tems cannot replace the full concentra- - External ultrasound sources, e.g. from
tion of the driver. The driver is always re- street cleaning vehicles
sponsible for safet y during parking and - Heavy rain or snow or dense exhaust
all other manoeuvres. fumes
- Please note that certain surfaces, such as - To familiarise yourself with the system,
clothing fabrics, cannot be detected or we recommend that you practise parking
displayed by the system - risk of acci- in a quiet location or a car park. The
dent! weather and light conditions should be
- The sensors and cameras have blind good. ~
spots in which neither people nor objects
are registered. It is particularly impor-
14 0 Pa r k ing aid s

- You can change the display and adjust Act ivating


the volume and pitch of the beeps The parking aid is switched on automatically
Q page 150. when reverse gear is engaged. You will hear a
- On vehicles without MMI", you can have brief acknowledgement tone.
these settings changed by an Audi dealer
or qualified workshop.
Parking system plus
- Please refer to the notes on "Towing a
trailer" Q page 151. Description
- There is a slight delay in the picture dis- Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus/pa rk assist
played on the MMI. The parking system plus provides acoustic
- To ensure that the acoustic parking aid and visual assistance when parking.
works properly, the sensors must be kept
clean and free of snow and ice.

Rear parking aid


Description
Applies to vehicles: with rear parking aid

The rear parking aid is an acoustic parking


system.

Description Fig . 147 Display zones

Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When Sensors are located in the front and rear
the sensors detect an obstacle, you are aler- bumpers. When the sensors detect an obsta-
ted by acoustic signals (beeps). cle, you are alerted by acoustic signals (beeps)
Please ensure that the sensors are kept free of and a graphic display.
stickers, deposits and any other substances Please ensure that the sensors are kept free of
which could impair the function of the sys- stickers, deposits and any other substances
tem. Notes on cleaning Q page 204. which could impair the function of the sys-
The measuring range of the sensors starts at tem. Notes on cleaning <..:> page 204.
about: Approximate range for each display zone:

ISide @ 1.20 m
Ceotre 1.60 m
0.90m
The acoustic signals sound with increasing 1.60 m
frequency as you approach the obstacle. A 0.90m
warning tone will sound continuously when 0.90 mal
*
the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away
a) Applies to vehicles with park assist
from the obstacle. Stop reversing immediate-
ly Q .&. in General notes on page 139, q (D in The acoustic signals sound with increasing
General notes on page 139! frequency as you approach the obstacle. A
warning tone will sound continuously when
The volume of the warning beeps will be grad-
the vehicle is less than approx . 0 .30 m away
ually reduced after about four seconds if the
from the obstacle (or less than approx .
vehicle remains at a constant distance from a
0.20 m away in zone @ ). Stop moving imme-
detected obstacle (it will not be reduced if the
diately Q .&. in General notes on page 139,
obstacle is closer than 0.30 m).
Q in General notes on page 139! Ill>
Parking aids 141

The volume of the warning beeps will be grad- Press the f>'' '.l switch, or
ually reduced after about four seconds if the Switch off the Ignition.
vehicle remains at a constant distance from a
Segments in the graphic display
detected obstacle (it will not be reduced if the
obstacle is closer than 0.30 m). You can estimate the distance to an obstacle
by referring to the segments in front of and
i Note behind the vehicle (vehicles with parking sys-
Zone * is detected and analysed as the tem plus*) or the segments surrounding the
vehicle is moving past. When you switch vehicle (vehicles with park assist*) <::> Fig. 149.
on the ignition or after the vehicle has The red lines (on some equipment versions
been stationary for a while or a door is only) indicate the anticipated path of the vehi-
opened, the ambien t surroundings may cle, depending on the steering wheel angle. A
have changed. Zone * is displayed in white segment indicates an obstacle that has
b lack on the MMI display for this reason. been detected beyond the path of travel. Red
segments represent objects detected within
the path of travel. The closer t he vehicle gets
Switching on/off
to the obstacle the closer the segments move
Applies lo vehicles: with parking system plus/park assist
towards the vehicle in the graphic. At the lat-
est when the penu ltimate segment is high-
lighted the vehicle has reached the danger
(collision) zone. Obstacles within the danger
(collision) zone are shown in red, even if they
are beyond the path of travel. Stop moving
immediately <::> .&. in General notes on
page 139, <::> in General notes on page 139!

Fig. 148 Centre console: Switch for parking aid

Fig. 149 MM!: Proximity graphic (vehicles with park


assist)

Switching on
... Engage reverse gear, or
Press the P...l switch in the centre console
<::> Fig. 148. You will hear a brief acknowl-
edgement tone and the LED in the switch
will light up.

Switching off
Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or
142 Parking aids

Reversing camera General notes


Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus with revers
Introduction ing camera
Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus with revers
ing camera

Fig . 1 52 : Area covered by the reversing camera; @ :


area NOT covered by the revers ing ca mera (exam ple)
Flg. 150
side

Fi g. 153 Boot lid: Location of revers ing camera (exam


ple)
Fig. 151 Diagram: Pa rking parall'el to the roadside
The reve rsing camera is located above the rear
In this system, a reversing camera is provided number plate. Please ensure t hat the lens of
in addition to the parking system plus the reversing camera c:::> Fig. 153 is kept free of
c:::> page 140. deposits and any other substances wh ich
You can use the system to park perpendicular could impair the function of the parking aid.
to the roadside, e .g. in a parking bay or ga- Notes on cleaning c:::> page 204.
rage c::> Fig. 150. Alternatively, you can park <D r:!> Fig. 152 represents the a rea cove red by
parallel to the roadside, e.g . next to the kerb t he reversing camera. Only th is area is s hown
c:::> Fig. 151 . in the picture on the MM! display. Objects out
of range of the camera in area @ do not ap-
pear in the pictu re.
The accuracy of the o rientation li nes arnd the
bll.lle a rea markings decreases if the dynamic
mode is activated c::> page 136.

A WARNING
- Please observe the safety warnings r:!> &
in General notes on page 139.
- For safety reasons, you should not !Use
the system if the position and installa-
tion angle of the reversing camera have liJI.
Parking aids 143

been changed, e.g. due to an accident. Switching on/off


Have it checked by a qualified workshop. Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus with revers
ing camera
- Only use the reversing camera to assist
you if it is supplying you with a good and Switching on
clear picture. The quality of the picture
... Engage reverse gear, or
can be impaired by adverse light, dirt on
... Press the P.A switch in the centre console
the lens or a defect.
Q page 141, Fig. 148. You will hear a brief
- Only use the reversing camera when the
acknowledgement tone and the LED in the
boot lid is completely closed . The orien-
switch will light up.
tation lines and blue markings are not
shown when the boot lid is open. Please Switching between the reversing camera
make sure that there are no objects and graphic display
mounted to the rear end of the vehicle ... Press the cont rol button for Graphic
which could block the view of the revers- ~ page 144, Fig. 154 to show the graphic
ing camera. display on the screen.
- The camera lens en larges and distorts ... Press the control button for Rear view to
the field of vision. Objects on the screen d isplay the picture from the reversing cam-
are modified and depicted inaccurately. era .
- In certain situations, people or objects
on the display may appear closer or fur- Switching off
ther away than they really are: ... Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or
- Objects which are not touching the ... Press the P-IAswitch, or
ground, such as the bumper of a ... Switch off the ignition.
parked vehicle, a tow-bar or the rear
end of a truck. In this case, do not use i Note
the orientation lines as a guide.
The graphic on the left of the displ.ay helps
- When you are reversing from a horizon-
identify the critical area of the vehicle.
tal surface up a gradient or down a hill.
- When approaching protruding objects.
- When the vehicle has been loaded with
a greater load on the rear.
~~~~~~~~~~

CD CAUTION
- Please observe the safety warn ings(!)
in General notes on page 139.
- The orange orientation lines on the MM I
display show the path of the rea r end of
the vehicle if you were to reverse using
the current steering angle. NB: The front
end of the vehicle swings out further
than the rear. Please make sure you keep
a sufficient distance between the vehicle
and any obstacles to make sure that the
exterior mirror or edge of the vehicle do
not collide with the obstacles.
144 Parking a ids

Parking perpendicular to the roadside Parking parallel to the roadside


Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus with revers- Applies to vehicles: with parking sys tem plus with revers-
ing camera ing camera

This view con be used when parking your vehi- This view con be used when parking your vehi-
cle in a garage or parking boy. cle at the roadside.

Fig. 154 MMI: Approaching a parking space Fig. 156 MM!: Blue area marki ng aligned in parking
space

Fig. 155 MMI: AUgning the vehicle


Fig. 1 57 MMI: Blue marking touches edge of p<1ve
ment
... Switch on the MMI* and select reverse gear.
... The orange orientation lines @ represent
The section below describes how to park on
the path of the vehicle. Turn the steering
the right side of the road . The procedure for
wheel until the orange orientation lines are
parking on the left is similar.
pointing towards the parking space
Fig. 154. You cain estimate the distance to If an obstacle (such as a wall) is Located next
an obstacle by referring to the markings @ . to the parking space, please follow the in-
Each marking is equivalent to approx. 1 me- structions for "Parking next to obstacles"
tre. The blue marking is an extension of the page 145.
vehicle outline and reaches about five me-
... Operate the right turn signal.
tres to the rear of the vehicle.
... Position your car beside a parked vehicle in
... Reverse into the space and adapt the steer-
front of the space where you want to park.
ing angle to the parking space, using the or-
The distance from the veh icle should be
ange Lines to assist you Q & in General
about 1 metre.
notes on page 142, (Din General notes
... Switch on the MMI* and select reverse gear.
on page 143 . @ indicates the rear bumper.
The parking aid will be switched on and the
Stop moving, at the latest, when the red ori-
perpendicular parking view will be diis-
entation Line @ is bordering on an obstacle .
played .
... Press the appropriate control button on the
MMI* control console to select @ ..,.
Parking aids 145

Fig. 156. The parallel parking display will


c;) Towing mode
appear. Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus with revers
Reverse and align your vehicle in such a way ing camera and lowing bracket

that the blue area marking @ borders onto This view helps you to position the vehicle in
the vehicle behind or onto the parking space front of a trailer.
line marking c;) & in General notes on
page 142, c;)CD in General notes on
page 143. The blue marking is an extension
of the vehicle outline and reaches about five
metres to the rear of the vehicle. The long
side of the blue marking should border onto
the kerb. The complete blue area marking
must fit into the parking space.
When the vehicle is stationary turn the
steering wheel to the right as far as it will
go. Fi g. 158 Infotainment display: Rear view
Reverse Into the parking space until the blue
curve c;) Fig . 157 touches the kerb c;) & in Press the front right control button on the
General notes on page 142, c;) Q) in General MMI* control console repeatedly unti l @
c;) Fig. 158 is selected . The Towing mode
notes on page 143. Stop the vehicle.
When the vehicle is stationary turn the display will appear.
steering wheel to the left as far as it will go. You can now position your vehicle in front of
Continue to reverse into the parking space the trailer c;) A in General notes on
until the vehicle is standing parallel to the page 142, c;)CD in General notes on
kerb c;) & in General notes on page 142, page 143. The orange orientation line @ in-
c;)CD in General notes on page 143. @ indi- dicates the anticipated path of the tow-bar.
cates the rear bumper. Stop moving, at the You can use the blue lines @ to estimate
latest, when the red orientation line @ is the distance to the trailer hitch.
bordering on an obstacle . Keep a close
watch on the front of your vehicle.

Parking next to obstacles

If an obstacle (such as a wall) is located next


to the parking space, the clearance at the side
of the vehicle must be larger. Position the
long side of the blue area in such a way that
there is sufficient distance to the obstacle .
The area marking must NOT touch the obsta-
cle. You must also start turning the steering
wheel much earlier. The blue curve c;) Fig. 157
must not touch the obstacle - make sure there
is sufficient clearance.

l Note
The orientation lines and markings appear
on the left or right side, depending on
which turn signals are on.
146 Parking aid s

Park assist hicle is less than approx. 0.20 m away from


the obstacle. Stop moving immediately!
Description
Applies to vehicles: with park assist _A WARNING
The park assist helps the driver to manoeuvre - Please observe the safety warnings c:> &.
the vehicle into and out of parking spaces. in General notes on page 139.
- Please note that the park assist only han-
dles the steering. As the driver you are
always responsible for braking and accel-
erating.
- It is the driver's responsibility to decide
whether a parking space shown in the
display is suitable for the vehicle.
- The front of the vehicle swings out dur-
ing the parking manoeuvre. Please take
Fig. 159 Diagram: Parking parallel to the roadside all necessary measures to ensure that
other road users are not endangered.
- The steering wheel turns rapidly on its
own when parking the vehicle and leav-
ing the space. Injury may result if a per-
son reaches between the spokes on the
steering wheel when it is turning.

CD CAUTION
- Please observe the safety warnings c:>
Fig. 1 60 Diagram: Parking perpendicular to the road-
side
in General notes on page 139.
- In certain situations, the park assist will
The park assist helps you to find suitable park- guide the vehicle onto or across the kerb,
ing spaces, to manoeuvre the vehicle into for instance if other vehicles are parked
spaces parallel or perpendicular to the road- on the kerb. You should always be ready
side and to drive out of spaces parallel to the to take over the steering wheel in order
kerb. The parking space can be located be- to prevent damage to the tyres and/or
tween two vehicles or behind one vehicle. The wheel rims.
park assist takes over the steering whi le the - Certain road conditions, such as loose
driver is parking the vehicle in the usual way. gravel, snow or ice can cause unexpected
results when parking.
The parking system plus is an integral compo-
nent of the park assist c:> page 140 and helps
you during the parking manoeuvre.
CD CAUTION
- The sensors may not always be able to
The park assist sensors are located on the detect objects such as trailer draw bars,
sides of the front a nd rear bumpers. Please thin rails, fences, posts, waste bins and
ensure that the sensors are kept free of stick- trees, etc. This could result in damage to
ers, deposits and any other substances which your car.
could impair the function of the system. - Please note that the system may not al-
Notes on cleaning c:> page 204. ways be able to detect the surface of cer-
In short parking spaces, the parking aid warn- tain objects or substances, such as wire
ing tone will sound continuously when the ve- fences or powder snow, etc. You should
P a rking aids 147

therefore check that the parking space is Switching on and off


really large enough before parking the Applies to vehicles: with park assist
vehicle.
- Please note that low obstacles detected
by the system may no longer be regis-
tered by the sensors as the car moves
closer, so the system will not give any
further warning. Failure to respond to a
parking system warning can result in
damage to your vehicle and other prop-
erty. Please bear this in mind, for exam-
ple, when using the park assist to park Fig. 1 61 Centre console: Switch for park assist
behind a truck. Always keep a close
watch on the area in front of and behind
the vehicle while parking, and intervene
promptly if necessary.
- To prevent damage to the sensors when
washing the vehicle with a high-pressure
cleaner or a steam cleaner, do not hold
the cleaner less than 10 cm away from
the sensors and do not keep the cleaner
pointed directly at the sensors. Fig. 162 Instrument cluster: Looking for a parking
space . @ parallel to the roadside, @ perpendicular to
the roadside
i Note
- The electronic stabilisation control (ES() ... To park parallel to the roadside, press the
must not be switched off during the I@ button once Fig. 161 . Display @
parking manoeuvre page 183. Fig. 162 will appear in the instrument
- The park assist cannot be used to park cluster. Or:
the vehicle on tight bends. .. To park perpendicular to the roadside, press
- If you achieve different results with the the I@ button twice. Display @ will appear.
park assist after a tyre change, have the .. The LED in the I@ button is lit if the park as-
system adjusted by a qualified workshop. sist is switched on.
- The park assist cannot be used to park .. To switch off the park assist, press the
the vehicle if a tra1iler Is attached and the I@ button. The LED in the I@ button will go
electrical connector for the trailer socket out.
is plugged in.
148 Parking aids

Looking for a parking space enough). To do so, press the I@ button


Applies to vehicles: with park assist and operate the turn signal.
- The best parking results will be achieved
if you position the vehicle as parallel as
possible to the line of parked cars or the
kerb before you start the actual pa rking
manoeuvre .
- If there are suitable parking spaces on
both sides of the road (for instance on a
one-way street), you can change the di-
rection of the turn signals to park on the
Fig. 163 Instrument cluster: Prompt to keep driving other side, even if you have already acti-
forwards (a parking spac-e has been detected) vated the park assist.

The section below describes how to park par-


Parking parallel to the roadside
allel to the roadside. The procedure for park-
Applies to vehicles: wi th park assis t
ing perpendicular to the roadside is similar.
The driver is responsible for parking the vehi-
Important: For the best parking result, you
cle.
should maintain a distance of approx. 1 metre
to the row of parked cars .

.. Activate the turn signal for the side on


which you want to park.
.. To park parallel to the roadside, drive for-
wards at not more than 30 km/h. Or:
.. To park perpendicular to the roadside, drive
forwards at not more than 20 km/h .
.. The system will display a parking space
when it finds one ~ Fig. 163. Please check
that the parking space is suitable for your gear
vehicle.

If you exceed a speed of about 50 km/h, the


park assist will be switched off.
The park assist will display a parking space on-
ly if it is long and wide enough for the vehicle.

If you operate the left turn signal, the display


will show the left side of the road (and vice-
versa). Fig. 165 Instrument cluster: Manoeuvrin g several
times in a parking space
@ Note
- The arrows ... or~ in the instrument .. Drive forwards until the arrow is displayed
cluster display indicate the side of the behi nd the vehicle ~ Fig. 164 ~ & in De-
road on which the park assist intends to scription on page 146, ~ CD in Description
park the vehicle. on page 146.
- You can activate the park assist after you .. After stopping for a moment, select reverse
gea~ ~
have already driven past a parking space
(as long as you were driving s lowly
Parking aids 149

.. Wait until the following text appears in the .. Follow the instructions on the display
display: Steering assistant active. Monitor Q page 149 and the acoustic warn ing tones

area around vehicle! until you are clear to leave the parking
.. Take your hands off the steering wheel. space .
.. Watch the road. When the road is clear, .. The procedure is over when no more ma-
press the accelerator gently Q .&. in Descrip- noeuvring is necessary in order to drive out
tion on page 146, c::> Q) in Description on of the space. Take over the steering .
poge 146.
The park assist automatically steers the vehi-
.. Follow the instructions on the display
cle out of the parking space while the driver
~page 149 and the acoustic warning tones
operates the pedals (accelerator, brake,
until the parking manoeuvre is complete.
clutch*). The maximum manoeuvring speed is
The arrows show the required direction of
5 km/h. The park assist will be deactivated if
travel.
you drive too fast or move the steering wheel
The park assist automatically steers the vehi- by hand . To continue the parking manoeuvre,
cle into the parking space while the driver op- switch the eng ine off/on. Then press the
erates the peda ls (accelerator, brake, clutch*). I@ button again. Alternatively, drive out of the
The maximum parking speed is 7 km/h. The parking space without using the park assist.
park assist will be deactivated if you drive too
fast or move the steering wheel by hand. To Driver messages
continue the parking manoeuvre, press the Applies to vehicles: with park assist
I@ button again . The park assist display will
reappear in the instrument cluster. Iii Steering input activated. Monitor area
around vehicle!

Driving out of a parking space parallel to The park assist is ready. You can now park the
the roadside vehicle. Watch the road QA in Description on
Applies to vehicles: with park assist page 146.
The driver is responsible for manoeuvring the II Park assist: ended.
vehicle out of the parking space.
Park assist: ended. Continue steering ve-
If the vehicle is parked parallel to the road- hicle!
side, the park assist can help you to manoeu-
The park assist has finished the parking ma-
vre the vehicle so that you can drive straight
noeuvre.
out of the parking space.
Park assist deactivated . Continue steer-
.. Start the eng ine.
ing vehicle!
.. Press the I@ butt on ~page 147, Fig. 161 .
.. Wait until the following text appears in the The park assist has interrupted the parking
instrument cluster display: To leave parking manoeuvre.
space select reverse gear and operate turn
signal.
II Steering input detected. Continue steer
ing vehicle!
.. Operate the appropr iate turn signal.
.. Engage reverse gear. The steering assistant has been deactivated
.. Take your hands off the steering wheel. be ca use the driver has intervened in the steer-
.. Watch the road. When the road is clear, ing. To continue the parking manoeuvre, press
press the accelerator gently Q .&. in Descrip- the I@ button again.
tion on page 146, c::> Q) in Description on Park assist: not available. Speed too high
page 146.
Park assist: speed too high ..,.
150 Parking aids

Reduce your speed! For the best results when The park assist cannot be used to park the ve-
passing the line of parked cars where you hicle when towing a trailer.
want to park, do not drive faster than 30 km/
h (if parking parallel to the roadside) or
Im Park assist: time limit exceeded
20 km/h (if parking perpendicular to the road- Time limit exceeded. Continue steering
side) c:> page 14 8 . vehicle!

Park assist: ended. Speed too high The parking ma noeuvre was not completed
within about six minutes after the park assist
Speed too high. Continue steering vehi
was activated. To continue the parking ma-
cle!
noeuvre, press the I@ button again.
You were driving too fast into the parking
Park assist: not available
space. Do not exceed 7 km/h when driving in-
to the parking space . System unavailable. Continue steering
vehicle!
(ii To leave parking space select reverse gear
and operate turn signal The park assist ca nnot be used to park the ve-
hicle. Try repeating the parking manoeuvre or
The park assist is ready. You can leave the
switching the ignition off and on again.
parking space. Watch the road c:> .&. in De-
scription on page 146. Not stopped long enough

Im Stabilisation control (ESC) input. Contin- After you select reverse gear, the vehicle has
ue s teering vehicle! to remain stationary for a moment so that the
park assist can activate the steering. Follow
Take over the steering. Fin ish parking without
the directions given in the display.
the park assist or d rive out of the parking
space. Park assist: system fault!

Please take over steering and continue System fault. Continue steering vehicle!
driving .
Please contact a qualified workshop. The park
The park assist has finished manoeuvring the assist cannot be used to park t he vehicle if a
vehicle out of the parking space . system fault occurs.

Stabilisation control (ESC) off. Continue


steering vehicle! Adjusting graphic
display and warning
The park assist has interrupted the parking
manoeuvre, because t he ESC has been switch- beeps
Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus/reversing
ed off. Take over the steering or switch on the
camera/park assist
ESC c:> page 183 and start the parking ma-
noeuvre again c:> page 148. The settings for the graphic display and
acoustic signals are controlled via the MMI* .
Assist function unavailable for leaving
parking space. Space too small ~ Select: I MENU I button> control button Sys-
tems I Car systems > Driver assist > Park-
The assist function is unable to automatically
ing aid .
steer the vehicle out of the parking space be-
cause the space is too small. Manoeuvre the Display
vehicle out of t he parking space without using
on" - The graph ic display (parking system
the park assist.
plus) or the reve rsing camera image (parking
Im Park ass ist: not available in towing mode system plus with reversing camera") will be
displayed when the parking a id is activated. ..,.
Im Trailer in use. Continue steering vehicle!
Parking aids 151

off - The parking aid gives only acoustic warn- sensor malfunctions, obstacles w ill only be
ing signals when it is activated. displayed in zones and @ .

Warning beeps Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have


the fault rectified.
Front volume - Volume for the front and side*
zones
Towing bracket
Rear volume - Volume for the rear zone Applies to vehicles: with parking system plus/park assist/
reve rsin g camera and towing bracket
Front frequency - Pitch of the beeps for the
front and side* zones When the trailer socket is connected, the rear
parki ng sensors are NOT activated when you
Rear frequency - Pitch of the beeps for the
select reverse gear or press the P'#A button.
rear zone
This may not apply if the power socket was
In-car entertainment fader - The volume of NOT factory-fitted . This resu lts in the follow-
the current audio or video source is reduced ing restrictions:
when the parking aid is switched on.
Parking system plus*/parking system
You will hear a short test tone each time you plus and park assist*
make a new setting .
There is no rear distance warning. However,
the system will still give a warning when ob-
(D Note
stacles are detected while driving forwards.
- You can also change the warning beep The proximity graphic will switch over to tow-
settings directly from the graphic display ing mode.
or reversing camera * picture. Simply
press the control button for Settings. Parking system plus and reversing
- The settings will be automatically stored camera*
and assigned to the remote control key There is no distance warning at the rear and at
in use. the sides in area @ . However, the system will
still give a warning when obstacles are detec-
Fault warnings ted while driving forwards. The proximity
Applies to vehicles; with parkin g system plus/park assist/ graph ic w ill switch over to towing mode. The
reversing camera image of the reversing camera will then be
If you hear a continuous warning tone for a shown without orientation lines and blue area
few seconds and the LED in the P1Abutton markings.
starts flashing when you switch on the park-
ing aid, or while the parking aid Is activated, a
system fault has occurred . If the fau lt is not
corrected before you switch off the ignition, it
will only be indicated by the flashing LED in
the pg~ button the next time you switch on the
parking aid by engaging reverse gear.

Parking system plus*/parking system


plus and park assist*
If a sensor malfunctions, the~ symbol will
be shown on the MM! display in front of or be-
hind the vehicle. If a rear sensor malfunc-
tions, obstacles will only be displayed in zones
@ and @ ~ page 140, Fig. 147. If a front
152 Safety first

Safety first - "ISOFIX" anchorages for "ISO FIX" child


seats on the front seat" and rear seats
General notes - Head restraints for all seats
- Adjustable steering column
Safety is the first priority
- Pre sense basic* (preventive occupant pro-
Your safety is our first priority. tection)
- Pedestrian protection system*
This chapter conta ins important information,
tips, suggestions and warnings that you These individual safety features are ha rmon-
shou ld read and observe for your own safety ised to provide you and your passengers with
and the safety of your passengers. the best possible protection in accident situa-
tions. However, they can only be effective if
&.. WARNING you and your passengers sit in the correct po-
sition and adjust and use the safety equip-
- The information in this chapter is impor-
ment properly.
tant for the driver of the veh icle and all
passengers. The other chapters in t his For these reasons, t his chapter explai ns why
manual (and, where applicable, in the these safety features are so important, how
other literature supplied with the vehi- they can protect you, what you need to re-
cle) contain further important notes member when using them, and how you and
which you should read and observe for your passengers can gain the most benefit
your own safety and that of your passen- from them. There are also a number of impor-
gers. tant safety warnings which you and your pas-
- Ensure that the complete vehicle wallet sengers should always observe in order to
is a lways in the vehicle. This is especially minimise the risk of injury.
important when you le nd or sell the vehi-
Safety is everyone's responsibility!
cle to othe rs.

Before every trip


Safety features
The driver is responsible for the safety of the
The safety features listed here are part of the passengers and the safe operation of the ve-
vehicle's occupant restraint system. They hicle at all times.
work together to help reduce the risk of injury
in a wide variety of accident situations. For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, always note the following points
Your safety and t he safety of your passengers
before every trip:
should not be left to chance. In the event of
an accident, the safety features incorporated " Make sure t hat all light s and turn signa ls are
in your vehicle are capable of reducing the risk working properly.
of injury. These are just a few of the safety " Check the tyre pressures.
features in your Aud i: " Make sure that all windows are clean and
give good visibility to the outside.
- Optimised three-point seat belts for all
" Secure all luggage and other items carefully
seats Q page 162.
- Belt tensioners for the front seats " Make sure that no objects can interfere with
- Belt height adjustment for the front seats the pedals.
- Front a irbags (driver's airbag, front passeng- " Adjust the front seat, head restraint and
er's airbag, d river's knee airbag) mirrors correctly.
- Side airbags in the front and rear* backrests " Make sure that the front passenger's head
- Head-protection airbags restraint is adjusted to the correct position. tio-
Safety first 153

.. Make sure that the head restra ints for the


rear passengers are in the ful ly raised posi
tion .
.. Make sure that children are protected with
su itable safety seats and properly worn seat
belts page 157 .
.. Sit in the correct position in your seat. Make
sure that your passengers are sitting in the
correct positions page 66.
.. Fasten your seat belt correctly. Make sure
that your passengers do the same
r::?vpage 165.

What affects driving safety?


Safety on the rood is directly related to how
you drive, and can also be affected by the
passengers in the vehicle.

.. The driver is responsible for the safety of


the vehicle and all its occupants. If your
ability to drive is impaired in any way, you
endanger yourself and other road users
,&..Therefore:
.. Do not let yourself be distracted by passen
gers or by using a mobile phone, etc.
.. Never drive when your driving ability is im
paired (by medication, alcohol, drugs, etc.) .
.. Obey all traffic regulations and speed limits
and always maintain a safe distance to the
vehicle in front .
.. Always adjust your speed to suit the road,
traffic and weather conditions .
.. Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not
drive for more than two hours without a
stop.
.. If possible, avoid d riving when you are tired
or stressed.

A WARNING
- Distractions while driving or any kind of
impairment to your driving ability in
crease the risk of accident and injury.
- Do not place loose objects on the dash
panel. These objects could fly around the
interior when the vehicle Is moving (un
der acceleration or whilst cornering) and
distract the driver this could lead to an
accident.
154 Safety firs t

Correct sitting For detailed information on how to adjust the


driver's seat, see Q page 66, Front seats.
positions
Correct driving position _& WARNING
A driver who is not sitting in the correct
The correct driving position is important for
position or who is not wearing a seat belt
safe driving.
can be fatally injured if the airbag is t rig-
gered.
- Adjust the driver's seat and steering
wheel so there is a distance of at least
25 cm between your breastbone and the
centre of the steering wheel Q Fig. 166.
- While driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of
the rim at about the 9 o'clock and 3
o'clock position. This reduces the risk of
Fig. 166 Adjust seat and sit In correct position
injury if the driver's airbag inflates.
For your own safety, and to reduce the risk of - Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
injury in the event of an accident, we recom- o'clock position, or with your hands in-
mend the following driving position. side the rim or on the steering wheel
hub. This could result in serious injuries
Adjust the driver's seat and steering wheel to the arms, hands and head if the driv-
so there is a distance of at least 25 cm be- er's airbag inflates.
tween your breastbone and the centre of the - To reduce any risk of injury to the driver
steering wheel Q Fig. 166. during a sudden brake application or in
Adjust the height and fore/aft position of an accident, never drive with the back-
the driver's seat so that you are able to press rest tilted too far back. The airbag sys-
the pedals to the floor without fully tem and seat belts can only provide
straightening your legs Q ,&.. proper protection when the backrest is in
Adjust the backrest to an upright position so an upright position and the driver is
that your back remains in contact with the wearing the seat belt in the correct posi-
upholstery. tion. The further the backrest is tilted
Adjust the longitudinal position of the steer- back, the greater the risk of injury due to
ing wheel so that your arms are slightly bent incorrect positioning of the belt webbing
and you can read the dials and Instruments or an Incorrect sitting position.
easily. -Adjust the head restraint properly so
Make sure that you can comfortably reach
that it can give maximum protection.
the top of the steering wheel.
Applies to vehicles with adjustable head re-
straints: Adjust the head restraint so that Correct position for the front passenger
the top of the head restraint is level with the The front seat passenger must sit at least 25
top of your head. If this is not possible, try cm away from the dash panel so that the air-
to adjust the head restraint as near as possi- bag hos enough room to inflate and give
ble to this position. maximum protection in on accident.
Fasten your seat belt correctly ~ page 165.
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
are in full control of the vehicle at all times. injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
mend adjusting the front passenger's seat as
follows: ll>-
Safety fi r st 155

Adjust the backrest to an upright posit ion so positioning of the belt webbing or an in-
that your back remains in contact with the correct sitting position .
upholstery. - Always adjust the head restraints proper-
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of ly for maximum protection .
the head restraint is level with the top of
your head. If this is not possible, try to ad-
Correct position for rear passengers
just the head restraint as near as possible to
this position. Rear seat passengers should sit upright with
Keep both feet in the footwell in front of the both feet on the floor and wear their seat
seat. belts properly whenever the vehicle is moving.
Fasten your seat belt correctly ~ page 167.
To reduce any risk of injury in the event of sud-
In exceptional cases you can disable the front den braking or an accident, passengers in the
passenger's airbag via the key-operated rear seats must observe the following:
switch* page 180.
Before carrying passengers on the rear
For detailed information on how to adjust the seat s, pull the head restra ints on the occu-
front passenger's seat, see page 66, Front pied seats a ll the way up page 68.
seats. Keep both feet in the footwe ll In front of the
rear seat.
&. WARNING Fasten your seat belt correctly ~ page 168.
A passenger who is not sitting in the cor- Use appropriate child restraint systems for
rect position or who is not wearing a seat children travelling in the vehicle
belt can be fatally injured if the airbag is ~page 157.
triggered.
-Adjust the front passenger's seat so &. WARNING
there is a distance of at least 25 cm be- Rear passengers sitting out of position can
tween your breastbone and the dash suffer severe injuries.
panel. - Always adjust the head restraints to the
- Always keep your feet on the floor when fully raised position for maximum pro-
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on tection.
the instrument panel, out of the window - Seat belts only offer maximum protec-
or on the seat. If you sit in an incorrect tion when the backrest is in an upright
position, you increase your risk of injury position and the passengers are wearing
in the event of sudden braking or an acci- the seat belts properly. By not s itting up-
dent. If the airbag is triggered, you could right, rear passengers Increase t he risk of
sustain potentially fatal injuries by sit- injury due to incorrect positioning of the
ting out of position. seat belt webbing.
- To reduce the risk of injury to the front
passenger in the case of sudden braking
or an accident, the passenger should
never travel in a moving vehicle with the
backrest reclined. The airbag system and
seat belt can only provide proper protec-
tion when the backrest is in an upright
position and the passenger is wearing
the seat belt in the correct position. The
further the backrest is tilted back, the
greater the risk of injury due to incorrect
156 Safety first

Correct adjustment of head restraints effectiveness of the seat belts and increases
the risk of injury since the belt webbing is not
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- worn in the position for which it is designed.
portant part of the vehicle's occupant protec- The driver is responsible for the safety of all
tion system. They can help to reduce the risk vehicle occupants, especially for children.
of injuries in most occident situations.
... Never allow anyone to sit out of position
while the vehicle is moving Q &.
The following list shows just some examples
of incorrect sitting positions which can be
dangerous to all occupants. The list is not
complete, but will help to make you aware of
possible dangers which can be avoided .

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is


Fig. 167 Head restraint (seen from the front) moving:
- Never stand up in the vehicle.
The head restraints must be adjusted properly - Never stand on the seats.
to provide maximum protection.
- Never kneel on the seats.
... Adjust the front head restraints so that the - Never travel with the backrest reclined too
top of the head restraint is level with the far.
top of your head. If this is not possible, try - Never lean against the dash panel.
to adjust the head restraint as near as possi- - Never lie down on the rear seat.
ble to this position . - Never sit on the front edge of a seat .
... Before carrying passengers on the rear - Never sit sideways.
seats, pull the head restraints on the occu- - Never lean out of the window.
pied seats all the way up c> page 68. - Never put your feet out of the window.
For more information on how to adjust the - Never put your feet on the dash panel.
head restraints, see c> page 68. - Never put your feet on the seat cushion .
- Never ride in the footwell.
&. WARNINCi - Never travel on a seat without wearing the
seat belt.
- Travelling with the head restraints re-
moved or incorrectly adjusted increases - Never climb into the luggage compartment.
the risk of severe injuries.
- Incorrectly adjusted head restraints can
.&. WARNINCi
also increase the risk of injury during Sitting out of position increases the risk of
sudden or unexpected braking or other severe injuries.
manoeuvres. - Sitting out of position exposes the occu-
pants to potentially fatal injuries: if the
airbags inflate they can strike any occu-
Examples of incorrect seating positions
pant who is not in one of the designed
Occupants con suffer severe or fatal injuries if seat positions.
they sit in on incorrect position while the vehi- - Before starting a trip, sit in the correct
cle is moving. position and stay in this position as long
as the vehicle is moving. Before every
Seat belts can only provide maximum protec-
trip, make sure all passengers are sitting
tion if the belt webbing is positioned correct-
in the correct positions and remain IJJ>
ly. Sitting out of position greatly reduces the
Safety first 157

correctly seated at all times Q page 66, child seat. Incorrectly worn seat belts
Front seats. can give rise to injuries even in a minor
collision.
Child seats - If children are out of position when the
car is moving, they are at greater risk of
Safety notes for using child seats injury during a sudden braking manoeu-
vre or in an accident. This is particularly
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
the case if the child is travelling on t h e
accident, children must always use child re-
front passenger's seat and the airbag
straint systems when travelling in the car.
system is triggered in an accident. This
Please note the information in this Owner's incorrect sitting position can result in se-
Manual when installing and using child seats. rious or even fatal injury.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and - If you are using a child seat on the front
observe any statutory requirements. passenger seat in which the child faces
t he direction of travel, you should move
For safety reasons, we recommend that child
the front passenger seat as far back as
seats be installed on t he rear seats. You
possible.
should only use a child seat on the front pas-
- Ch ild seats in which the child faces the
senger seat in exceptional circumstances.
rear of the car are located directly In the
f1:l. WARNING path of the front passenger's airbag if it
inflates. In this case, the child could sus-
To avoid serious or fatal injury, children
tain serious or fatal injuries if the airbag
travelling in the vehicle must always be
were to be deployed.
protected with child restraint systems ap-
- Applies to vehicles on which the front
propriate to their height, weight and age.
passenger's airbag cannot be deactiva-
- Children under 1.50 m tall or younger
ted: Do NOT use a rearward-facing
than 12 must not travel in the vehicle if
child seat on the front passenger's
there are no suitable child seats. Please
seat.
observe any other applicable regulations
- Applies to vehicles with key-operated
in the country in which you are travelling.
switch for deactivating the front pas-
- Babies and children must never travel on
senger's airbag: Do NOT use a rear-
another occupant's lap.
ward-facing child seat on the front pas-
- Never allow more than one child to occu-
senger's seat while the front passeng-
py one child seat.
er's airbag is active. If you have no al-
- Never leave a chi ld without supervision in
ternative but to use a rearward-facing
a chi ld seat.
child seat on the front passenger's
- Never allow a child to travel unrestrained seat, the front passenger's airbag must
or to stand up or kneel on a seat whi le be deactivated beforehand via the key-
the car is moving. In an accident, the operated switch* Q page 180. Make
child could be catapulted through the
sure that the front passenger's airbag
car, causing possibly fatal injuries to it- is reactivated by means of the key-op-
self and other occupants. erated switch* as soon as the child seat
- To ensure proper protection by the child is no longer needed on the front pas-
restraint, it is important to wear the seat senger's seat.
belts in the correct position Q page 167.
- Always replace the child seat with a new
Always check that the belt is properly one after an accident as damage not ex-
positioned according to the instructions ternally visible may have occurred.
provided by the manufacturer of the
158 Safety firs t

Child safety and side airbags class and the approval category of the child
Applies to vehicles. with side airbags sea t can be found on this label.

:'.'=:=:::::::::=--./ 0~ Child seats are divided into five weight cate-


x gories:
Cl;
Child s eats: cate g o ries 0 a nd O+
Rearward-facing carry cots are most appropri-
ate for these categories (up to 13 kg). Our rec-
ommendation : Audi carry cot with optional
ISOFIX base.

Fig. 168 Illustration of a dangerous sitting position Chi ld s eats : categ o ry 1


near the opening for the side airbag
In t his category (9 to 18 kg), rearward or for-
Make sure that children do not lean out of t he ward-facing child seats with an integrated
ch ild seat towards the door trim. If t he side seat belt system are most appropriat e. Rear-
a irbag* were to Inflate in an accident , it cou ld ward-facing ch ild seats should be used for as
strike the chi ld on the head and cause serious long as safely possible. Our recommendatio n:
injury. Audi child seat with ISO FIX base.

Child seats: cate gories 2 and 3


A WARNING
Child seats with backrests used in conj unction
- To avoid injury, the child's head must al-
wit h seat belts are most appropriate for these
ways be well away from the opening for
categories (15 to 36 kg). Our recommenda-
the side airbag Q page 177, Side air-
tion : Audi child seat "youngster plus".
bags.
- Do not leave or place any objects in the
area of inflation for the side airbag.
A WARNING
- Categories 0, O+ and 1 (rearward-facing):
Never install a rearward-facing child seat
Child seat categories on t he front passenger's seat unless the
Only use child restraint systems that are offi- front passenger's airbag has been deacti-
cially approved and suitable for the child. vated - t his can result in potentially fatal
injuries to the child. If you have no a lter-
native but to let a child travel on t he
fro nt passenger's seat, t he fro nt pas-
senger's ai rbag must be deactivated* be-
forehand ~page 180.
- Categories 1 (forward-facing), 2 a nd 3:
The back of the child seat shou ld be flush
with t he backrest of the vehicle sea t. If
010+ t he rear head restraint obstruct s you
when installing the child seat, adjust" or
Fig. 169 Child seat categories
remove it completely ~ page 68. After
Child restraint systems are covered by the Eu- removing the child seat, install the pas-
ropean standard ECE-R 44. An orange label is senger's head restraint again immediate-
usually attached to child seats which have ly and adjust it to the correct position .
been tested in accordance with this standard. Travelling with the head restraints re-
Information on weight categories, ISOFIX size moved o r incorrectly adjusted increases
t he risk of severe injuries. Ill>
Safety first 159

- Categories 2 and 3: The shou lder section If you wish to attach an ISOFIX child seat to
of the belt must be fitted across the cen- the ISOFIX anchorages in your vehicle, please
t re of the child's collar bone close to the ensure that it is approved for the seats in your
torso. It must never run against or across vehicle. The following table ~ table on
the neck. The lap belt must be worn page 159 shows the installation options. The
t ightly across the hips, and not over the necessary information can be found on the or-
stomach or abdomen. Pull the belt tight ange label on the child seat.
if necessary to take up any slack. An ISOFIX child seat categorised as "vehicle-
- Wait for as long as possible before specific", "restricted" or "semi-universal" (IL)
changing up to the next child seat group. is suitable for a seat if:

@ Note - your vehicle is listed in the model list provi-


ded by the child seat manufacturer and
We recommend child seats from the range
- your child seat is marked with IL in the fol-
of Audi Genuine Accessories:
lowing table.
www.audi.com/childseats.
An ISOFIX child seat categorised as "univer-
Fitting child seats sal", (IUF) is suitable for a seat if:
- your child seat is marked with IUF in the fol-
Securing child seats with ISOFIX
lowing table and
- the child seat can be secured with top tether
~ page 160.

Weight ISOFIX Outer Front


class size cate- rear passeng-
gory seats er'sseat*
~

Category 0 : E IL IL
up t o 10 kg
Catego- E
Fig. 170 Rear seat: Secu ring child seat with ISO FIX
(example) ry O+: D IL IL
up to 13 kg c
Child seats of the categories 0, O+ and 1 with
D
ISOFIX can be secured without a seat belt us-
ing the ISO FIX anchorages on the outer rear
c
Category 1 : IL
seats and also, on some vehicles, on the front B IL
9 to 18 kg IU F
passenger's seat. Bl
.,. Push the mountings on the child seat into A
the ISOFIX anchorages until they engage au-
dibly ~Fig. 170. A
f="
WARNING
.,. Pull on the child seat to check whether both - Note the important safety notes i::> & in
sides have engaged properly. Safety notes for using child seats on
.,. Rear seats: If possible secure the child seat page 157, ~ fr:. in Child seat categories
additionally to the top tetherll anchorage on page 158 and the instructions provi-
~ page 160. ded by the child seat manufacturer. ~

ll This function Is not available for all ex port vers ions.


160 Saf ety fi rst

- Never install a rearward-facing child seat ... Applies to A3/A3 Sportback: Hook the strap
on the front passenger's seat unless t he into the top tether anchorage Fig. 171 .
front passenger's airbag has been deacti- ... Applies to A3 Saloon: Fold the cover open
vated - this can result in potentially fatal and hook the strap into the top tether an-
injuries to the child. chorage Fig. 172 .
- The anchorages in the vehicle are de- ... Pull the tether strap tight so that the top of
signed only for child seats with ISOFIX. the child seat rests securely against t he
Do not attempt to secure other types of backrest.
child seat, seat belts or other objects to
these anchorages - this could result in & WARNING
serious or possibly fatal injury. - Note t he important safety notes .& in
'--~ ~~~~~~~~

Safety notes for using child seats on


Securing child seats with ISOFIX and page 157, .& in Child seat categories
top tether on page 158 and the instruct ions provi-
App lies to vehicles: with top tether ded by the child seat manufacturer.
- The a nchorages in t he vehicle are de-
signed o nly for one child seat with 150 -
FIX and top tether. Do not attempt to se-
cure other types of child seat, seat belts
or ot her objects to these anchorages -
this cou ld result in serious or possibly fa-
tal injury.

Securing child seats with seat belt


Fig. 1 71 Rear seat bench (A3/A3 Sportback): Top teth
er anchorages If you wish to use a child seat in the approval
category "universal" (u), please ensure that it
is a pproved for the seats in your vehicle. The
fo llowing table shows the installation op-
t ions. The necessary information can be found
on t he orange label on the child seat.

Weight Front Rear


class pas seng- Outer Centre
er's seat seats seat
Fig. 172 Rear seat bench (A3 Saloon): Top tether an- Cat ego- u u u
chorages
ry 0
up to 10
... Push up the head restra int behind the child
kg
seat .
... Push the mountings on the child seat into Catego u u u
t he ISOFIX anchorages until they engage au- ryO+
dibly page 159. up to 13
... Pull on the child seat to check whether both kg
sides have engaged properly. Cat ego- u u u
... Guide the top tether strap of the child seat ry 1
u nderneath or past both s ides of the head 9 t o 18 kg
restraint (depending on the type of child
seat) towards the rear.
Safety first 161

Weight Front Rear If one of the brake circuits should fail, in-
class passeng- creased brake pedal travel will be required to
Outer Centre
er's seat bring the vehicle safely to a stop.
seats seat
Catego-
ry 2
u u u A WARNING
Any obstructions that restrict pedal travel
15 to 25
can cause loss of vehicle control and criti-
kg
cal situations in traffic.
Cate go- u u u
- Never place objects in the driver's foot-
ry 3
well. Such objects could move under the
22 to 36
pedals and interfere with their proper
kg
function . In the event of sudden braking
To adjust the front passenger's seat to the or a change of direction, you would not
child seat and to achieve the best possible be able to use the pedals. This could re-
seat belt positioning, move sult in a loss of control and possibly
cause an accident.
- the front passenger's backrest as far for-
ward as possible and
- the front passenger's seat as far upwards as Floor mats on the driver's side
possible. Use only floor mots which can be securely fas-
tened in the footwell and do not obstruct the
.&. WARNING pedals.
- Note the important safety notes~ & in
Safety notes for using child seats on Make sure that floor mats are securely fas-
page 157, Q .& in Child seat categories tened and cannot interfere with the pedals
on page 158 and the instructions provi- Q.&..
ded by the child seat manufacturer. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
- Never install a rearward-facing child seat unobstructed and are firmly secured to pre-
on the front passenger's seat unless the vent them from slipping . You can obtain suita-
front passenger's airbag has been deacti- ble floor mats from your dealer or a specialist
vated - this can result in potentially fatal retailer.
injuries to the child.
A WARNING
Pedal area Any obstructions that restrict pedal travel
can cause loss of vehicle control and in-
Pedals
crease the risk of serious personal injury.
The pedals must always be free to move and -Always make sure that floor mats are
must never be obstructed by floor mats or properly secured.
any objects in the footwell. - Never lay or install additional floor mats
or other floor coverings over the existing
Make sure that none of the pedals is ob-
floor mats; this would restrict the pedal
structed and all of the pedals can be pressed
area and possibly obstruct the pedals,
all the way down to the floor.
which could cause an accident.
Make sure that all pedals are able to return
freely to their original positions.

Only use floor mats which leave the pedal area


free and can be securely fastened in the foot-
well.
162 Safety first

Stowing luggage safely - Never exceed the maximum axle loads or


the maximum gross weight for the vehi-
Loading the luggage compartment cle c> page 272. Exceed ing the permit-
ted axle loads or gross weight limit can
affect the vehicle's handling characteris-
tics and increase the risk of accidents,
'
personal injuries or damage to the vehi-
cle.
- Never leave your vehicle unattended
when the boot lid is open. Children could
climb into the boot and close the boot lid
from the inside. In this case the child
Fig. 173 Heavy items should be placed as far forwards would be unable to get out of the veh icle
as possible (example).
without help. This could have fatal con-
sequences.
All luggage and other objects must be safely
- Never a llow children to play in or around
secured in the Luggage compartment. To
the vehicle. Always close and lock the
maintain safe handling on the road, please
boot lid and all the doors when you leave
observe the following points:
the vehicle.
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage - Never let passengers ride In the luggage
compartment. compartment. All occupants must be
Place heavy items as far forward as possible properly restrained by the seat belts at
in the luggage compartment and secure all t imes <:> page 165.
them properly c> Fig. 173.
Secure the load with the stretch net* or with
non-elastic straps secured to the fastening
CD CAUTION
Make sure that no hard objects chafe
rings c> page 74.
against the wires of the heating element
in the rear window and damage them .
.&_ WARNING
(D Note
- Adjust the tyre pressure to match the ve-
hicle loading - the correct pressures are
specified on the sticker on the end face
distribution.
of the driver's door.
- In an accident or a sudden manoeuvre, - Air circu lation in the vehicle helps reduce
loose objects in the passenger compart-
fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
ment can be flung forward - risk of in-
through ventilation slots in the rear of
jury! Always stow objects safely in the
the vehicle. Make sure that these ventila-
luggage compartment and secure them
tion slots are not obstructed.
on the fastening rings*. Use suitable se-
- Suitable belts for securing loads to the
curing straps, particularly when trans-
fastening rings* are commercially availa-
porting heavy objects.
ble.
- Transporting heavy objects may affect
the vehicle's handling by shifting the
centre of gravity - this could cause an ac-
cident. Take extra care when driving and
adjust your speed accordingly.
S a fety first 163

Fastening rings Pedestrian protection


Unsecured loads are a hazard to all vehicle system
occupants. Description
Applies to vehicles: with pedestrian protection system
There are fastening rings in the luggage com-
partment which can be used to secure lug- The pedestrian protection system will auto-
gage and other objects c> page 74. matically be activated when the front of the
.. Use the fastening rings to secure items safe- vehicle collides with a pedestrian. The bonnet
ly in the luggage compartment c> .&_. is raised several centimetres to create an addi-
tional crush zone above the engine.
During a collision or an accident, even small
The sensors of the pedestrian protection sys-
and light objects can possess so much energy
tem are located in the front bumper. In rare
that they can cause very severe injuries. The
cases, the system can be triggered because
amount of this "kinetic energy" depends on
the possibility that a pedestrian has been hit
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the
cannot be ruled out by the sensors, for exam-
object. The most significant factor, however,
ple:
is the speed of the vehicle .
- in a collision with a street post,
For example: an object weighing 4.5 kg is ly-
- in a collision with an animal, or
ing unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal
collision at a speed of SO km/h, this object - if you drive into a pile of snow, or
generates a force corresponding to 20 times - in the event of ground contact, e .g. when
its weight. That means that the effective driving on extremely poor road surfaces.
weight of the object increases to about 90 kg. If the system has been activated, press the
You can imagine the severity of the injuries bonnet back into its original position c> A in
which m ight be sustained if this "projectile" Servicing the pedestrian protection system on
strikes an occupant as it flies through the pas- page 164 and have the system serviced by a
senger compartment. qualified workshop.

.&_ WARNING .&_ WARNING


If items of luggage or other objects are se- - Never change or replace the bumper or
cured to the fastening rings with inappro- bonnet as a part of tuning measures.
priate or damaged tensioning straps, inju- This can impair the effectiveness of the
ries couW result in the event of sudden pedestrian protection system and inva-
braking or a collision. lidate the operating permit for your vehi-
- To prevent pieces of luggage or other ob- cle. The manufacturer cannot be held lia-
jects from flying forward, always use ap- ble for damage which occurs as a result
propriate tensioning straps which are of failure to comply with these stipu la-
properly secured to the fastening rings. tions, and such damage is not covered
- Never secure a child seat on the fasten- under warranty.
ing rings. - False activation of the pedestrian protec-
tion system is possible.
164 Safety first

Servicing the pedestrian protection Drive to a qualified workshop without delay


system and have the fault rectified.
Applies to vehicles: with pedestrian protection system
_&. WAA.NING
-
- Do not press back the bonnet unles s
both of your hands are flat on top of the
bonnet. If you do this, you cannot catch
your fingers between the bonnet and
body. Take care when pressing back the
bonnet: careless or uncontrolled move-
ments can cause injury to yourself or
others - risk of injury!
Fig. 174
- The system can only be activat ed once. If
gered
the pedestrian protection system has
been triggered, have it replaced wit hout
delay by a qualified workshop.
- All repairs to the bumper and the pedes-
trian protection system must only be car-
ried out by a qualified workshop working
to the specifications of the Audi factory.
Improper repairs can impair the effec-
tiveness of the system and invalidate the
Fig. 175 Pressing back/checking the bonnet
operating permit for your vehicle.
- The relevant safety requirements must
When the pedestrian prot ection system has be observed when individual components
been triggered, the bonnet is raised by several of the system or the entire vehicle are
centimetres ~ Fig. 174. In addition, the fo l- scrapped. Your authorised dealer is fa-
lowing message wi ll appear: E,I Safety sys- miliar with these regulations and will be
tem : system fault! See owner's manual. pleased to pass on the information to
you.
To engage the bonnet again, press it down
with both hands on the left side of the vehi-
cle in area @ ~ Fig. 175 ~ .& ..
To check whether the bonnet is properly en-
gaged, pull the rear edge of the bonnet @
upwards. If the bonnet can be lifted, press it
down again.
When the bonnet has engaged properly, re-
peat the procedure on the right side of the
vehicle .
Drive to the nearest qualified workshop
without delay and have the pedestrian pro-
tection system serviced ~ & ..

In the event of a fault in the system, the fol-


lowing message will appear: Safety system:
system fault! See owner's manual..
Seat b e lts 165

Seat belts ing around the corner". Ensure that your pas-
sengers wear their seat belts as well Q & .
Why is it so important
Properly worn seat belts have been shown to
to use seat belts? be an effective means of reducing the poten-
Seat belts provide effective protection tial for injury and improving the chances of
survival in a serious accident Q page 166,
The common belief that passengers can brace Forces acting in a collision.
their weight with their hands in a minor colli-
sion is false. For information on how children can travel
safely in the car refer to Q page 157, Child
seats .

.&.. WARNING -
- Seat belts must be put on before every
t rip - even when driving in town. This al-
so applies to the rear passengers (injury
risk) .
- During pregnancy, women should always
Fig. 176 Driver with properly positioned seat belt - ensure they wear a seat belt. The best
good protection if the brakes are applied suddenly way to protect the unborn child is to pro-
tect the mother Q page 168, Wearing
It is an established fact that seat belts pro- and adjusting the seat belts during preg-
vide good protection in accidents. Therefore noncy.
wearing a seat belt is required by law in most
countries.
Important safety notes when using seat
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in belts
the best position for maximum protection There ore a number of safety points concern-
q Fig. 176. The seat belts are capable of ab-
ing the seat belts which you should remem-
sorbing much of the kinetic energy arising in a ber. This will help to reduce the risk of injury
collision. Also they help to prevent uncontrol-
in on occident.
led movements which could lead to severe in-
juries c> page 165, Important safety notes
when using seat belts.
.&.. WARNING -
- The seat belts can ohly provide maxi-
If they wear the seat belts correctly, the pas- m um protection if the seats are adjusted
sengers benefit greatly from the ability of the properly Q page 66, Front seats.
belts to reduce the kinetic energy gradually. - To ensure proper protection, it is impor-
The front crumple zones and other passive tant to wear the seat belts in the correct
safety features (such as the airbag system) position Q page 167, How to wear seat
are also designed to absorb the kinetic energy belts properly. Ensure that the seat belts
generated in a collision. Taken together, all are worn exactly as recommended in this
these features reduce the forces acting on the chapter. Belts which are not worn proper-
occupants and consequently the risk of injury. ly can increase the risk of injury in acci-
Although these examples are based on a fron- dents considerably.
tal collision, the physical principles involved - Do not allow the seat belt to become
are the same in other types of accidents. This twisted or jammed, or to rub on any
is why it is so important to put on the seat sharp edges.
belts before every trip - even when "just driv-
166 Seat b e lts

- Never allow two passengers (even chil- Forces acting in a


dren) to share the same seat belt. It is collision
especially dangerous to place a seat belt
over a child sitting on your lap. The physical principles involved in a
- Do not wear the belt over hard or fragile frontal impact
objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) be- Very large forces are generated during a colli-
cause this can cause injuries. sion; these forces have to be absorbed.
- Loose, bulky clothing (such as an over-
coat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit
and function of the belts.
- The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
the retractors may not work properly
c::> tab. Cleaning the interior on
page206.
- The slot in the seat belt buckle must not
be blocked with paper or other objects,
as this can prevent the latch plate from Fig. 177 Passengers of a vehicle wh ich is headed for a
engaging properly. brick wall. They are not using seat belts.
- The latch plate of the belt must a lways
be engaged in the correct buckle for that
seat, otherwise the belt will not be fully
effective.
- Check the condition of the seat belts at
regular intervals. If you notice thatthe
belt webbing, fittings, retractor mecha-
nism or buckle of any of the belts ls dam-
aged, the belt must be replaced by a
qualified workshop. Fig. 178 The vehicle crashes ag;ilnst the wall
- The seat belts must not be removed or
modified in any way. Do not attempt to The physical principles involved in a frontal
repair a damaged belt yourself. collision are relatively simple:
- Seat belts which have been worn in an Both the moving vehicle and the passengers
accident and stretched must be replaced possess energy, which is known as "kinetic en-
by a qualified workshop. The belt ancho- ergy" c::> Fig. 177. The amount of "kinetic ener-
rages should also be checked. gy" depends on the speed of the vehide and
the weight of the vehicle and passengers. The
higher the speed and the greater the weight,
the more energy there is to be absorbed in an
accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the


speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, for example, the
kin etic energy increases by a factor of four.
Because these passengers are not restrained
by seat belts, the e ntire amount of kinetic en-
ergy has to be absorbed at the point of impact""
Seat b elts 16 7

~ Fig. 178. This would result in serious or po- car. This could resu lt in potentially fatal inju-
tentially fatal inju ry. ries.
Even at urban speeds of 30 km/h to SO km/h, The common beliefthat occupants can brace
the forces acting on t he occupants in a colli- their weight with their hands in a minor colli-
sion can reach the equ ivalent of 1 ton sion Is false. Even at low speeds the forces
(1000 kg) or more. At greater speed these acting on the body in a collision are so great
forces are even higher. Again: if the speed that it is not possible to hold yourself in the
doubles, the forces increase by a factor of seat.
four.
It is also important for the rear passengers to
Passengers who do not wear seat belts are not wear seat belts, as they could otherwise be
"attached" to the vehicle. In a frontal collision thrown forwards violently in an accident. Rear
they will continue to move forward at the passengers who do not use seat belts endan-
speed their car was travelling just before the ger not only themselves but a lso the other oc-
impact. cupants qfig . 180.

What happens to passengers not How to wear seat belts


wearing seat belts? properly
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk fatal
Putting on the three-point seat belts
injuries in the event of an accident.
Always fasten your seat belts before driving
off

Fig. 179 A driver not wearing a seat belt can be


thrown forwards
Fig.181

Fig. 180 A rear passenger not wearing a seat belt can


be thrown forwards

In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers will .. Adj ust the front seat and head restraint cor-
be thrown forwards and make violent contact rectly before putting on the seat belt
with the steering wheel, dashboard, wind- ~page 66, Front seats. ...
screen, etc ~ Fig. 179. Passengers not wear-
ing their belts risk being thrown out of the
168 Seat b e lts

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch


plate and pull it slowly across your chest
..& WARNING
and lap Q .&,. - The shoulder section of the belt should
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the be fitted across the centre of the collar
appropriate seat and push it down until it is bone close to the body. To fasten the
securely locked with an audible click belt, take hold of the belt above the
Q Fig. 182. latch plate and pull it slowly down across
Pull the belt to check that it is now securely your chest. Wear the lap portion of the
fastened. seat belt as low as possible over the hips
so that there is no pressure on the lower
The three-point inertia reel belts are ten- abdomen. The belt should always be
sioned automatically. The retractor system worn tightly Q Fig. 183. Pull the belt
gives complete freedom of movement, as tight if necessary to take up any slack.
long as the pull on the belt is slow. Hard brak- - Always make sure that belt ls positaoned
ing locks the belt. The belt will also lock when properly. Incorrectly worn seat belts can
you accelerate, drive up or down a steep hill or give rise to injuries even in a minor colli-
in a sharp curve. sion .
- Seat belts worn too loose can result in in-
A WARNING juries because they allow excessive for-
- Always make certain that the belt is posi- ward movement in a crash; the occupant
tioned properly ~ Fig. 181 - risk of injury will be brought to a sudden stop by the
Q page 168, Adjusting the seat belts. belt webbing .
- The latch plate of the belt must always
be engaged in the correct buckle for that Wearing and adjusting the seat belts
seat. Otherwise the belt will not be fully during pregnancy
effective and the danger of injury increa-
ses. To afford the best protection for the unborn
child it is important for the mother to wear
the seat belt properly at all times.
Adjusting the seat belts
Always position seat belts properly for maxi-
mum safety.

Fig. 184 Positioning seat belts during pregnan cy

Women should always ensure they adjust the


Fig. 183 Adjusting s houlder/l<Jp belt
seat belt correctly during pregnancy.

Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor-


The following features allow you to match the rectly before putting on the seat belt
position of the seat belt to your height: o page 66, Front seats.
- Belt height adjustment To fa sten the belt, take hold of the latch
- Seat height adjustment (front seats) plate and pull it slowly down across your
chest. Wear the lap portion of the seat belt IJJ>
Seat b elts 169

as low as possible over the hips so that


there is no pressure on the stomach
(D Note

Q Fig. 184, o ..&,. - It is also possible to adjust the height of


Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the the front seats to obtain the best posi
appropriate seat and push it down until it is tion for the front seat belts.
securely locked with an audible click - The shoulder section of the belt should
o page 167, Fig. 182. be fitted across the centre of the collar
Pull the belt to check that it is now securely bone close to the body. The lap belt must
fastened. be worn tightly over the hips. It must
not be positioned over the stomach. Pull
A WARNING t he belt tight if necessary to take up any
slack.
During pregnancy, women should especial-
ly make sure to wear the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible across the hips Taking off the seat belts
so that there is no pressure on the stom The red button releases the belt from the
ach. buckle.

Seat belt height adjustment


Seat belt height adjusters can be used to ad
just the height of the shoulder portion of the
seat belt.

Fig. 186 The latch plate of the belt springs out of the
buckle

Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.


The latch plate will spring out of the buckle .
Guide the belt back by hand so that it is tak
Fig. 185 8elt height adjustment for the front seats: en up by the retractor.
guide fitting

The shou lder section of the belt shou ld be fit


Belt tensioners
ted across the centre of the collar bone close How the belt tensioners work
to the body o ..&. in Adjusting the seat belts
on page 168. The seat belts for the driver and front passen-
ger are equipped with belt tensioners.
Take hold of the guide fitting and slide it up
wards @ , or The seat belts on the front seats are ten-
Compress the adjuster @ and slide the sioned automatically in frontal, side and rear-
guide fitting downwards @ . end impacts above a certain degree of severi-
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt ty. This helps to reduce the forward motion of
sharply to check that the catch on the guide the occupants.
fitting is engaged securely. In a less severe accident, or in the event of a
rollover, the belt tensioners are not activated. ~
170 Seat belts

.&_ WARNING
- Any work on the tensioner system or re-
moval and installation of system compo-
nents for other repairs must be per-
formed by a qualified workshop.
- The belt tensioners can only be activated
once. If they have been activated at any
t ime, the system must be replaced.

('!) Note
- Some smoke may be released when the
belt tensioners are activated. Th is does
not mean there is a fire in the vehicle.
- The relevant safety requirements must
be observed when the vehicle or compo-
nents of the system are scrapped. Your
authorised dealer is familiar with these
regulations and will be pleased to pass
on the information to you .
Airbag system 171

Airbag system - goes out and then comes on again after the
ignition is switched on.
Description of airbag - comes on or flickers while the car Is moving.
system
General notes on airbag system
& WARNING
- The airbags are not a substitute for the
The airbag is an integral part of the car's pas- seat belts; they are an integral part of
sive safety system. the car's overall passive safety system.
The airbags can only offer effective pro
In conjunction with the three-point seat belts,
tection if the occupants are wearing their
the airbag system gives the front occupants
seat belts. For this reason it is very im-
additional protection for the head and chest
portant to wear the seat belts at all
and for the area around the driver's knees in
times ~page 165, Why is it so impor-
the event of a severe frontal collision.
tant to use seat belts?.
In a severe side collision the side* airbags and - The seat belts and a irbags can only pro-
the head-protection airbags reduce the risk of vide maximum protection if the occu-
injury to the occupants in the areas of the pants are seated correctly~ page 66,
body facing the Impact ~ .&. . Front seats.
- If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
In addition to their normal function of pro-
forward, or are not seated correctly while
tecting the occupants in a collision, the seat
the vehicle is in motion, you are at great-
belts also hold them fn a position where the
er risk of injury should the airbag system
airbags can inflate properly and provide maxi-
be triggered in an accident.
mum protection.
- Components of the airbag system are lo-
The airbag system will only work with the ig- cated in various parts of the vehicle. If
nition on. The airbag system is monitored repairs to other vehicle components
electronically; the airbag warning lamp indi- make it necessary to perform work on
cates whether the system is functioning prop- the airbag system or to remove or install
erly. parts of the airbag system, this may
cause damage to the airbag system . As a
The main parts of the airbag syste m are:
result, the airbags may not inflate cor-
- The electronic monitoring system (control rectly or may not be triggered at all in an
unit and sensors) accident s ituation. For this reason, you
- The two front airbags and the driver's knee should always have the work carried out
airbag by a qualified workshop.
- The front side airbags and the side airbags* - If a fa ult shou ld occur in the airbag sys-
in the outer rear seats tem, have the system checked Immedi-
- The head-protection airbags ately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise
- The warning lamp El in the instrument the system may fail to trigger in an acci-
cluster dent.
- Do not attempt to modify components of
There is a fault in the airbag sys tem if the
the airbag system in any way.
warning lamp
- Never make any alterations to the front
- does not come on when the ignition is bumper or the body.
switched on . - Do not remove the front seats.
- does not go out about 4 seconds after the - The airbag system can only be activated
ignition is switched on. once; if the airbag has been triggered,
the system must be replaced. Should the ~
172 Airbag system

airbag system or airbag modules have to fined refe rence value In the control unit the
be replaced, the qualified workshop car- airbags will not be triggered, even though the
rying out the replacement will document accident may cause extensive damage to the
all details in the appropriate section of car.
the Service Schedule.
- If you sell the vehicle, remember to pass (D Note
on the complete Service Wallet to the The airbag releases a fine dust when it in-
new owner. If the front passenger's air- flates. This is quite normal and does not
bag has been deactivated, it is important mean there is a fire in the vehicle.
that the new owner is also given the rele-
vant documents. Front airbags
- The relevant safety requirements must
be observed when the vehicle or compo- Important notes on front passenger's
airbag
nents of the airbag or belt tensioner sys-
tems are scrapped.
A AIRBAG
When are the airbags triggered?

One or more airbag systems are triggered in


severe collisions, depending on the circum-
stances.
The airbag system is not triggered in minor
collisions, or in rear collisions, or if the car
Fig. 187 Front passenger's sun visor: Airbag sticker
overturns. In these situations, the occupants
are protected by wearing the seat belts. A sticker1>with important information about
the front passenger's airbag is provided on
Factors det erm ining the t riggering
response the front passenger's sun visor. Please refer to
t he safety notes in the following chapters:
It is not possible to define the exact trigger-
ing response of the airbag system in all possi- - Child seats and front passenger's airbag
ble situations, since the circumstances in dif- c:::> page 15 7, Safety notes for using child
ferent types of accialent will vary considerably. seats
Important factors include, for example, the - Safe distance from front passenger's airbag
nature (hard or soft) of the object which the c:::> page
174, Important safety notes on the
car hits, the ang le of impact, vehicle speed front airbag system
and so on. - Objects between front passenger and front
passenger's a irbag ~ page 174, Important
Whether the airbags are triggered depends
safety notes on the front airbag system
primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate re-
sulting from the collision. By processing the
signals from the sensors located in the vehi-
cle, the electronic control unit is immediately
able to evaluate the severity of the collision
and activate the restraint systems according-
ly. If the deceleration rate is below the prede-

ll Still under developm ent at the time of printing. Not


available in all expo rt ve hicles.
Airbag system 173

Description of front airbags How the front airbags work


The airbag system is not a substitute for the When fully inflated, the airbags reduce the
seat belts. risk of head or chest injury.

Fig. 1 90 Front airbags in inflated condition

The driver's and front passenger's airbag are


triggered in certain frontal collisions
c:::> Fig. 190. Further airbag systems may also
be triggered, depending on the circumstan-
ces.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill
with a propellant gas and open out in front of
the driver and front passenger ~ Fig. 190. In
order to provide the desired extra protection
in an accident, the airbags have to inflate ex-
The front a irbag for the driver is located in the
tremely rapidly (within fractions of a second).
padded hub of the steering whee l ~ Fig. 188.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the for-
The front airbag for the front passenger is in
wards movement of the front occupants and
the dashboard above the glove box
help to reduce the risk of injury to the head
c:::> Fig. 189. The locations of the airbags are
and t he upper part of the body.
marked with the word "AIRBAG".
Spec ial open ings in the airbag allow the gas
In conjunction with the three-point seat belts,
to escape at a controlled rate to restrain the
the front airbags give additional head and
forward movement of the occupant's head
chest protection for the driver and front pas-
and torso. Once the impact has been absor-
senger and for the area around the driver's
bed, the airbag deflates sufficiently for the
knees in the event of a severe frontal collision
front occupants to see forward .
c:::> &.
in Important safety notes on the front
airbag system on page 174.
174 Airbag system

Important safety notes on the front - Applies to vehicles on which the front
airbag system passenger's airbag cannot be deactiva-
There ore a number of safety points concern- ted: Do NOT use a rearward-facing
ing the airbag system which you should re- child seat on the front passenger"s
member. This will help to reduce the risk of seat.
injury in on occident. - Applies to vehicles with key-operated
switch for deactivating the front pas-
senger's airbag: Do NOT use a rear-
ward-facing child seat on the front pas-
senger's seat while the front passeng-
er's airbag is active. If you have no al-
ternative but to use a rearward-facing
child seat on the front passenger's
seat, the front passenger's airbag must
be deactivated beforehand via the key-
operated switch* c::> page 180. Make
Fig. 191 Minimum dist ance from steering wheel
sure that the front passenger's airbag
is reactivated by means of the key-op-
A WARNING
- 1
erated switch" as soon as the child seat
- It is important for the driver and front is no longer needed on the front pas-
passen9er to maintain a distance of at senger's seat.
least 25 cm from the steering wheel or - Occupants sitting in the front of the car
dashboard ~Fig. 191. The airbag system must never carry any objects or pets in
will not be able to give the required pro- the space between them and the airbags,
tection if you sit too close to the steering or aUow children or other passengers to
wheel or dashboard. There is also a risk travel in this position.
of injury ifthe airbags are inflated. The - Do not cover or stick anything on the
front seats and head restraints must al- steering wheel hub or the soft plastic
ways be positioned correctly for the surface of the airbag unit on the pas-
height of the occupant. senger's side of the dashboard, and do
- If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean not obstruct or modify them in any way.
forward or to the side, or are not seated These parts should only be cleaned with
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, a dry cloth (or with a cloth moistened
you are at greater risk of injury. Should with plain water). It is also important
the airbag system be triggered in an acci- not to attach any objects such as cup
dent there is an even gre.ater risk of in- holders or telephone mountings to the
jury. surfaces covering the airbag units.
- Never let a child travel on the front seat - Any work on the airbag system or remov-
without an appropriate restraint system. al and installation of the airbag compo-
If the airbag is triggered in an accident, nents for other repairs (such as repairs to
the child could sustain serious or fatal in- the steering wheel or removal of seats)
juries c::i page 15 7, Child seats. must be performed by a qualified work-
- Child seats in which the child faces the shop.
rear of the car are located directly in the
path of the front passenger's airbag if it
inflates. In this case, the child could sus-
tain serious or fatal injuries if the airbag
were to be deployed.
Airbag system 175

Knee airbag effective when used In conjunction with the


seat belts. Always fasten your seat belt prop-
Description of the knee airbag erly for this reason.
Applies to vehicles with knee airbag
Please note that, although the knee airbag
The knee airbag system can give additional system is designed to reduce the risk of seri-
protection to a driver wearing a seat belt. ous injury, the airbags can cause other injuries
when inflated (such as inflammation, bruis-
ing, abrasion and friction burns).

The basic parts of the knee airbag system


(driver's side) are:
- The e lectronic control unit
- An inflatable airbag (airbag and gas genera-
tor) fo r the driver
- The airbag warning lamp In the instrument
Fig. 192 Airbag (driver's side) cluster

The knee a irbag on the driver's side is located The knee airbag system is NOT triggered
in the dash panel underneath the steering in the following situations:
wheel c;) Fig.192. - If the ignition is off
The knee airbag provides extra protection for - In a frontal collision if the retardat ion rate
the driver's knees and thighs in addition to measured by the control unit is too low
the protection already given by the seat belt. - In side-on collisions
- If your vehicle is hit from behind
In addition to its normal function of restrain- - If the vehicle overturns
ing an occupant, the seat belt also holds the
- If a system malfunction occurs (warning/in-
driver in a position where the airbag can pro-
dicator lamp on) page 21
vide extra protection in a frontal collision.

The airbag system is just one component of & WARNING


the vehicle's restraint system and cannot re- - The seat belt and knee airbag system can
place the function of the seat belts. Please al- only protect the driver if he/she is sitting
ways remember that t he airbags can only pro- in the correct position c:) page 154.
tect you if you are wearing your seat belt - Have the system checked immediate ly by
properly. That is why it is so important to your Aud i dealer if t he airbag warning
wear your seat belt at a ll times (not j ust be- la mp lig hts up while you a re drivi ng
cause it's the law) c:) page 165, Why is it so Qpage 21.
important to use seat belts?.
Please also bear in mind thatthe a irbags are
on ly inflated in certain types of accident and
that they can only be triggered once. The seat
belts are also intended to protect you in situa-
tions where the airbags are not triggered or
have already been triggered (e.g. if your vehi-
cle collides with a second vehicle following an
initial impact).
That is just one reason why an airbag cannot
replace a seat belt. The airbag system is most
176 Airbag system

How the knee airbag works Important safety notes on knee airbag
Applies to vehicles. with knee airbag system
Applies to vehicles: with knee airbag
When fully inflated, the knee airbag can re-
duce the risk of injury to the driver's legs. Airbags ore intended as an additional re-
straint measure. Always wear your seat belt
correctly and sit in the correct position in your
seat.

There are many things that you and your pas-


sengers need to know and do to ensure that
t he seat belts and airbags can provide addi-
tion al protect ion.

_8. WARNING
Fig. 193 Inflated airbags provide protection in a fron
ta l collision An a irbag can cause serious injury wh ile it
is inflating. If you wear yo ur seat belt in-
The driver's and front passenger's airbag are correctly or sit in the wrong position in
triggered in certain frontal collisions your seat wh ile the vehicle is moving, this
c:> page 173, Fig. 190. Further airbag systems s ig nificantly increases the risk of inju ry
may also be triggered, depending on the cir- and can have fatal consequences.
cumstances. - The knee airbag system cannot protect
you properly if you are sitting too close
When the system is triggered, the airbag is
to one of the airbags. When adjusting
filled with propellant gas and inflated be-
the driver's seat, it is important to en-
tween the lower part of the dash panel and
sure that the following distances for the
the driver c:> Fig. 193.
driver's torso and knees are maintained:
Although the airbag is not a soft cushion, it - At least 25 cm (10 inches) between
can absorb the energy of an impact and thus chest and steering wheel/dash panel
help to reduce the risk of injury to the lower - At least 10 cm (4 inches) between
limbs. knees and lower part of dash panel
All this happens in a fraction of a second and - The risk of injury is increased if you lean
many people are not even aware that the air- fo rward or to the side, if the seat is incor-
bags have been triggered. Airbags are re- rectly adjusted, or if you are not wearing
leased with considerable force. For the protec- your seat belt. The risk is even higher if
tion of occupants, it is important t hat no o b- the airbag is triggered.
jects a re in the path of the airbags when they - Please always ensure that the knee air-
are inflated. bag can inflate free ly. Any objects be-
tween your body and the airbag will in-
When the seat belts are worn correctly, fully
crease the risk of injury in the event of an
inflated airbags will retard and rest rain the
accident, as they will impede the infla-
forward movement of the occupants, t hus
tion of the airbag and can be cat apulted
helping to reduce the risk of injury.
towards your body.
- Never transport items in the footwell
in front of the driver's seat. Bulky ob-
jects (such as shopping bags) could im-
pede the airbag or prevent it from in-
flating. Small items could be thrown
through the vehicle and cause inj ury to ...
Airba g s ystem 177

you or your passengers when the air- How the side airbags work
bags are triggered . Applies to vehicles: with side airbags

- Ensure that there are no cracks, deep When fully inflated, the side airbags reduce
scratches or other damage to the dash the risk of injuries to the upper part of the
panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag. body.

Side airbag.s
Description of side airbags
Applies to vehicles: with side airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the


seat belts.

Fig. 1 95 Inflated front and rear side airbags (exam-


ple)

In certain types of side collision the side air-


bags (front and rear*) are triggered on the im-
pact side of the vehicle <::> Fig. 195 . Further
airbag systems may also be triggered, de-
pending on the circumstances.
Fig. 19 4 Side airbags: Location i n driver's seat (exam-
ple) When the system is triggered, the airbag is
filled with propellant gas.
The side airbags are integrated in the backr-
ests of the front seats and outer rear seats*. In order to provide the desired extra protec-
The locations of the airbags are marked with tion in an accident, the airbags have to inflate
the word "AIRBAG". extremely rapidly (within fractions of a sec-
ond). The airbag releases a fine dust when it
In conjunction with the three-point seat belts,
inflates. This is quite normal and does not
the side airbags give the occupants additional
mean there is a fire in the vehicle .
protection for the whole upper part of the
body (i.e. the chest, stomach and pelvis) in When fully deployed, the airbags cushion the
the event of a severe side collision Q .&. in Im- impact for the occupants and help to reduce
portant safety notes on the side airbag sys- the risk of injury to the whole upper part of
tem on page 178. the body (i.e. the chest, stomach and pelvis)
on the side facing the door.
In a side collision the side airbags reduce the
risk of injury to the areas of the body facing
the impact.
1 78 Airbag system

Important safety notes on the side kicks), as this could damage parts of the
airbag system system. The side airbags could then fail
Applies to vehicles. with side airbags to operate when required.
There are a number of safety points concern- - If you intend to fit protective covers over
ing the airbag system which you should re- the seats, these must be of the specific
member. This will help to reduce the risk of type approved for use on Audi seats with
injury in on occident. side airbags. Conventional seat covers
would obstruct the side airbag when it
A WARNING inflates out of the backrest, and serious-
ly reduce the airbag's effectiveness.
- If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
- Any damage to the original seat uphols-
forward, or are not seated correctly while
tery or around the seams of the side air-
the vehicle is in motion, you are at great-
bag units must be repaired immediately
er risk of injury should the s ide airbags
by a qualified workshop.
be triggered in an accident. This applies
- Any work involving the side airbag sys-
particularly to children if they are not
tem or removal and installation of the
properly protected by a child restraint
airbag components for other repairs
system.
(such as repairs to the seats) must al-
- If children are not seated correctly, they
ways be performed by a qualified work-
are at greater risk of injury should the
shop. Otherwise the airbag system may
airbag system be triggered in an acci-
fail to work properly.
dent. This is particularly the case if the
child is travelling on the front passeng-
er's seat and the airbag system is trig-
(D Note
gered in an accident. This could result in All the other airbags in the car will remain
serious or potentially fatal injury functional if the front passenger's ai rbag
page 15 7, Child seats. has been deactivated.
- It is also important not to attach any ac-
cessories (such as cup holders) to the Head-protection
doors. This would impair the protection a i rbags
offered by the side airbags (front and
rear*). Description of head-protection airbags
- The sensors for the airbags are located in Applies to vehicles with head-protection airbags

the front doors. You must therefore not


make any modifications to the doors or
door trim (e.g. retrofitting loudspeak-
ers), as this could Impair the function of
the side a irbags. Any damage to the
front doors could lead to faults in the
system. Repairs or any other work on the
front doors must therefore always be
carried out by a qualified workshop.
- The built-in coat hooks should only be Fig. 196 Location of head-protection airbags above
the doors (example)
used for lightweight clothing. Do not
leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in
The head-protection airbags are located above
the pockets.
the doors on the left and right sides of the ve-
- Do not apply excessive force to the sides
hicle. The locations of the airbags are marked
of the backrests (such as hard knocks or
with the word "AIRBAG". liJ>
Airbag system 1 79

In conj unction with the three-point seat belts In order to provide t he desired ext ra protec-
and side airbags, the head-protection airbags tion in an accident, the airbags have to inflate
give the occupants additiona l protection extremely rapidly (within fraction s of a sec-
against head and neck injuries in a severe side ond). The airbag releases a fine dust when it
collision c::> .& in Important safety notes on inflates. This is quite normal and does not
the head-protection airbags on page 179. mea n there is a fire in the veh icle.

Together with other design features (includ-


ing cross-braces in the seats and the overall Important safety notes on the head -
strength of the body structure), the head-pro- protection airbags
Applies to vehicles: with head-protection airbags
tection and side airbag system offers an effec-
tive further improvement to occupant protec- There are a number of safety points concern-
tion in side impacts. ing the airbag system which you should re-
member. This will help to reduce the risk of
How the head protection airbags work injury in an accident.
Applies to vehicles: with head-protection airbags

When fully inflated, the airbags reduce the


&. WARNING - 1

risk of head or chest injury in a side collision. - It is important to ensure that the area
a round the openings for the head-pro-
tection airbags remains unobstructed at
all times, so that the airbags can inflate
properly if needed.
- The built-in coat hooks s hou ld only be
used for lightweight clothing. Do not
leave any heavy o r s harp-edged objects in
the pockets. When using the coat hooks,
do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
Fig . 19 7 Head-protection airbags in inflated condition - The space between the passengers and
(example) the head-protection a irbags must never
be occupied by children, other passen-
In certain types of side collision, the head- gers or pets. Passengers should never
protection airbag is triggered on the impact lean out or put a hand or arm out of the
side of the vehicle <:!) Fig. 197. Further airbag window while the vehicle is in motion .
systems may also be t riggered, depending on - Do not move the sun visors out to cover
the circumstances. the side wi ndows if there is anything at-
tached to them (such C!S pens or a re-
When the system is triggered, the airbag fills
mote control for the garage door) . These
with a propellant gas and covers the entire
objects could cause inju ry if the head-
area in fro nt of t he side windows, includ ing
protection airbag is triggered.
the door pillars. In th is way the system is able
to protect both the front and the rear occu- - The sensors for the airbags are Located in
pants on the side of t he vehicle where the im- the front doors. You must therefore not
pact occurs. The head -protection airbag in- make any modifications to the doors or
flates to soften the impact if an occupant door trim (e.g. retrofitting loudspeak-
strikes parts of the interior or objects outside ers), as this cou ld impair the function of
the vehicle with their head. By reducing the the side airbags. Any damage to the
head impact and restraining uncontrolled front doors could lead to faults in the
movement of the head, the airbag also re- system. Repairs or any other work on the ..,,.
duces the forces acting on the neck.
180 Airbag system

front doors must therefore a lways be


carried out by a qualified workshop.
- Where sun blinds are fitted on the rear
doors, these must not obstruct or impair
the airbags in any way.
- If unsuitable accessories are installed
near the head-protection airbag, the pro-
tection afforded by the airbag can be se-
riously impaired if the system is trig- Fig . 199 Centre console: Warning lamp lights up when
gered. When the head-protection airbag passenger's airbag is deactivated
opens, parts of these accessories could
be thrown into the vehicle and injure The key-operated switch for deactivat ing the
passengers Qpage 233. front passenger's airbag is located in the
- Any work involving the head-protection glove box~ Fig. 198.
airbags. or removal and installation of ... To deactivate the front passenger's airbag,
t he airbag components for other repairs use t he key to turn the key-operated switch
(such as repairs to the roof li ner), must to @ .
always be performed by a qualified work- ... The front passenger's airbag can be reactiva-
shop. Otherwise the airbag system may ted by turning the key to position (!).
fail t o work properly.
Deactivat ing front passenge r's a irba g
when a ch ild seat is in use
Deactivating the front
If you have no alternative but to install a rear-
passenger's airbag
Applies to vehicles with key-operated switch for front
ward-facing child seat on the front passeng-
passenger's airbag er's seat you must deactivate the front pas-
senger's airbag beforehand.
If an airbag has been deactivated, it should
be reactivated as soon as possible so that it We recommend that child seats should be fit-
can continue to give the required protection. ted on the rear seat so that the front passeng-
er's airbag can remain functional and provide
protection in an accident Q poge 157.

Monito ring of ai rbag syst e m


The ind icator lamp II
Q page 21 will light up
for a few seconds every time the ignition is
switched o n.
If the front passenger's airbag has been deac-
t ivated, the indicator lamp "PASSENGER AIR-
Fig. 198 Glove box: Key-operated switch for deactivat-
lng front passenger's airbag
BAG OFF" or "IJI"AIRBAG OFF or "Airbag de-
activated" will light up constantly as a re-
minder Q Fig . 199. In addition, the following
message will appear briefly:
Passenger ai rbag off

Once you have reactivated the passenger air-


bag, the following message will appear brief-
ly:
Passenger airbag on
Airbag system 181

.&. WARNING
- If you have no alternative but to install a
rearward-facing child seat on the front
passenger's seat, the front passenger's
airbag must be deactivated beforehand.
Potentially fatal injuries to the child can
result if the front passenger's airbag is
not deactivated Q page 1571
- If you have deactivated the front pas-
senger's airbag, reactivate it as soon as
the child seat is no longer needed so that
the airbag can continue to give the re-
quired protection.
- It is the driver's responsibility to ensure
that the key-operated switch is set to the
correct position.

All the other airbags in the car will remain


functional if the front passenger's airbag
has been deactivated with the key-operat-
ed switch.
182 Intelligent technology

Intelligent technology Traction control system (ASR)


In the event of wheelspin, the traction control
Electronic stabilisation system reduces the eng ine torque to match
control (ESC) the amount of grip ava ilable. This helps the
car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gra-
Description
dient.
ESC increases the car's stability. It reduces the
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
tendency to skid and improves the stability
and road holding of t he vehicle. The ESC de- When the EDL det ects wheelspin, it brakes
tects critical handling situations, such as un- t he spinning wheel a nd d irects the power to
de rsteer, oversteer a nd wheelspin on the driv- t he other d riven w heel (or wheels on q uattro*
en wheels. It stabilises the vehicle by braking versions). This funct ion is act ive up to abo ut
individua l wheels or by reducing the engine 100 km/h.
torque. The indicator lamp DJ in the instru-
To p revent the d isc brake of t he braked wheel
ment cluster starts flashing as soon as the
from overheating, the EDL cut s out automati-
ESC intervenes.
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The vehi-
The ESC incorporates the functions of the an- cle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on
ti-lock brake system (ABS), the brake assist again automatically when the brake has
system, the traction control system (ASR), the cooled down.
e lectronic differential lock (EDL), the electron-
Trailer stabilisation system*
ic limited slip differential* (front-wheel drive),
the selective wheel torque control* (four- If you are using your vehicle to tow a t railer,
wheel drive) and the trailer stabilisation sys- please bear in mind that trailers have a ten-
tem* page 195. The ESC a lso helps t o sta- dency to sway. If the ESC detects that the
bilise the vehicle by changing the steering trailer is swaying and this is affecting the tow-
wheel torque. ing vehicle, it will automatically brake the ve-
hicle where possible in order to stabilise the
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
trailer. The trai ler stabilisation system is not
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- available for all export versions.
de r braking until the veh icle has reached a vir-
Electronic limited slip differential* I
tual standstill. You can continue to steer the
sel.ective wheel torque control*
vehicle even when tine brakes are on full. Keep
your foot on the brake pedal and do not pump An electron ic limited slip differential (front-
the brakes. You will feel the bra ke peda l pul- wheel drive) or selective wheel torque control
sate wh ile the anti-Lock brake syst em is work- function (four-w heel d rive) intervenes when
ing. cornering by braking the unladen wheel(s) on
the inside of the bend individually as requi red .
Brake assist system This mi ni mises understeer and neutralises t he
The brake assist syst em can shorten the brak- car's handling under power to enable p reci-
ing distance. The braking force is automatical- sion cornering . The relevant system may not
ly boosted if you press the brake pedal quickly intervene in the wet or snow.
in an emergency. You must keep pressing the
Multicollision brake assist system
brake pedal until the danger has passed . On
vehicles with adaptive cruise control*, the re- The "multicollision brake assist system" can
sponse of the brake assist system will be more assist the driver and reduce the risk of skid-
sensitive if you are too close to the veh icle in ding and further collisions during an accident
front. by automatically applying the brakes. ll>-
Intelligent technology 183

The "multicollision brake assist system" acts into taking any risks when driving - this
in frontal, side and rear collisions when the can cause accidents.
airbag control unit detects a threshold trigger - Remember that the accident risk always
condition during an accident and the accident increases if you drive fast, especially in
occurs at a road speed in excess of 10 km/h. corners or on a wet or slippery road, or if
The ESC will automatically brake the vehicle you follow too close behind the vehicle in
(unless the ESC, hydraulic brake system or ve- front of you. Please bear in mind that
hicle's electrical system have been damaged even ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDL, elec-
during the accident). tronic limited slip differential, selective
The following conditions override the auto- wheel torque control and ASR cannot
matic brake application in an accident: compensate for the increased accident
risk.
- There is no automatic braking if the driver - When accelerating on a uniformly slip-
presses the accelerator. pery surface (for instance all four wheels
- The vehicle is braked manually if the brake on Ice or snow), press the accelerator
pressure applied by pressing the brake pedal gradually and carefully. The driven
is higher than the brake pressure Initiated wheels may otherwise start to spin (in
by the system. spite of the integrated control systems),
- The "multicollision brake assist system" is which would impair the car's stability
not available if an ESC malfunction occurs. and could lead to an accident.

.&. WARNING ('D Note


- The grip provided by the ESC, ABS, ASR,
- To ensure that the ABS and ASR systems
EDL, electronic limited-slip differential
work properly, all four wheels must be
and selective wheel torque control sys-
fitted with identical tyres. Any differen-
tems is still subject to the physical limits
ces in the rolling radius of the tyres can
of adhesion. Always bear this in mind,
cause the system to reduce engine power
especially on wet or slippery roads. If you
when this is not desired.
notice the systems cutting in, you should
- The systems can make noises when they
reduce your speed immediately to suit
intervene.
the road and traffic conditions. Do not
let the extra safety provided tempt you
- If the indicator lamp BJ rlJ
or appears,
there may be a malfunction ~ page 22.

Switching the ESC on/off


The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started.

The ESC operates in several levels. Depending


on which level is selected, the stabilising func-
tion <Qf the ESC is restricted or switched off,
and the vehicle is stabilised to a greater or
lesser degree.
In the following special situations, it may be
advisable to switch on the ESC sport mode to
allow a certain amount of wheel spin:
Fig. 200 Centre console (top): ESC button
- Rocking the car backwards and forwards to
free it
184 Intelligent technology

- Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces

Sport mode on ESC/ ASRoff Sportmodus off or


ESC/ ASR on
Characteris- The ESC intervenes less for The ESC intervenes a lot The stabilising function of
tics stabilisation purposes and less for stabilisation pur- the ESC and traction con-
the traction control sys- poses and the traction trol system (ASR) is fully
tern (ASR) is switched off control system (ASR) is available again.
c::> .&.. switched off c::> &..
Controls Press the I ~ OFF I button Press the 1.$ O FFI button Press the I ~ OFFI button
briefly. for longer than 3 seconds. again.
Indicator fl lights up. II and Ill*light up. II goes out, or II and
lamps Ill*go out.
Driver mes- Stabilisation control Stabilisation control Stabilisation control
sages (ESC): sport. Warning! (ESC): off. Warning! Re- (ESC): on
Restricted stability stricted stability (on vehicles with driver in-
(on vehicles with driver in- (on vehicles with driver in- formation system*)
form a tion system*) formation system*)

&. WARNING Brakes


You should switch off the ESC only if your New brake pads
driving ability and the traffic cond itions al-
New brake pads do not give full braking effect
low you to do so safely - danger of skid-
for the first 400 km, they must first be "bed-
ding!
ded in". However, you can compensate for the
- The stabilising functionality is restricted
slightly reduced braking effect by applying
in ESC sport mode. The driven wheels
more pressure on the brake pedal. Avo id plac-
may start to spin, causing the vehicle to
ing a heavy load on the brakes during the run-
lose grip, in particu lar on slippery or wet
ning-in period .
roads.
- When the ESC/traction control system Wear
(ASR) is switched off, the vehicle will not
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a
be stabilised.
great deal on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is operated. Nega-
@ Note tive factors are, for instance, city traffic, fre-
- If a malfunction occurs in the Audi mag- quent short trips or hard driving with abrupt
netic ride system, the ESC sport mode starts and stops.
cannot be switched on and the ESC can-
not be switched off. If the ESC sport Noises
mode is activate.d or the ESC is off, the Brake noise may develop in certain situations,
ESC will automatically be reactivated. depending on the speed, braking force and
- The ESC sport mode cannot be switched ambient conditions (such as temperature and
on (i.e. the ESC/ASR cannot be switched relative humidity) .
off) while the cruise control system* or
Effect of moisture and salt
adaptive cruise control* is actively regu-
lating the speed. In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain,
early morning dew, or after washing the car or
driving through water, the fu ll braking effect .,..
Intelligent tec hnology 185

can be delayed by moisture (or in winter by Brake servo


ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you ap-
should be "dried" by pressing the pedal to re-
ply to the brake pedal. It only works when the
store full braking effect.
engine is running.
When you are driving at higher speeds with
the windscreen wipers on, the brake pads are .&. WARNING
very briefly brought into contact with the - When applying the brakes to clean off
brake discs. This automatic process which deposits on the pads and discs, select a
goes unnoticed by the driver is carried out at clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconven-
regular intervals and is intended to improve ience or endanger other road users; do
braking response in wet conditions. not risk an accident.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be - Never let the car coast with the engine
temporari ly reduced if the car is driven for switched off (this can cause accidents).
some distance without using the brakes when
there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The CD CAUTION
layer of salt that accu mu lat es on the discs and - Never let the brakes "drag" by leaving
pads can be removed with a few cautious your foot on the pedal when you do not
brake applications. really intend to brake. This overheats the
brakes, resulting in longer stopping dis-
Corrosion
tances and greater wear.
There may be a tendency for dirt to build up - Before driving down a long, steep gradi-
on the brake pads and corrosion to form on ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and
the discs if the car is used infrequently, or if select a lower gear. In this way you will
you only drive low mileages without using the make use of the engine braking effect
brakes very much. and relieve the load on the brakes. If you
still have to use the brakes, it is better to
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if cor-
brake firmly at intervals than to apply
rosion has formed on the discs, it is advisable
t he brakes continuously.
to clean off the pads and discs by braking
firmly a few times from a moderately high
1 Note
speed ~ .&. .
- If the brake servo is out of action, you
Faults in the brake sys tem must apply considerably more pressure
If the brake pedal travel shou ld ever increase to the brake pedal than you normally
suddenly, this may mean that one of the two would.
brake circuits has fa iled. Drive immediately to - If you wish to equ ip the car with accesso-
the nearest qualified workshop and have the ries such as a front spoi ler or wheel cov-
fault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be ers, it is important that the flow of air to
prepared to use more pressure on the brake the front wheels is not obstructed, oth-
pedal and allow for longer stopping distances. erwise the brakes can overheat.

Low brake flu id level


Electro-mechanical
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if power steering
the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid
level is monitored electronically. Electro-mechanical power steering assists the
driver when steering.

The degree of power assistance is adapted


electronically, depending on the speed.
186 Intelligent technology

If the power steering should fail at any time


@ Note
or the engine is switched off (for instance
when being towed). the car can still be You can drive on If the warning/indicator
steered. However, substantially more effort Lamp . or IJI
lights up only briefly.
than normal will be required to turn the steer-
ing wheel. Four-wheel drive
Warning/ indicator lamps and driver
(quattro)
Applies to vehicles: with four-wheel drive
messages
On quattro models the engine power is dis-
Do not drive vehicle: steering defective
tributed to all four wheels.
If the warning lamp lights up permanently
and the message appears, there may be a General notes
power steering failure . On four-whee l drive vehicles, the engine pow-
Do NOT drive on. You should obta in professio - er is distributed to all four wheels. The distri-
na l assistance. bution of power is controlled automatically
accord ing to your driving style and the road
Do not drive vehicle: steering defective conditions. Also refer to page 182, Elec-
There is a malfunction in the electronic steer- tronic stabilisation control (ESC).
ing lock. The ignition can no longer be switch- The four-wheel drive is specially designed to
ed on . complement the superior engine power of
Do not have the vehicle towed away, because your Audi. This combination gives the car ex-
you won't be able to steer it. You should ob- ceptional handling and performance capabili-
tain professional assistance. ties - both on normal roads and in more diffi-
cult conditions, such as snow and ice. Even so
ftl Steering : system fault . You can continue (or perhaps especially for this reason), it is im-
driving portant to observe certain safety points & .
If the indicator lamp lights up, the steering
Winter tyres
response may be heavier or lighter than usual.
In addition, it is possible that the steering Thanks to its four-wheel drive, your ca r will
wheel will be off centre when driving in a have plenty of traction In winter conditions,
straight line. even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,
we sti ll recommend that winter tyres or a ll-
Drive slowly to a qualified workshop and have
season tyres should be fitted on oil four
the fau lt rectified.
wheels when winter road conditions are ex-
Ill Steering lock: malfunction. Please con- pected, mainly because th is will give a better
tact workshop braking response .

There is a malfunction in the electronic steer- Snow chains


ing lock.
On roads where snow chains are mandatory,
Drive to a qualified workshop soon and have this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive
t he fault rectified. page 228, Snow chains .

.&. WARNING Replacing tyres

Have the system malfunction repaired by a On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four
qualified workshop as soon as possible - tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-
risk of accident. ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread
depths page 225, Replacing wheels and
tyres. ..,_
Intelligent technology 187

Off-road er? Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent


Your Audi does not have enough ground clear- power management system to control the dis-
ance to be used as an off-road vehicle. It is tribution of electrical energy. This significant-
therefore best to avoid rough tracks and un- ly improves reliability when starting the en-
even terrain as much as possible. Also refer to gine, and also prolongs the life of the battery.
q page273. The main functions incorporated in the power
management system are battery d iagnosis,
A WARNING
-1
residual current management and dynamic
- Even with four-wheel drive, you should power management.
always adjust your speed to suit the con-
Battery diagnosis
ditions. Do not let the extra safety affor-
ded by four-wheel drive tempt you into The battery diagnosis function constantly reg-
taking any risks when driving - this can ister:s the condition of the battery. Sensors
cause accidents. detect the battery voltage, battery current
- The braking ability of your car is limited and battery temperature. This enables the
by the g rip of the tyres. In this respect, system to ca lculat e the current power level
your car is no different from a car with- a nd charge condition of the battery.
out four-whee l drive. So do not be temp-
Residual current management
ted to drive too fast on icy or slippery
roads just because the car still has good The residua l current management reduces
acceleration in these conditions (accident power consumption whi le the vehicle is
risk). parked. It controls the supply of power to the
- On wet roads bear in mind that the front various electrical components while the igni-
wheels may start to "aquaplane" and tion is switched off. The system takes the bat-
lose contact with the road if the car is tery diagnosis data into consideration.
driven too fast. If this should happen, Depending on the power level of the battery,
there will be no sudden increase in en- the individual electrical components are
gine speed to warn the driver, as with a switched off one after the other to prevent
front-wheel drive car. So do not drive too the battery from losing too much charge and
fast in the wet: adjust your speed to suit to ensure that the eng ine can be started relia-
the conditions (accident risk). bly.

Dynamic power management


Power management
While the vehicle is moving, this funct ion dis-
This system helps to ensure reliable tributes the avai lable power to the vario,us
starting
electrical components and systems accord ing
The power management controls the distri- to their requirements. The power manage-
bution of electrical energy and thus helps to ment ensures that on-board systems do not
ensure that there is always enough power consume more electrical power than the alter-
available to start the engine. nator can supply, and thus maintains the max-
imum possible battery power level.
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-
tem is left parked for a long time, the battery 1 Note
will gradually lose its charge because certain
- The power management system is not
electrical equipment (such as the immobilis-
able to overcome the given physical lim-
er) continues to draw current even when the
its. Please remember that the power and
ignition is off. In some cases there may not be
life of the battery are limited. ~
enough power available to start the engine.
188 Inte lligent technology

- If the indicator lamp Iiic> page 21 ap- charged while the vehicle is being driven . This
pears, the starting ability may be im- can occur when a lot of power is being con-
paired. sumed but only a small amount supplied, es-
pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini-
Points to remember tially.

Starting ability hos first priority. To restore the necessary energy balance, the
system will then temporarily shut off the elec-
Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures trical components that are using a lot of pow-
all place a heavy load on the battery. In these er, or reduce the current they are consuming.
conditions a large amount of power is con- Heating systems in particular use a large
sumed, but only a small amount is supplied. amount of electrical power. If you notice, for
The situation is also critical if electrical equip- instance, that the seat heating" or the rear
ment is in use when the engine is not running. window heater is not working, t hey may have
In this case power is consumed when none is been temporarily switched off or regulated to
being generated. a lower heat output. These systems wi ll be
available again as soon as sufficient electrical
In these situations you wi ll be aware that the
power is available.
power management system is intervening to
control the distribution of electrical power. You may also notice that the engine runs at a
slightly faster idling speed. This is quite nor-
When the vehicle is parked for long
mal, and no cause for concern. The increased
periods
id Ling speed allows the alternator to meet the
If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of greater power requirement and charge the
several days or weeks, the power manage- battery at the same time.
ment will gradually shut off the on-board sys-
tems one by one, or reduce the amount of cur-
Information saved in
rent they are using. This limits the amount of
power consumed and helps to ensure reliable
the control units
starting even after a Long period. Certain con- The vehicle is fitted in the factory with elec-
venience features, such as remote control un- tronic control units that, among other things,
locking, may not be available. These functions control the engine and the gearbox. The con-
will be restored when you switch on the igni- trol units also monitor the exhaust system
tion and start the engine. and the airbags.
With the engine switched off The control units continually analyse data rel-
If you listen to the radio or use other electri- evant to the vehicle while you are driving. In
cal equipment whelil the engine is not run- the event of faults or anomalies in the vehicle
ning, this will discharge the battery. data, only these data are saved. As a rule,
faults are shown by the warning lamps in the
On vehicles with driver information system*, a instrument cluster.
message will appear before the battery power
drops to a level where the starting ability is Dat a saved in the control units can only be
impaired. read and analysed with special equipment.

This message advises you to start the engine A qualified workshop is only able to recognise
in order to recharge t he battery. and deal with faults by using the relevant
saved data. Among other things, the saved
When the engine is running data may contain the following information:
Although the alternator generates electrical - Data relating to the engine and the gearbox
power, the battery can still become dis- -Speed ...
Intelligent technology 189

- Direction of travel event memory. The event memory should only


- Braking force be read out and erased by a qualified work-
- Seat belt warning system data shop.
The control units installed will not under any A_ WARNING
circumstances record conversations in the ve-
The diagnostic connection must not be
hicle.
used for other purposes. Incorrect use can
Event data recorder cause malfunctions - risk of accident!
Your vehicle is not equipped with an event da-
ta recorder.
In an event data recorder, information about
the vehicle is temporarily saved. In the event
of an accident, you can therefore obtain de-
tailed information about the course of events.
On vehicles with an airbag system, accident-
related data such as impact speed, seat belt
status, seat positions and trigger times can be
saved. The exact information saved depends
on the manufacturer.
The installation of an event data recorder is
subject to the agreement of the vehicle's own-
er. This process is governed by legislation in
some countries.

Reprogramming control units


All data for controlling components are saved
in the control units. Some convenience fea-
tures, such as one-touch signalling, single
door unlocking and display messages can be
reprogrammed using special workshop equip-
ment. If any convenience features are reprog-
rammed, the information In this Owner's
Manual will no longer be accurate for the fea-
tures that have been changed. We recom-
mend having the reprogramming confirmed
by an Aud i workshop in the "Workshop re-
marks" section of your Service Schedu le.
Your Audi dealer will be able to provide you
with information about possible reprogram-
ming options.

Event memory
There is a diagnostic connection for reading
out the event memory located in the footwell
on the driver's side of the vehicle. Information
regarding the operation and status of the ve-
hicle's electronic control units is stored in the
190 Your vehicle and the environment

Your vehicle and the several times will remove the moisture
environment and restore the full braking effect.

Running in CD CAUTION
A new vehicle should be run in over a distance - Parts of the vehicle (e.g. engine, gear-
of 1,500 km. For the first 1,000 km the en- box, running gear or electrical compo-
gine speed should not exceed 2/3 of the maxi- nents) can be badly damaged when driv-
mum permissible engine speed - do not use ing through water.
full throttle and do not tow a trailer or cara- - Always switch off the start/stop system*
van. From 1,000 to 1,500 km you can gradu- ~ page 98 before driving through water.

ally increase the engine rpm and road speed.


(D Note
During its first few hours of running, the in-
- It is advisable to check the depth at the
ternal friction in the eng ine is greater than
deepest point before approaching the
later on when all the moving parts have bed-
water.
ded down.
- Do NOT stop the vehicle, drive in reverse
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 or switch off the engine before you are
km also influences the engine quality. After out of the water.
this period you should continue driving at - Bear in mind that waves created by on-
moderate engine speeds, in particular when coming traffic could exceed the permissi-
the engine is cold. This helps to reduce wear ble wading depth of your vehicle.
and tear on the engine and increases the po- - Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
tential mileage which can be covered by the sion).
engine.

You should also avoid driving with the engine Emission control
speed too low. Change down to a lower gear systems
when the engine no longer runs "smoothly".
Excessively high engine speeds are prevented Catalytic converter
by an automatic rev limiter. Applies to vehicles with petrol e ngine: The
vehicle must only be used with unleaded pet-
Driving through water rol; otherwise the catalytic converter will be
on roads irreparably damaged .

Never allow the fuel tank to run completely


Please note the following in order to prevent
dry, as the irregular supply of fuel can cause
damage to the vehicle when driving through
misfiring. This allows unburnt fuel to enter
water (e.g. on flooded roads):
the exhaust system, which can cause over-
- The water level must not be higher than the heating and damage to the catalytic convert-
vehicle's underbody. er.
- Do not drive faste r than walking pace.
Diesel particulate filter
_& WARNING Applies t o vehicles with d iesel engine: The
After driving through water, mud, sludge, diesel particulate filter can filter out almost
etc., the braking effect can be delayed all soot particles contained in the exhaust
slightly due to moisture on the discs and gas. In normal driving conditions the filter is
brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully self-cleaning. In addition, the diesel particu-
late filter is also automatically regenerated at
certain intervals. In this case, the indicator ""'
Your veh i cle and the environment 191

lamp II does not come on. An Increased adopt ing an economical driving style and an-
idling speed and a certain odour may be no- ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
ticed while this is happening. reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. The fol-
lowing section gives you some tips on lessen-
Should the self-cleaning or automatic regen-
ing the impact on the environment and reduc-
eration function of the filter not be able to op-
ing your operating costs at the same time.
erate, e.g. when the vehicle is continuously
used only for short trips, the filter becomes Anticipate well in advance
obstructed with soot and the indicator lamp
A car uses most fuel when accelerating. If you
II for the diesel particulate filter lights up
anticipate hazards and speed changes well in
~ page23 .
advance, you will need to brake less and thus
A WARNING
-
accelerate less. Wherever possible, let the car
s low down gradually with a gear engaged, for
The exhaust system is very hot when the instance when you can see that the next traf-
vehicle is being driven and after the engine fic lights are red. This takes advantage of the
has been switched off. engi ne braki ng effect, reducing wear on the
- Never touch the tailpipes when they are brakes and tyres. Emissions and fue l con-
hot - you could burn yourself! sumption will drop to zero due to the overrun
- Because of the high temperatures which fuel cut-off.
can occur in the emission control system
(catalytic converter or diesel particulate Change gear early to save fuel
filter), do not park the vehicle where the An effective way of saving fuel is to change up
exhaust can come into contact with quickly through the gears. Running the engine
flammable materials under the car (e.g. at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnec-
on grass or at the forest edge). - Fire haz- essa ry amount of fuel.
ard!
Manual gearbox: Shift up to second gear as
- Do not apply any underseal agents in the
soon as possible. If possible, we recommend
area around the exhaust system - fire
shifting up to the next gear at approx. 2,000
hazard!
rpm. You can minimise your fuel consumption
by always selecting the highest possible gear
Taking the vehicle out that will allow the engine to run smoothly in a
of service given driving situation .

If you wish to take your vehicle out of service Automatic gearbox: Press the accelerator
for a long period of time, contact a qualified slowly and avoid using the "kick-down" fea-
workshop. Here you w ill receive advice on nec- ture.
essary measures, for example regarding corro-
Avoid driving at high speed
sion protection, maintenance and storage. In
addition, please observe the general notes on Avoid travelling at top speed . Fuel consump-
the battery ~ page 218. tion, exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-
crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving at
moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
How to improve
economy and minimise Do not let the engine idle for longer than
pollution necessary
Engine idling periods are automatically re-
Fuel economy, environmental impact and
duced on vehicles with start/stop system. On
wear on the engine, brakes and tyres depend
vehicles without a start/stop system, it is
largely on the way you drive the vehicle. By
worthwhile switching off the engine at level Ill>
192 Your vehicle and the environment

crossings, for instance, or at traffic lights wit h Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
a long red phase. The fuel saved after about Every kilo of extra weight will increase the
S seconds can be greater than the amount of fuel consumption, so it is worth checking the
fuel needed to restart a warm engine (the ex- luggage compartment occasionally to make
act fuel saving depends on the engine ver- sure that no unnecessary loads are being
sion). transported .
The engine takes a very long time to warm up The roof carrier increases the a ir resistance of
when it is running at idling speed. Mechanical the vehicle and should be removed when not
wear and pollutant emissions are also espe- in use. This will save about 12 % of fuel at
cially high during this initial warm-up phase. speeds of between 60 and 7S mph.
It is therefore best to drive off immediately
after starting the engine. Avoid running the Save electrical energy
engine at high speed. The eng ine drives the alternator to generate
Regular servicing electricity. This means that fuel consumption
rises when more power is required for e lectri-
Regular servicing can establish a basis for cal equipment. Switch off electrical equip-
good fuel economy before you start driving. A ment when it is not needed. Electrical equip-
well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of ment which uses a lot of electricity includes
Improved fu e l effi ciency as well as maximum the blower (at a high setting), the rear win-
reliability and an enhanced resale value. A dow heating and the seat heating.
poorly maintained engine can consume up to
ten percent more fuel than necessary.
Environmental
Avoid short trips compatibility
The engine and emission control system need
Environmental protection is a top priority in
to reach their proper wo rking temperature in
the design, choice of materials and produc-
order to minimise fuel consumption and emis-
tion of your new Audi.
sions.
Design measures for eco nomical recycling
A cold engine uses disproportionately more
fuel. The engine only reaches its working tem- - Joints and connections designed for ease of
perature after about four kilometres, when dismantling
fuel consumption will return to a normal lev- - Modular construction to facilitate disman-
el. tling
- Increased use of sing le-grade materials
Check tyre pressures
- Plastic parts and elastomers are labelled in
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
correct pressures ~ page 224 to save fue l. If ISO 1629
the tyre pressures are just 0.S bar too low,
this can increase the fuel consumption by as Choice of materia ls
much as 5 %. Due to the greater rolling resist- - Nearly all materials used can be recycled
ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear - Similar types of plastics grouped together
and impairs handling. for easy recycling
Do not use winter tyres all through the year; - Recycled materials used in manufacture
they will increase fuel consumption by up to - Reduced vapour emissions from plastics
10%. - CFC-free refrigerant in air conditioner ~
Your vehicle and the environment 193

Compliance with the laws prohibiting the


use of: Cadm ium, asbestos, lead, mercury and
chrome VI.

Manufacturing met hods

- Using recycling material for manufacturing


plastic parts
- Solvent-free cavity sealing
- Solvent-free wax for protecting t he vehicles
in transit
- Solvent-free adhesives
- No CFCs used in production
- Surplus materials used extensively for ener-
gy conversion and building materials
- Overall water consumption reduced
- Heat recovery syst ems
- Water-soluble paint

' '
194 Towing a trailer

Towing a trailer Trailer weights


Never exceed the maximum permitted trailer
Driving the vehicle with weights.
a trailer or caravan
If you do not load the trailer up to the maxi-
Technical requirements mum permitted trailer weight, you can then
climb correspondingly steeper gradients.
The towing bracket must comply with certain
technical requirements. The maximum trailer weights listed are on ly
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above
Your car is intended mainly for transporting
sea level. With increasing altitude the engine
passengers and luggage. However, if suitably
power and therefore the car's climbing ability
equipped, it can also be used t o tow a trai ler
are impai red because of the reduced air densi-
or caravan.
ty, so the maximum trailer weight has to be
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted reduced accordingly. The weight of the car
towing bracket it willl already have the neces- and trailer must be reduced by about 10% for
sary technical modifications and meet the every further 1000 m (or part thereof). This
statutory requirements. figure refers to the combined weight of the
(loaded) vehicle and (loaded) trailer.
A 13-pin socket Is provided to make the e lec-
trical connection between the car and the The figures for the draw bar weight that ap-
trailer. If the trailer you wish to tow has a 7- pear on the identification plate of the towing
pin plug, the necessary adapter cable can be bracket are for certification purposes only.
obtained from a specialist retailer. The correct figures for your specific model,
which may be lower than these figures for the
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the car
towing bracket, are given in the registration
is purchased, this must be done according to
documents and in c:>page 272. Also refer to
the instructions of the towing bracket manu-
r:!.>page 273.
facture r c:> page 202.
Exterior lighting
.&_ WARNING
- I Before starting a journey, make sure that all
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the in the lights for the trailer are working properly.
stallation should be carried out by a quali-
fied workshop. Distributing the load
- In particular In high outside tempera- Distribute load s in the trailer so that heavy
tures it is not possible to drive up long objects are as near to the axle as possible.
steep gradients without a suitable cool- Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to
ing system. The engine would then over- prevent them slipping. A badly distributed
heat. load can also affect handling. This can acti
- Incorrect installation can result in a safe- vate the trailer stabilisation featu re a n d cause
ty risk. the vehicle to reduce speed.

Where possible, operate the trailer with the


Points to check before towing maximum permitted draw bar weight on the
There are a number of points which need to ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not ex-
be checked before towing a trailer or caravan. ceed the specified limit.

Observe the maximum permitted trailer Tyre pressure


weights r:t.> page 272. Check the tyre pressures on your car and ad
just for "full load" conditions (refer to the .,..
Towing a trailer 195

sticker listing the tyre pressures on the end


face of the driver's door c> page 224,
@ Note

Fig. 227). It may also be necessary to adjust We recommend having the car serviced be-
the tyre pressures on the trailer according to tween the normal inspection intervals if it
the recommendations of the trailer manufac- used frequently for towing a trailer.
turer.
Trailer stabilisation system
Exterior mirrors Applies to vehicles: with towing bracket
Check whether you can see enough of the road
Trailer stabilisation helps to reduce the risk
behind the trailer with the standard mirrors.
of the vehicle skidding when towing a trailer.
If this is not the case you should have addi-
tional mirrors fitted. Both exterior mirrors
When is the trailer stabilisation systeml>
should be mounted on hinged extension
activated?
brackets. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient
vision to the rear. Trailer stabilisation is active when the follow-
ing requirements are met:
Headlights
- The ESC must be switched on c> page 183
Before starting a journey, check the headlight and fully functional (no ESC malfunction).
beam settings with the trailer hitched up. Ad-
- The trailer connector must be properly se-
just the headlight settings if necessary.
cured in the vehicle socket.
If the car is equipped with manual headlight - The vehicle speed must be higher than ap-
range control, you only need to turn the ad- prox. 60 km/h.
juster control as required, see c> page 54.
How trailer stabilisation works
The headlight beam settings will be adjusted
In many cases, the driver can stabilise a sway-
automatically if your vehicle is equipped with
ing trailer by manually braking the vehicle.
dynamic headlight range control*.
However, if the ESC detects that the trailer is
Power supply swaying and this is affecting the towing vehi-
To ensure that the engine can be started again cle, it will automatically brake the vehicle in
after the ignition is switched off, the power order to stabilise the trailer. The indicator
management system c> page 187 controls the lamp m will flash in the instrument cluster.
distribution of electrical power and gradually If possible, do not turn the steering wheel at
switches off unnecessary e lectrical equip- this s tage.
ment. The trailer is s upplied with power dur-
In order to warn traffic behind you, t he brake
ing this period. The power supply to the trailer
lights will come o n during this automatnc
is interrupted while the engine is being star-
braking operation .
ted.
A trailer may sway quite considerably without
Removable ball joint coupling the trailer stabilisation system intervening.
Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket This can happen when the swaying move-
are equipped with a removable ball joint cou- ments of the light-weight trailer are not or
pling. This is stored in the spare wheel well or hardly passed on to the towing vehicle and are
in a separate bag on the floor of the luggage therefore not detected by the ESC. .,.
compartment, together with the necessary
fitting instructions.

1l Not available on vehicles for some markets.


196 Towing a tra iler

If the system for activating the trailer brake with a light load and will therefore not
lights is defective, this will be indicated in the intervene.
instrument cluster display c:) page 25. - A trailer can still "jack-knife" on slippery
roads with little grip, even if the towing
Requirements for correct functioning of
the trailer stabilisation system vehicle is equipped with the trailer stabi-
lisation system.
If these conditions are not met in full, the
- Trailers with a high centre of gravity may
trailer stabilisation system will only intervene
even tip over before they start to sway
to a limited extent or not at all c:) &..
sideways.
- The electrical connection between the tow- - If you are not towing a trailer, but the
ing vehicle and the trailer must be function- trailer socket is being used (e.g. for an il-
ing correctly. luminated bicycle rack), the trailer stabi-
- The load on the trailer must be properly se- lisation system may be activated in ex-
cured. treme driving conditions.
- The tyre pressures on both the vehicle and - Please note the additional information
t he trai ler must be adapted to the load that and warnings ~ page 196, Driving tips.
is being carried.
- Where possible, operate the trailer with the Driving tips
maximum permitted draw bar weight.
- The trailer overrun brake must be set cor- Driving with a trailer always requires extra
rectly. This is important to ensure that the care.
trailer can be braked correctly, to avoid the Weight distribution
vehicle and trailer "jack-knifing" and to pre-
vent excess braking of the trailer. Try to avoid towing a loaded trailer with an
- At low outside temperatures, both the tow- unladen vehicle. If this cannot be avoided,
ing vehicle and the trailer should be fitted drive extra slowly to allow for the unbalanced
with winter tyres. weight distribution.

Speed
_& WARNING
- Normally, you must not exceed 80 km/h when
It is essential that you adjust your speed
towing a trailer or caravan. However, if the
to suit the weather, road and traffic condi-
trailer/caravan meets certain technical re-
tions. Do not let the trailer stabilisation
quirementsl>, you can drive at max. 100 km/
system tempt you into taking any risks
h. Please observe any other regulations appli-
when driving - this can cause accidents.
cable in the country in which you are travel-
- The ESC and tra iler stabilisation system
ling.
cannot defy the laws of physics. This
should be kept in mind, particularly on The stability of the car and trailer is reduced
slippery and wet roads and when towing with increasing speed. For this reason it is ad-
a trailer with a light load. visable not to drive at the maximum permissi-
- The trailer stabilisation system is func- ble top speed in unfavourable road, weather
tional, regardless of whether the trailer or wind conditions. This applies especially on
has a mechanical overrun brake or not. a downhill gradient. "'
- The trailer stabilisation system is not al-
ways able to detect swaying of trailers

ll Including trailer s tabilisation sys tem or yaw damper


Towing a trailer 197

You should always reduce speed immediately Accessories


if the trailer shows the slightest sign of sway Applies to vehicles: with steel towing bracket
ing . Never try to stop the swaying by acceler-
Before mounting equipment and accessories
ating further.
(e.g. bicycle rock) please observe the follow-
Always brake in good time. If the trailer has ing notes.
an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at
first and then firmly. This will prevent the ~
jerking that can be caused by the trailer !
wheels locking. Change down in good time be
fore going down a steep hill so that you can
use the engine braking effect to slow down
the vehicle.
~ I i_
<t3oomm 1- - - -
1 ..... :
I
Swaying and pitching can be reduced by sta- :~ 600mm
biliser aids. We recommend having stabiliser
aids installed when towing trai lers with a high Fig. 201 Load distribution of equipment and accesso-
ries (illustration shows an example vehicle)
trai ler weight. They can be purchased and in-
stalled at a qualified workshop. The following description does not apply to
Electronic stabilisation control towing brackets made of aluminium.

The ESC - in particular in conjunction with the The equipment/accessories mounted must
trailer stabilisation system Q page 195 - not protrude more than 700 mm from the
makes it easier to sta bilise a trailer if it starts ball joint @ .
to skid or sway. You should therefore keep the The total weight (mounted equipment plus
ESC switched on at all times. the load) must not exceed 75 kg.
Overheating The maximum load depends on where the
In hot weather, keep an eye on the coolant centre of gravity lies.
temperature gauge r.:> poge 11. When climb- The maximum weight decreases as the dis-
ing long hills with the engine running fast in tance between the centre of gravity and the
low gear, the coolant temperature can in- ball joint @ increases.
crease. Reduce speed immediately ifthe nee
dle moves to the right end of the scale. For in The following limits apply:
formation on the warning lamp . refer to If the distance is 300 mm, the total weight
~ poge20. (incl. the equipment mounted) @ must not
excee d 7 5 kg.
If the distance is 600 mm, the tota l weight
(incl. the equipment mounted) must not
excee d 3 5 kg.

Only bicycle racks for a maximum of three bi-


cycles may be used .

Equipment mounted on the towing


bracket
Please make sure that the equipment moun-
ted has been approved by the manufacturer
for use on the ball joint. If you mount unsuita-
ble equipment, this can cause damage to the Ill-
198 Towing a trailer

towing bracket. In an extreme case, damage or nn a sepa rate bag on the floor of the lug-
to the towing bracket could cause it to break gage compartment.
c::> & . The ball joint can be fitted and removed by
hand .
.&._ WARNING
- Make su re that t h e equipment and acces- Equipment mounted on the towing
sories have been approved for use on bracket
Audi vehicles. Please note that the ball joint attachment can
- Use of unsuitable equipment can result be damaged by using unsuitable equipment
in severe damage to the towing bracket. that is mounted onto the towing bracket (e.g.
The towing bracket could then break bicycle carrier) . Due to the material construc-
while using the equipment or while pull- tion, such damage to the towing bracket dra-
ing a trailer (accident risk). matically increases safety risks and in extreme
- Never use tools of any kind when fitting cases could Lead to breakage of the towing
and removing the ball joint. This cou ld bracket while towing c::> & .
damage the mechanism which locks the
Therefore, ensure before buying such equip-
ball joint in place and impair its safety
ment that it is suitable for mounting onto the
(accident risk).
vehicle's towing bracket and that it is ap-
- When using equipment mounted to an
proved for this purpose. In order to avoid
aluminium towing bracket rather a steel
damage to the ball joint from unsuitable
bracket, the loadl carried must be re-
equipment we recommend that equipment
duced (e.g. two bicycles instead of
for the towing bracket be acquired through an
three). If Loads are too heavy this can
Audi dealer. Also refer to c::> page 233.
Lead to damage and, in extreme cases,
cause the towing bracket to break.
.&. WARNING -
- Only mount equipment on the towing
Removable towing bracket of your Vehicle if you are certain
bracket it will not damage the bracket. Use of
unsuitable equipment can resu lt in se-
Introduction
vere damage to the towing bracket. The
Applies to vehicles: with removable towing bracket
towing bracket could then break while
Special care is required when fitting and re- pu lling a trailer and cause an accident.
moving the towing bracket. - Never use tools of a ny kind when fitting
and removing the ball joint. This could
damage the mechanism which Locks the
ba ll joint in place and impair its safety
(accident risk) .

(D Note
- Do not attempt to modify or repair the
ball joint or other towing bracket compo-
nents.
Fig. 202 Luggage compartment: Ball joint for towing
- Should you have any difficulties when us-
bracket (stowage example)
ing the towing bracket, or suspect that it
The removable ba lL joint attachment for the is not fitted properly, contact a qualified
towing bracket is stored under the floor panel workshop. ..,.
Towing a trailer 199

- Before setting off, always check that the .. Remove the cover from the rear bumper. To
ball joint is secured properly do so, turn the two fasteners 90 anti-clock-
Qpage 200. wise q Fig . 203 .
- Never disengage the ball joint with the .. Remove the plug q Fig. 204 from the
caravan I trailer still hitched or with a bi- mounting fixture.
cycle rack or similar accessory still at- .. Check that the mounting fixture is free of
tached. dirt; clean if necessary Q .'.D..
- It is advisable to remove the ball joint
Continued q page 199, Fitting the ball joint
when you are not t owing a trailer. Check
(step 2).
whether the plug is properly inserted in
the mounting fixture and that the bump-
er cover is fitted .
.A WARNING ~1

- The ball joint must be removed if you in- It is important to keep the mounting fix-
tend to clean the car with a steam clean- ture clean. Otherwise the ball joint may
ing attachment. Check whether t he plug fail to engage securely (accident risk).
Is properly Inserted in the mount ing fi x-
ture and that the bumper cover is fitted. Fitting the ball joint (step 2)
- For installation a n d remova l of the ball Applies to vehicles: with removable towin g bracket
joint we recommend that the gloves pro-
vided be used.

Fitting the ball joint (step 1 )


Applies to vehicles: with removable towing bracket

Fig. 2 0 5 Removable towing bracket: Ball joint

The spring mechanism inside the ball


joint must be in the "ready" position .
... Check that the red marking @ Fig. 205 on
Fig. 20 3 Area below rear bumper: Removing bumper t he knob is inside the green zone on the ball
cover (example) joint .
.. Check t hat t he locking ba ll (!) is inside the
hole in the shaft section of the ball joi nt .
.. Che ck t hat t he knob protrudes vis ibly f rom
the ball joint, so that there is a clear gap @
between the knob and the ball joint.

The ball joint can only be installed if the inter-


nal spring mechanism is in the ready position.

Continued q page 200, Fitting the ball joint


Fig. 2 04 Area below rear bumper: Pulling out plug (step 3).

The two fasteners for the cover are located on


the underside of the bumper Q Fig. 203.
200 Towing a trailer

Fitting the balljoint (step 3)


Applies to vehicles: with removable towing bracket
..& WARNING - 1
- If it is not possible to set the spring
mechanism to the "ready" position as de-
scribed above, please contact a qualified
workshop and, for safety reasons, do not
use the ball joint.
- To avoid injufy, keep your hands away
from the knob when inserting t he ball
joint in the mounti ng fixture.

Fig. 206 Removable towing bracket: Setting the


@ Note
spring mechanism to t he "ready" position Make sure that the knob can turn freely
when the ball joint is inserted.

Fitting the ball joint (step 4)


Applies to vehicles: with removable towing bracket

joint

Setting the spring mechanism to the


"ready" pos ition (if required)
... Insert the key Fig . 206 for tocking the
ball joint into the Lock on the knob and turn
it clockwise .
... Pull out the knob in direction 0 , hold and
turn in direction @ until the locking ball
engages c> ,&..

Inserting the ball joint


... With the spring mechanism in the "ready"
position, insert the ba ll joint into the
Fig. 20 9 Area below rear bumper: Connecting socket
mounting fixture and push it upwards
@, safety cable attachment
c> Fig. 207 in the cifirection indicated (arrow)
Li)... The spri ng mechanism should then Safety check
engage automatically with an audible click.
... Check that the green marking @ c> Fig. 208
.,. Lock the ball joint by tu rn ing the key ant i-
on the knob is inside the green zone on the
clockwise.
ball joint.
... Take out the key and press the cover cap on-
... Check that the knob is directly against the
to the lock.
ball joint, so that there is no gap (J) be-
Continued c> page 2 00, Fitting the ball joint tween the knob and the ball joint. ..,.
(step 4).
Towing a trailer 201

Check that the ball joint is locked and the


key is removed (so that the knob cannot be
pulled out).
Check that the ball joint fits tightly in the
mounting fixture (try moving it about to
check).

Electrical socket for trailer


To plug in the electrical connection for the
Fig. 2 11 Area below rear bumper: Fitting the plug
trailer, swivel the connecting socket down
from underneath the bumper @ q Fig. 209.
Take off the cover cap and insert the key @
Safety cable attachment q Fig. 210 in the lock on the knob.
Unlock the ball joint by turning the key
When you hitch a trailler up to your vehicle,
clockwise.
hook the safety cable Into the attachment
Take hold of the ball joint and pull out the
providedll @ <::> Fig. 209. If your vehicle does
knob in direction G).
not have a safety cable attachment, loop the
Keep hold of the knob and turn it as far as it
safety cable around the ball joint.
will go in direction @ .
If the safety check is not satisfactory, the ball Release the knob. The spring mechanism
joint must be fitted again properly. will remain in the "ready" position <::> _&.
Pull the ball joint down out of the mounting
A WARNING fixt ure.
Insert the plug into the mounting fixture
To avoid accidents, the ball joint must
~ Fig. 211 .
meet all the safety requirements listed in
Swivel the electrical socket upwards as far
the safety check. The towing bracket must
as the stop.
not be used if any one of these require-
Stow the ball joint underneath the floor
ments is not met. Please contact a quali-
panel or in the bag on the floor of the lug-
fied workshop.
gage compartment, depending on your vehi-
cle configuration .
Removing the ball joint Insert the bumper cover with the retaining
Applies to vehicles: with re movable towing bracket tabs first and turn both fasteners 90 until
they are secure .

A WARNING
- Make sure that the plug is properly fitted
in the mounting fixture for the towing
bracket. Otherwise the ball joint may fail
t o engage securely the next time it is at-
tached if dirt has accumulated in the
mounting fixture.
Fig . 210 Removable tow ing bracket: Removing the
ball joint - On vehicles in which the ball joint is
stowed in a bag on the floor of the lug-
gage compartment, the bag must always
be secured to the front right fastening ..,.

1l This equipment is not available for a ll e xport versions.


202 To wing a trailer

ring. Otherwise the bag could be cata- - For your own safety, please observe the
pulted through the interior of the vehicle instructions provided by the manufactur-
in the event of sudden braking or an acci- er of the towing bracket.
dent - risk of injury and accident!

A3: Towing bracket (retrofitting) If the connector socket is not fitted cor-
rectly, this could cause damage to the ve-
The vehicle can be retrofitted with a towing
hicle's electrical system.
bracket.

A3 Sportback: Towing bracket


(retrofitting)

The vehicle can be retrofitted with a towing


bracket.

Fig. 212 A3: Posit ions of securing points (viewed from


above and from side)

If a towing bracket is to be f itted after the car


is purchased, this must be done according to
the instructions of the towing bracket manu-
Fig. 213 A3 Sportback: Positions of securing points
facturer. The towing bracket is bolted to the (viewed from above and from side)
vehicle body on the inside of the spare wheel
well. The securing points are marked with an If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the car
@Q Fig. 212. is pu rchased, this must be done according to
the instructions of the towing bracket manu-
Qualified workshops are familiar with the
facturer. The towing bracket is bolted to the
method of installation and any modifications
vehicle body on the inside of the spare wheel
which may be required for the cooling system.
well. The securing points are marked with an
A_ WARNING
- 1
@Q Fig. 213 .

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the in- Qualified workshops are familiar with the
stallation should be carried out by a quali- method of installation and any modifications
fied workshop. which may be required for the cooling system. Ill>
- If the towing bracket is incorrectly fitted,
this could cause a safety risk.
Towing a trailer 203

& WARNING
-
Qualified workshops are familiar with the
method of installation and any modifications
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the in- which may be required for the cooling system.
stallation should be carried out by a quali-
fied workshop. & WARNING
- If the towing bracket is incorrectly fitted,
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the in-
this could cause a safety risk.
stallation should be carried out by a quali-
- For your own safety, please observe the fied workshop.
instructions provided by the manufactur-
- If the towing bracket is incorrectly fitted,
er of the towing bracket.
this could cause a safety risk.

CD CAUTION
- For your own safety, please observe the
instructions provided by the manufactur-
If the connector socket is not fitted cor- er of the towing bracket.
rectly, this could cause damage to the ve-
hicle's electrical system.
If the connector socket Is not fitted cor-
A3 Saloon: Towing bracket (retrofitting) rectly, this could cause damage to the ve-
The vehicle can be retrofitted with a towing hicle's electrical system .
bracket.

N
0

~
"'

"'....
...
0

. .. 76,0

Fig. 214 A3 Saloon: Positions of securi ng points


(viewed from above and from side)

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the car


is purchased, this must be done according to
the instructions of the towing bracket manu-
facturer. The towing bracket is bolted to the
vehicle body on the inside of the spare wheel
well. The securing points are marked with an
@ Q fig. 214.
204 Care of vehicle and cle aning

Care of vehicle and particularly to the operating pressure and the


spraying distance. Do not point the spray jet
cleaning
directly at the seals on the windows, doors,
General notes boot lid, bonnet or sun roof*, or at the tyres,
rubber hoses, insulating material, sensors* or
Regular and careful care helps to maintain the camera lenses*. Maintain a distance of at
value of the vehicle. This may also be one of least40 cm .
the requirements for upholding any warranty
claims in the event of corrosion or paint de- Do not use a high-pressure cleaner to remove
fects. snow and ice.

Qualified workshops carry stocks of suitable Never use high-pressure cleaners with a
car care products. Please follow the instruc- round-jet nozzle or "dirt blasters".
tions for use on the packaging . The water must not be hotter than 60 (.

A WARNING
-1
Automatic car washes
- Cleaning products and other materials Spray the vehicle with water before washing.
used for car care can damage health if
Ensure that the windows and sun roof* are
misused.
closed and that the windscreen wipers are
- Car care products can contain toxic sub-
switched off. Follow the car wash operator's
stances and must always be kept in a
rules and recommendations, especially if any
safe place out of reach of children.
accessories are attached to your vehicle.

@ For the sake of the environment If possible use a brush less car wash.

- Please choose care products that are not Washing by hand


harmful to the environment.
Clean the car with a soft sponge or brush,
- Surplus cleaning materials should not be
starting on the roof and working down. Use
disposed of together with ordinary
solvent-free cleaning agents.
household waste.
Washing matt-painted vehicles by hand
Washing the vehicle To avoid damaging the paintwork when wash-
ing the car, first remove any dust, sand and
The longer residues like insects, bird drop-
grit. Insects, grease stains and fingerprints
pings, resinous tree sap or road salt are al-
are best removed using a special cleaning
lowed to remain on the vehicle, the more
agent for matt-painted surfaces.
damage they can do to the paintwork. High
temperatures (for instance in direct sunlight) Apply the prod uct with a micro-fibre cloth . Do
further intensify the corrosive effect. not apply too much pressure to avoid damag-
ing the paintwork.
Before washing, soak heavy dirt with plenty of
water. Rinse the car thoroughly with water. Then
clean the car with a neutral shampoo and a
After the period when salt is put on the roads,
soft micro-fibre cloth.
have the underside of the vehicle washed
thoroughly. Rinse the car with lots of water again and
then let it dry in the a ir. Remove any water
High- pressure cleaners
stains with a chamois.
When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
structions for the equ ipment. This applies
Care of vehicle and cleaning 205

Stubborn dirt, such as bird droppings or resi n- damage. Always use t he electrical power
ous tree sap, is best removed with plenty of control to fold the mirrors in/out on
water and a micro-fibre cloth. vehicles with electrically retractable ex-
terior mirrors" .
.&. WARNING - Do not wash the vehicle in d irect sunlight
- Follow the ru les and recommendations - otherwise the paint can be damaged.
of the car wash operator and do not - Do not use insect sponges or abrasive
wash the vehicle with the ignition household sponges, etc. - they can d am-
switched on - risk of accident. age the surfaces.
- To avoid cutting yourself on sharp metal - Matt-painted vehicle parts:
parts, always wear suitable protection - Do not use polish or wax - otherwise
when cleaning the underside of the car the paintwork can be damaged .
or inside the wheel arches. - Never use car-wash programmes that
- After the car has been washed, the full include wax coatings. This could spoil
braking effect can be delayed by mois- the matt finish .
ture (or in winter by ice) on the discs and - Do not attach any stickers or magnet
brake pads - risk of accident. The brakes labels to matt-painted parts as these
should be dried by pressing the pedal to could damage the paintwork when
restore full braking effect. they are removed.

CD CAUTION @ For the sake of the environment


- Before washing t he vehicle in a n auto- The car should only be washed in special
matic car wash, please make sure to re- wash bays. This prevents oily water from
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent getti ng into the public drains.

Notes on cleaning and care


For cleaning and care of ind ividual compo- you have special questions or certa in compo-
nents on the vehicle, please refer to the tables nents are not listed, please ask your qualified
below. These are recommendations only. If workshop. Please also refer to the notes ~ .& .
Cleaning the exterior
Component Situation Remedy
Wiper blades Di rt/deposits Q page 64
Headlights/ Dirt/deposits Soft sponge wit h mild detergenta>
rear lights
Sensors/ Di rt/deposits Sensors: soft cloth with solvent-free cleaning agent
camera lenses Camera lenses: soft cloth with alcohol-free cleaning
agent
Snow/ice Small brush/so lvent-free de-icer spray
Wheels Road sa lt Water
Brake dust Acid-free cleaning agent
Tailpipes Road sa lt Water; suitable stainless steel cleaning product if nee-
essary
Ornamental Dirt/deposits Mild detergenta>; suitable stainless steel cleaning prod-
trim/ uct if necessary
mouldings
206 Care of vehicle and cleaning

Component Situation Remedy


Paintwork Paint damage Refer to the vehicle data sticker for the paint no. and
touch up using a paint pen ~ page 272
Fuel overflow Rinse with water without delay
Surface rust Surface rust remover, apply wax afterwards; contact
your qualified workshop wit h any questions
Corrosion Have it removed by yo ur qualified workshop
Water no longer Apply wax (at Least twice a year)
pea rls off clean
paintwork
Paint has lost its Treat with a suitable polish; finish with wax coating if
shine, g loss cannot polish does not contain wax compounds
be restored by wax-
ing
Carbon parts Dirt/deposits Same treat me nt as painted parts ~ page 204
Decals Dirt/deposits Soft sponge with mild detergenta>
a) Mild detergent: not more than two tablespoons of p H-neu tral detergent to one litre of water

Cleaning the interior


Component Situation Remedy
Windows Dirt/deposits Glass cleaning agent, then wipe dry
Ornamental Dirt/deposits Mild detergenta)
trim/
mouldings
Plastic parts Dirt/deposits Damp cloth
Heavier dirt/depos- Mild detergenta>; solvent-free plastic cleaning agent if
its necessary
Displays Dirt/depos its Soft cloth with LCD cleaner
Controls and dis- Dirt/deposits Soft brush, then soft sponge with m ild detergental
plays
Seat belts Dirt/deposits Mild detergenta> (allow to dry before retracting)
Fabrics, Surface dirt Vacuum cleaner
leatherette, Water-based stains, Absorbent cloth and mild detergenta>
Alcantara e .g . coffee, tea,
b lood, etc.
Fat-based stains, Apply mild detergenta>, dab off dissolved g rease or col-
e.g. oil, make-up, our particles with absorbent cloth; if necessary treat
etc. with water
Special dirt/stains, Special stain remover (dab off with absorbent fabric); if
e.g. ballpoint pen, necessary treat with m ild detergent 3 >
na il varnish, disper-
s ion paint, shoe
cream, etc.
Care of vehicle and cleaning 207

Component Situation Remedy


Natura l Leather Fresh d irt/stains Cotton cloth with mild detergenta>
Water-based stains, Fresh stains: absorbent cloth
e .g . coffee, tea, Dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather
blood, etc.
Fa t-based stains, Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and suitable stain remover
e .g . oil. make-up, for leather
etc. Dried stains: grease removal spray
Special dirt/stains, Stain remover suitable for leather
e .g . ballpoint pen,
nail varnish, disper-
sion paint, shoe
cream, etc.
Care of vehicle Reg ula rly a pply leather-care cream with ultra-violet pro-
tection and im p regnating compound; if necessary use
special colour leather cream
Ca rbon pa rts Di rt/deposits Same treatment as plastic parts
a) Mild detergent: not mo re tha n two tab lespoons of pH-neutral detergent to one lit re of water

& WARNING
- Never clean the camera lens with
cleaning agents which are abrasive or
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the contain alcohol - danger of scratches
windscreen. In bad visibility conditions and cracks appearing.
such as light rain, low sun or when driving - Windows and wind screen
at night these coatings can cause in-
- Remove snow and ice from windows
creased dazzle, which is a serious safety
and exterior mirrors with a plastic scra-
hazard. Such coatings can also cause the
per only. To avoid scratches, the scra-
wiper blades to judder.
per should only be pushed in one direc-

CD CAUTION
tion and not moved to a nd fro .
- Never use warm or hot water to re-
- Headlig hts/rear lights move snow and ice from windows and
- Never clean the headlight s/rear lights mirrors. This could cause the glass to
wi th a dry cloth o r sponge. crack!
- Do not use cleani ng agents containing - To avoid damag ing t he heating ele-
alcoho l. This cou ld cause t he g lass to ment, do not put stickers on t he in ner
crack! sid e of t he rear window.
- Wheels - Ornamenta l trim/ mo uldings
- Do not use paint polish or other abra- - Do not use chrome cleaning agents.
sive agents. - Paintwork
- If the protective paint coating on the - The vehicle must be free of dirt and
wheel rim is scratched or damaged by dust before applying polish/wax - oth-
stone chips etc., the damaged area erwise the paintwork may be dama ged.
should be touched up without delay. - Do not polish/wax the vehicle in direct
- Sensors/camera lenses sunlight - this can damage the paint!
- Never remove snow and ice from t he - Do not attempt to polish out surface
camera lens using warm or hot water - rust deposits - this can damage the
danger of cracks appearing on the lens. paint! llJJ>
208 Care of vehicle and cleaning

- Displays car is left for a prolonged period in the


- Displays must not be cleaned with a bright sun, it is best to cover the leath-
dry cloth - this can scratch the display! er.
- Control consoles
- Do not let any liquid get inside the con-
Note
trol consoles - risk of damage! - It is much easier to remove dead insects
- Seat belts if the car has been waxed recently.
- Do not remove the seat belts to clean - Regular waxing can help protect against
them. surface rust.
- Do not use chemical cleaning agents,
corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp in-
struments to clean the seat belts or
their components - this can damage
the belt webbing!
- If you find any damage to the belt web-
bing, the belt fittings, the belt retrac-
tor or the buckle. have the belt in ques-
tion replaced by a qualified workshop.
- Fabrics/leatherette/Alcantara
- Do not use leather care products, sol-
vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain re-
movers, or any similar products on
leatherette/Alcantara fabrics .
- To avoid damage, stubborn stains
should be removed by a qualified work-
shop.
- Never use steam cleaners. brushes,
hard sponges or similar utensils.
- Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such
as zip fasteners, rivets or belts, can al-
so damage the surface of the fabric.
- Please make sure you close any velcro
fasteners, e.g. on your clothing, as
these could otherwise damage the up-
holstery.
- Natural leather
- Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe
cream, stain removers, or any similar
products on leather fabrics.
- Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such
as zip fasteners, rivets or belts, can al-
so damage the surface of the fabric.
- Never use steam cleaners, brushes,
hard sponges or similar utensils.
- Avoid exposing leather to direct sun-
light for long periods, otherwise it may
tend to lose some of its colour. If the
Checking and topping up fluids 209

Checking and topping moderate engine speeds and a light throttle.


Fill up with premium or Super Plus petrol as
up fluids
soon as possible.
Fuel
Petrol grade
CD CAUTION
- Do NOT fuel your vehicle with high-etha-
Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine
nol fuel blends (e.g. E50 or E85). This
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the will damage the fuel system.
fuel tonk flop. - Just one tank of leaded fuel or fuel with
metallic additives will permanently im-
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
pair the efficiency of the catalytic corn-
verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-
verter.
rol. The petrol must comply with the EN 228
- You should use only petrol additives
or DIN 51626-1 standard and must be sul-
which have been approved by Audi. Addi-
phur-free. You can fue l your vehicle with fuels
t ives with so-called octane boosters or
containing a maximum of 10% ethanol (ElO).
antiknock add itives can contain met a llic
The petrol grades have different octane rat-
add itives that cause significant damage
ings (RON).
to the engine and the catalytic converter.
The following headings relate to the sticker Do not use such additives.
on the inside of your vehicle's tank flap: - Metal-based fuels, which can be identi-
fied from the marking on the fuel dis-
Unleaded fuel only RON / ROZ 95 Super,
Premium or min. RON / ROZ 91 Normal penser, must not be used. LRP fuel (lead
replacement petrol) also contains high
The use of premium petrol (95 RON) is recom- concentrations of metallic additive. Risk
mended. If that type of fuel is not available, of engine damage!
regular petrol (RON 91) can be used with a - High engine speed and full throttle can
slight loss of power. damage the engine when using petrol
Unleaded fuel only, min. RON / ROZ 95 with an octane rating lower than the cor-
Super, Premium rect grade for the engine.

Premium petrol (at least 95 RON) must be


(D Note
used.
- You can use higher octane fuel than your
If prem ium petrol is not available, the engine engine requires.
can be run on regular petrol with 91 RO N as - I n countries where s ul phur-free fuel is
a n emergency measure. In this case on ly use not avai lable, you may use low-sulphur
moderate engine speeds and a light t hrottle. fuel instead.
Fill up with premium or Super Plus petrol as
soon as possible.
Diesel fuel
Unleaded fuel only RON / ROZ 98 Super Applies to vehicles. with diesel engine
Plus or min. RON / ROZ 95 Super, Premium
Please note the information on the inside of
The use of Super Plus petrol (98 RON) is rec- the fuel tonk flop.
ommended . If that type of fuel is not availa-
The use of s ulphur-free d iesel to EN 590 (in
ble, premium petrol (RON 95) can be used
Germany: EN 590 or DIN 51628) is recom-
with a slight loss of power.
mended. If that type of fuel is unavailable,
If premium petrol is not available, the engine d iesel to EN 590 can be used. It must have a
can be run on regular petrol with 91 RON as cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane ""'
an emergency measure. In this case only use
210 Checking and topping up fluids

number indicates the ignition quality of the


d iesel fuel.

Winter-grade diesel
Diesel fuel can thicken in winter. For this rea-
son petrol stations in some countries also of-
fer winter diesel.

CD CAUTION
Fig. 216 Fuel tank flap with ta nk cap attached
- The vehicle is not designed for the use of
biodiesel (FAME fuel) . The fue l system When refuelling with natural gas, please note
would be damaged if you used biodiesel. the additional information and warnings
- Do not mix fuel additives ("thinners", r:::> page 104.
petrol or similar additives) with the die-
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
sel fuel.
and tocked automatically by the central tock-
- If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may
ing .
be necessary to have the water separa-
tor1> on the fuel filter drained more fre - Unscrewing the tank cap
quently than is specified in the Service
"" Press the left side of the flap to open it
Schedule. This helps to prevent potential
-arrow- r:::>Fig. 215.
engine faults c.=> poge 24.
"" Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise.
@ For the sake of the environment ""Hook the cap onto the open flap Fig. 216.

Never pour fuel down drains or into the Closing the tank cap
ground. "" Screw on the tank cap clockwise until it
clicks audibly.
Filling the tank "" Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it
click into place.
Procedure for filling the tank
When the automatic fi ller nozzle is operated
correctly it will switch itself off as soon as the
tank is "fu ll". Do not try to put in more fuel af-
ter the nozzle cuts out, as this will fi ll the ex-
pansion chamber in the fuel tank.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given
on a sticker on the inside of the tank fLap. Fur-
ther notes on fuel page 209.

Fig. 215 Vehicle as seen from the rear right: Openlng The tank capacity of your vehicle is given in
the fuel tan k flap the Technical data section page 2 73.

_&. WARNING
Fuel is highly inflammable and can cause
serious burns and other injuries.

l) Th is e quipment is not available on all export versions.


Checking and topping up fluids 211

- For safety reasons always switch off the - When filling the fuel tank after having
auxiliary heating" before refuelling the ru n it completely dry on a vehicle with a
vehicle. d iesel engine the Ignition must be
- When filling your tank or a spare fuel switched on for at least 30 seconds with-
canister with fuel, do not smoke and out starting the engine. When you then
keep away from naked flames. Risk of ex- start the engine it may take longer t han
plosion! normal (up to one minute) for the engine
- Observe all relevant statutory regula- to start firing . This is because air needs
tions on using, storing and transporting to be bled from the fuel system while
spare fuel canisters. starting.
- For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-
@ For the sake of the environment
cle. The canister could become damaged Do not overfill the fuel tank - this may
in an accident and Leak. cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes
- If, in exceptional circumstances, you warm.
have to carry a spare fuel can ister, please
observe the following warnings: @ Note
- Never fi ll fuel Int o the spare fuel canis- Diesel vehicles are equipped with an incor-
ter with the canister placed in or on top rect fuelling protection system ll . This sys-
of the vehicle. An electrostatic charge tem ensures that the tank can only be fuel-
could build up du ring filling, causing led from a diesel filler nozzle.
the fuel vapour to ignite. Danger of ex- - If the filler nozzle is old, damaged or too
plosion. Always place the canister on small, it may not be able to open the
the ground to fill it. protection mechanism on the fuel tank.
- Insert the filler nozzle as far as possi- In this case, try turning the filler nozzle
ble into the spare fuel canister. before inserting it in the fuel filler neck,
- If the spare fuel canister is made of use a different filling pump or seek pro-
metal, the filler nozzle must be in con- fessional assistance .
tact with the canister during filling . - The protection mechanism will not open
This helps preve nt an electrostatic if you try to add fuel from a reserve can-
charge building up. ister. You can get round this simply by
- Make sure you never spill fuel in the ve- adding the diesel fuel slowly.
hicle or In the luggage compartment.
Fuel vapour is explosive. Risk of fatal
accident!

CD CAUTION
- If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it
should be removed immediately as it
could otherwise damage the paintwork.
- Never run the tank completely dry. If
there is an irregular fuel supply, misfir-
ing can occur. As a result unburnt fuel
can enter the exhaust system and cause
damage to the catalytic converter(s).

1l May vary In different count ries


212 Checking and topping up fluids

Releasing the tank flap manually


A WARNING
The tonk flop con be released manually if the - Switch off the engine.
central locking system should foil to operate. - Remove the ignition key.
- Apply the parking brake.
- On vehicles with manual gearbox place
the gear lever in neutral, on veh icles with
automatic gearbox move the selector
lever to position P.
- Wait for the engine to cool down.
- Keep children away from engine com-
partment.
- Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These
Fig. 217 Luggage compartment (rea r rig ht): Manual fluids can cause a fire (e.g. rad iator anti-
release (example)
freeze).
The manual release mechanism is located in - Ta ke care not to cause short circu its In
the side trim on the right of the luggage com- the electrical system, especially when
pa rtment. working on the battery.
- When working in the engine compart-
" Remove the cover in the side trim. ment be aware that the radiator fa n may
" Release the ring from its holde r and carefu l- start running suddenly, even if the igni-
ly pull the ring -arrow- q (D. The tank flap is tion is switched off - risk of injury.
then released . - Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion
" Press the left side of the tank flap to open it tank when the engine is hot. The cooling
Q page 210, Fig. 215. system is under pressu re.
- Protect face, hands and arms by covering
CD CAUTION the cap with a large, thick rag to protect
Pull the ring only until you feel resistance; against escaping coolant and steam.
otherwise you may damage the manual re- - Never remove the engine cover panel -
lease mechanism (you cannot hear it re- ris k of burns!
leasing the tank flap) . - If any tests have to be performed with
the engine running, there is an extra
Bonnet safety ris k from the rotating parts, such
as the drive belts, alternator and radiator
Working on components in the engine fan, etc., a nd fro m t he high-voltage ign i-
compartment
tion system.
Extra caution is necessary when working on - Observe the following additional warn-
components in the engine compartment. ings if work on the fuel system or the
electrical system is necessary:
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
- Always disconnect the battery
scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire
- Do not smoke
when working in the engine compartment
- Never work near open flames
(e.g . when checking and refilling fluid s}. Al-
- Always keep an approved fire extin-
ways observe the warnings listed below and
guisher immediately available.
follow all normal safety precautions. The en-
gine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
potentially hazardous area q & .
Checking and topping up flu ids 213

CD CAUTION
The wiper arms shou ld be rest ing on the wind-
screen: make sure they are not in a raised po-
When topping up f luids make sure the cor- sition. Otherwise the paint may get damaged.
rect flu id is put into the correct filler open-
ing. This can otherwise cause serious mal- The bonnet can be released only when the
functions or engine damage. driver's door is open.
Pull the lever under the dashboard in the di-
@ For the sake of the environment rection indicated (arrow) r::!;> Fig. 218.
Inspect the ground underneath your vehi- Lift the bonnet slightly r::!;> .&,.
cle regularly so that any leaks are detected Press the release catch under the bonnet up-
at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or wards fig. 219. This will release the ar-
other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in rester hook.
the workshop. Open the bonnet.

@ Note _& WARNING


- I
On right-hand drive vehicles* some of the To avoid the risk of being scalded, never
containers I reservoirs mentioned below open the bonnet if you see steam or cool-
are located on the other side of the engine ant escaping from the engine compart-
compartment. ment. Wait until no steam or coolant can
be seen before opening the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- Closing the bonnet
cle.
To close the bonnet, pull it down to over-
come the spring pressure.
Then let it drop into the catches; do not
press down .&,.

_& WARNING
- For safety reasons t he bonnet must al-
ways be completely closed when the ve-
hicle is moving. After closing it always
check that it is properly secured. The
Fig. 218 Detail offootwell on driver's side: Release
lever bonnet must be flush with the adjacent
body panels.
- Should you notice that the bonnet is not
safely secured when the vehicle is mov-
ing, stop the vehicle immediately and
close the bonnet properly, otherwise it
could cause an accident.

Fig. 219 Release catch under the bonnet


214 Checking and topping up fluids

Engine compartment layout


Main components for checking and refilling

Typical locations of fluid containers, engine oil d ipsti'ck an.d engine oi l filler cap

@ Coolant expansion tank (-L) . . . 217 If you have to top up the oil between oil
@ Engine oil dipstick* ....... . . . 215 changes, use the grades of oil specified in the
@ Eng ine oil filler cap (<t::r.) . . .. . 216 table in accordance with VW standards. You
will need to know whether
Brake fluid reservoir (0)) .. . . . 218
Battery(+) beneath a cover . . . 219 - the vehicle is being serviced based on the
@ Earth point on body(- ) flexible or fixed oil change service (see last
service record in Service Schedule) .
0 Windscreen washer container
(<$) . . . . . . .. .. .......... . . 221 - the vehicle has a petrol or diesel engine (see
@ Fuse box ... . ... . .... . . . . . . . 250 sticker on inside of fuel tank flap).

The positions of the engine oil filler cap and - a diesel particulate filter is fitted on the ve-
the oil dipstick (items @ and @ ~ Fig. 220) hicle (see Delivery Inspection section of
may be different on some engine versions. Service Schedule) . .,...

Engine oil
Choosing the correct engine oil grade

The service interval display in the instrument


cluster of your vehicle will inform you when it
is time for an oil change. We recommend hav-
ing the oil changed by a qualified workshop.
Checking and topping up fluids 215

Oil Change Oil change Checking the oil level


Service (flexl- service (fixed)
ble)
Petrol VWS0400 VWS0200
engine Alternatively:
vw 504 ooa>
Diesel VW507 00 With diesel par-
engine ticulate filter:
VW507 00

Fig. 221 Guide for oil dipstick


Without diesel
particulate fil-
Checking oil level
ter:
vw 505 01 .... Park your vehicle on a level surface.
Alternatively: .... Allow the warm engine to run briefly at
vw 507 oob> id ling speed and then switch off the igni-
tion.
a> When using fuel complying with EN 228 or
.... Wait approx. two minutes.
DIN 516 261
b) When using fu el complying with EN 590 or .... Pull out the d ipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
DIN 516 28 a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
in as far as it will go.
(0 Note .... Then pull the dipstick out again and check
If the oil grades specified in the table are the oil level ~ Fig. 221. If the oil level is too
not available, you can use one of the fol low, add more engine oil ~ page 216.
lowing grades as a substitute. To prevent
Oil level in area G)
damage to the engin e, this should not be
done more than once between oil changes .... Do not top up oil.
and no more than 0 .5 litres should be
Oil level in area @
used.
- Petrol engines: ACEA A3 or API SN .... Oil can be topped up. After topping up the
(API SM) standard oil level should be in area (!).
- Diesel engines: ACEA C3 or API CJ4 Oil level in area 0
standard
.... Oil must be topped up. After topping up the
(D Note oil level should be in area <!).

- For China: Only oil complying with VW Depend ing on how you drive and the condi
standard 502 00 with viscosity tions in which the car is used, oil consumption
SAE SW-40 may be used on vehicles can be up to 0.5 ltr./1000 km. Oil consump-
with a petrol eng ine. tion is likely to be higher for the first
- The flexible oil change service is not 5000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
available in all countries. must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a jou rney.
216 Checking and topping up fluids

Topping up the engine oil ~ Cooling system


Coolant

The engine cooling system is filled at the fac-


tory with a mixture of conditioned water and
coolant additive. This coolant must not be
changed.
The coolant level is monitored by a warning
lamp in the instrument cluster ~ page 20.
However, we recommend that it should be
Fig. 222 Engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
checked occasionally.
... Switch off the engine. If you do need to top up the coolant, use a
... Unscrew cap "t!:;r1 from oil filler opening mixture of water and coolant additive. We rec-
<:> Fig. 222, <:> page 214, Fig. 220. ommend mixing coolant additive with distil-
... Carefu lly add 0.5 litres of suitable oil led water.
~ page214 .
... After two minutes check the oil level once Coolant additive
again ~ page 215, Checking the oil level. The coolant add itive contains anti-freeze and
... Top up with oil if necessary. corrosion protection agent. Only use one of
... Replace the oil filler cap carefu lly and push the following coolant additives. It is possible
the dipstick all the way in. to mix these additives.

A WARNING
-
Coolant additive Specification

- Ensure that no oil comes into contact G12++ TL 774 G


with hot engine components when top- G13 TL 774)
ping up: this could cause a fire. Only if the above
- Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes in- grades are not availa- TL 774 F
to contact with engine oil. ble:
G12+
CD CAUTION
The amount of coolant additive which needs
- The oil level must never be above area to be mixed with the water depends on the
(!),as this may result in damage to the temperatures to be expected in the winter
catalytic converter or to the engine. Con- season. If the anti-freeze concentration is too
tact a qualified workshop to extract the low, the coolant can freeze and cause eng ine
engine oil if necessary. damage.
- No add itives should be used with engine
oil. Any damage caused by the use of Coolant addi- Frost protec-
such additives would not be covered by tlve tlon
the factory warranty. Countries min . 40 %, min. -25 C
with warm max. 45 %
@ For the sake of the environment climate
- Never pour oil down drains or into the Countries min. SO%, max. -40 C
ground. with cold cli- max. 60 %
- Always observe statutory requirements mate
when disposing of empty oil canisters.
Checking and topping up flu ids 21 7

CD CAUTION
,.. Cover the cap on t he expansion tank with a
cloth, and carefu lly unscrew the cap anti-
- Have your qualified workshop check the clockwise c::> .&..
cooling system before the winter season ... Add coolant in the correct concentration
to make sure that the anti-freeze con- c::> page 216 up to the top mark.
centration is adequate for the conditions ... You should make s ure that the fluid level re-
to be expected. This applies particularly mains stable. If necessary, add more cool-
if you drive into a colder climate zone. ant.
- To prevent damage to the engine, do not .,. Screw the cap on again tightly.
use a different type of anti-freeze addi-
tive if the approved type of additive is Any ~oss of coolant normally indicates a leak
not available. In t his case use only water in the cooli ng system. Drive to a qualified
and bring the coolant concentration back workshop without delay and have the cooling
up to the correct Level as soon as possi- system checked . If there are no leaks in the
ble by putting in tlhe specified additive. system, a loss of coolant can only occur if the
- Always top up with fresh, unused cool- coolant boils and is forced out of the system
ant. as a result of overheating.
- Radiator sealants must not be added to
the coolant. A WARNING
- The cooling system is under pressure. Do
Topping up coolant not unscrew the cap on the expansion
tank when the engine is hot: you could
be scalded by escaping steam .
- The coolant and coolant additive can be a
health hazard. Store the coolant additive
in the original container in a safe place
out of reach of ch ildren - risk of poison-
ing.
- When working in the engine compart-
ment be aware that the radiator fan may
start running suddenly, even if the igni-
Fig. 223 Engine compartmen t: Markings on coolant
expansion ta nk tion is switched off - risk of injury.

Checking coolant level


,.. Park your vehicle on a level surface. Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is
,.. Switch off the ignition. empty. Air could have got into the cooling
,.. Read off the coolant level on the coolant ex- system - risk of engine damage! In this
pansion tank c::> Fig. 223. When the engine is case, do NOT drive on. You should obtain
cold, the coolant level should be between professional assistance.
the marks. When the engine is warm, it may
be slightly above the top mark.

Topping up coolant
Important: The coolant expansion tank must
not be empty c::>(D.
,.. Wait for the engine to cool down.
218 Checking and topping up fluids

Brake fluid Battery


General notes

All work on batteries requires specialist


knowledge .

The battery is located in the engine compart-


ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is
checked as part of the Inspection Service.

Disconnecting the battery


Fig. 224 Engine compartment: Markings on brake flu-
id reservoir The battery should always be left connected.
If the battery is disconnected, some of the ve-
Checking brake fluid Level hicle's functions will become inoperative (e .g.
electric windows) . These functions will require
The brake fluid Leve~ must be between the
resetting after the battery is reconnected. For
MI N and MAX marks r:::> page 214, Fig. 220.
this reason, the battery should only be discon-
If the level goes down noticeably in a s hort nected from the vehicle's electrical system
time, or drops below the MIN mark, there when absolutely necessary.
may be a leak in the brake system. You should
obtain professional assistance. The brake fluid Function Resetting
level is also monitored by a warning lamp in One-touch function c> page 52, What to do
the instrument cluster r:::> page 19. of the electric win- after a malfunction
dows
In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid
reservoir Is on the other side of the engine Remote control key If the vehicle does not
compartment. or respond to the key, the
convenience key key will have to be
Changing brake fluid synchronised
Your vehicle's Service Schedule will tell you r:::> page44
the regular intervals at which the brake fluid Digital clock r:::> page 9
is due for renewal. We recommend that you ESC indicator lamp The indicator lamp will
have the brake fluid changed by a qualified go out after driving a
workshop during a service. few yards

.&. WARNING If the vehicle is not used for long periods


- Brake fluid is poisonous; it must be stor- If you do not drive yo ur vehicle for a period of
ed in the sealed original container in a several days or weeks, the power manage-
safe place out of the reach of children. ment will gradually shut off t he on-board sys-
- Heavy use of the brakes may cause a va- tems one by one, or reduce the amount of cur-
pour Lock if the brake fluid is left in the rent they are using. This limits the amount of
system for too Long. This would seriously power consumed and helps to ensure reliable
affect the efficiency of the brakes and starting even after a long period Q page 187.
the safety of the car - risk of accident. Certain convenience features, such as remote
control unlocking, may not be ava ilable. These
CD CAUTION functions will be restored when you switch on
the ignition and start the engine. Even though
Brake fluid must not be allowed to come
into contact with the vehicle's body, other- some systems are deactivated automatically,
certain electrical equipment continues to 1JJo>
wise it will attack t he paintwork.
Checking and topping up fluids 219

draw current even when the ignition is off. If A highly explosive mixture of gases is
the vehicle is left standing for long periods, given off when the battery is under
this can result in total battery discharge. If charge!
the battery is allowed to discharge complete-
~ Keep children away from the battery
ly, an internal chemical reaction destroys the
'V!!Y and battery acid.
battery. To avoid this, the battery should be
recharged at least once a month IQ page 220.
Do not disconnect the battery; otherwise the
A WARNING
-'

anti-theft alarm system will be out of opera- Always be aware of the danger of injury
tion. and chemical burns as well as the risk of
accident or fire when working on the bat-
Winter conditions tery and the electrical system.
Cold weather is very hard on the battery. The - Wear safety glasses. Do not allow acid or
starting capacity may be reduced as a result. lead particles to come into contact with
For this reason, have the battery checked and eyes, skin or clothing.
charged if necessary before the start of win- - Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
ter. protective gloves and safety glasses. Do
not tilt the battery - acid can leak out of
&. WARNING the vapour vent. If electrolyte should
splash into the eyes rinse at once for sev-
- All work on batteries requires specialist
eral minutes using clear water. Then seek
knowledge. For queries regarding the ve-
medical care immediately. Neutralize any
hicle battery please seek the assistance
acid splashes on the skin or clothing with
of a qualified workshop - risk of chemical
soap solution, and rinse off with plenty
burns I risk of explosion!
of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake,
- The battery must not be opened. Do not
consult a doctor immediately.
attempt to make any changes to the
- Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered
electrolyte level of the battery. Other-
lights and lit cigarettes away from bat-
wise, there is a risk that a mixture of oxy-
tery. Avoid sparks (including those from
gen and hydrogen gas can accumulate
static charges) when handling cables and
and cause an explosion.
electrical equipment. Never cross the
battery poles. The resulting high-energy
Important safety warnings for handling sparks can cause injury.
a car battery
- A highly explosive mixture of gases is
All work on batteries requires specialist given off when the battery is under
knowledge. charge. Only charge battery in a well ven-
tilated area.
Wear safety glasses! - Keep ch ildren away from the battery and
battery acid.
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. - Switch off all electrical equipment be-
~ Wear protective gloves and safety fore starting any work on the vehicle
glasses. electrical system. Remove the ignition
Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered key. The minus cable of the battery must
@ lights and lit cigarettes away from the be disconnected. When changing a light
battery! bulb, it is sufficient to only turn off the
light. ....
220 Checking and topping up fluids

- Before disconnecting the battery, turn Charging the battery


off the anti-theft alarm system*! Other-
Terminals for charging the battery are fitted
wise the alarm will be triggered .
in the engine comportment.
- When disconnecting the battery from
the vehicle's electrical system, first dis-
connect the minus cable and then the
plus cable.
- Before reconnecting the battery, turn off
all electrical equipment. First connect
the plus cable, then the minus cable. The
battery cables must NOT be connected to
the wrong battery poles - this can cause
an electrical f ire.
Fig. 225 Engine compartment: Termina ls for jump
- Never charge a frozen or thawed out bat- leads and battery charger
tery - risk of explosion and chemical
burns! A battery must be replaced once it ... Note the warnings c::> &. in Important safety
has frozen. When it is discharged the warnings for handling a car battery on
battery can freeze at temperatures page 219 and c::> &,.
around 0C. ... Switch off all electrical equipment. Remove
- Make sure that tlhe vapour hose is always the ignition key.
attached to the battery. ... Open the bonnet c::> page 213.
- Never use a damaged battery- risk of ex- "" Open the battery cover.
plosion! Replace a damaged battery im- ... Connect the charger cables to the positive
mediately. battery terminal(+) and the earth point on
the body (-) (not the negative terminal on
CD CAUTION the battery) as specified .
- Never disconnect the car's battery with ... Now connect the battery charger to the
the engine running or with the ignition mains and switch on.
turned on, otherwise the electrical sys- ... After charging the battery: switch off the
tem or e lectrical. components will be battery charger and disconnect the mains
damaged. cable.
- Do not expose the battery to direct sun- ... Now disconnect the charger cables.
light over a long period oftime, as the ... Fold the cover back onto the battery in its
intense ultraviolet radiation can affect correct position.
the battery housing. ... Close the bonnet c::> page 213.
- If the car is left standing for long peri- When it is discharged the battery can freeze
ods, protect the battery from frost. The at temperatures around 0C. You must not
battery will be destroyed if it is allowed use a battery which has frozen, even after it
to freeze c::> page 220. has thawed, because the ice may have cracked
the battery casing and allowed the battery
acid to escape c::> & .

Charging the battery


Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charge voltage of 14.8 V (the battery cables
do not have to be disconnected). The battery
must not be opened while you are charging it. ""
Checking and topping up fluids 221

Important: Before you charge the battery son, if you need to replace the vehicle
make sure you read the manufacturer's in- battery, make sure that the specifica-
structions for usi ng the battery charger. tions of the new battery match the origi-
nal exactly.
&. WARNING - Make sure that the vent hose is always
Always replace a frozen battery. Never re- attached to the original opening on the
charge it - risk of explosion! side of the battery. Gases or battery acid
can otherwise escape and possibly cause
i Note damage.
- The battery holder and clamps must al-
Use only the terminals in the engine com-
ways be correctly secured.
partment to charge the battery.
- Before starting any work on the batt.ery,
always observe the warn ings listed under
Replacing the battery
G page 219, Important safety warn;ngs
A replacement battery must have the same for handling a car battery.
specifications as the original equipment bat-
tery. @ For the sake of the environment
~Batteries contain toxic substances in-
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
cluding sulphuric acid and lead. They must
power management system to control the dis-
be disposed of appropriately and must not
tribution of electrical energy Q page 187. The
be put together with ordinary household
power management function ensures that the
waste. Make sure the battery removed
battery is charged much more efficiently than
from the vehicle cannot tip over. Other-
on vehicles without a power management sys-
wise, sulphuric acid could escape.
tem . For this additional power to be available
after replacing the battery, we recommend
that the replacement battery used is of the Windscreen washer
same make and type as the original-equip-
ment battery. After changing the battery, the
power management system must be initial-
ised by a qualified workshop to ensure that
the replacement battery is charged to an opti-
mum level.

A replacement battery must have the same


capacity, voltage (12 V) and current rating. It
must also have the same dimensions as the
Fig. 226 Engine compartment: Cap of windscreen
original, factory-fitted battery and have washer container
sealed caps. The battery must comply with
the standards TL 825 06 (dated April 2008 or The container for the windscreen washer {!)
later) and VW 7 50 73 (April 2010 or later) . contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen,
the rear window and the headlight washer
CD CAUTION system" Q page 214, Fig. 220. Container ca-
- Vehicles with e.g. start/stop system or pacity Q page 273.
auxiliary heating/ventilation are equip-
Clean water should be used when topping up.
ped with a special deep cycle battery
If possible, use soft water to prevent scaling
(e.g. AGM type). The on-board electronic
on the washer jets. Always add washer fluid to
systems may develop problems if you fit the water (with anti-freeze additive in winter) . ..,.
a different type of battery. For this rea-
222 Checking and topping up fluid s

CD CAUTION
- Never put in rad i ator anti-freeze or other
additives.
- Never use washer fluid which contains
paint thinners or solvents as it can dam-
age the paintwor k.
Wheels and tyres 223

Wheels and tyres Tyres with directional tread pattern


An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
Wheels rection of rotation on tyres with directional
General notes tread. Always note the direction of rotation in-
dicated when mounting the wheel. This guar-
... When driving with new tyres, be especially antees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
careful during the first 500 km. planing, excessive noise and wear.
... If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ob-
stacle, drive very slowly and as near as pos- Wheels with bolted rim flange
sible at a right angle to the kerb. Light -alloy wheels with a bolted rim flange
... Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, consist of several components. A specia l tech-
cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any foreign nique is applied to bolt these components to-
bodies embedded in the treads. gether. Apart from safety and t rue running
... Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced this also ensures that the wheel functiorns cor-
immediately. rectly and that there is no leakage. Damaged
.,. Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. rims must therefore be replaced; you must
... Replace any m issing valve caps as soon as never attempt to repair or dismantle them
possible. c:) .&. .
... Mark the wheels before taking them off so
that they rotate in the same direction when Wheels with bolted trim parts
put back . Light-alloy wheels can be fitted with inter-
.,. When removed, the wheels or tyres should changeable trim parts which are attached to
be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark the rim using self-locking bolts. Should you
place. wish to replace damaged trim parts please
contact a qualified workshop.
New tyres
New tyres do not give maximum grip straight Retrofitting accessories
away and should therefore be "run in" by driv- Qualified workshops have full information on
ing carefully and at moderate speeds for the technical requirements when installing or
about the first 500 km. This will also help to changing tyres, rims or wheel trims.
make the tyres last longer.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-


_A WARNING
-
cording to the type and make of tyre and the Never remove the bolts on a wheel with
tread pattern. bolted rim f lange* (accident risk).

Concealed damage
CD CAUTION
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily - Please note that summer and winter
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the tyres are optimised for the prevailing
car pulling to one s ide, this may indicate that road conditions at different times of
one of the tyres is damaged . Reduce speed yeaf. We fecommend that you use winter
immediately if there is any reason to suspect tyres during the winter months. At low
that damage may have occurred . Inspect the temperatures, summer tyres lose their
tyres for damage. If no external damage is elasticity and grip, and braking perform-
visible, drive slowly and carefully to the near- ance also suffers as a result. Cracks can
est qualified workshop and have the car in- form in the tread block on summer tyres
spected . if they are used at very cold tempera-
t u res, and this can cause permanent
damage to the tyres. An increase in
224 Wheels and tyres

rolling noise and tyre Imbalance may re- The service life of your tyres depends on the
sult from this damage. Audi cannot ac- following factors :
cept responsibility for this type of dam-
Tyre pressure
age.
- Machined, polished or chrome-plated The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a
rims must not be used during the winter sticker on the end face of the driver's door
months. The process used to manufac- Q Fig. 227.
ture these types of wheel rim does not Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce
provide adequate surface protection the life of the tyres considerably and also im-
against corrosion, and the rims can be pair the car's handling. Correct inflation pres-
permanently damaged by road salt or
sures are very important, especially at high
similar. There is no guarantee or warran-
speeds.
ty entitlement In such cases.
If you prefer an extra-smooth ride and the ve-
hicle is not fu lly loaded, you can select the
Tyre service life
tyre pressure for a norma l load (no more than
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- three people travelling in the vehicle). Shou ld
ing habits will increase the service life of your you wish to drive with a full load, you must in-
tyres. crease the tyre pressure to the specified maxi-
mum.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according
to the load the vehicle is carrying. We recom-
mend adhering to the tyre pressure specifica-
tions for a maximum load.